Toshiba Welding System VF A7 User Manual

Ｅ６５８０９８８③

Safety

precautions

Preface

Contents

Read this

section first

Connection

　Instruction Manual

Operating

the inverter

Basic

Operation

The new generation

high-performance inverter

Basic

parameters

TOSVERT^TMVF-A7

Extended

^parameters6

Operation

with external

signal

Monitoring

operation

status

Peripheral

units

　　200V class 0.4～ 90kW

Table of

parameters

　　400V class 0.75～280kW

Specification

Prior to

service call

NOTICE

1. Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user of

the inverter unit.

Regular

inspection and

maintenance

2. Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter unit, and

store it in a safe place for reference.

Warranty

Precautions

of disposal

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Handling in general

Reference

　　　　Danger

Never disassemble, modify or repair the inverter. Its disassembly could

cause an electric shock, afire or an injury. Request your TOSHIBA dealer

for repair.

Never

Disassemble

-Never open the front cover of the inverter(or the door of the cabinet in

which the inverter is installed) when the inverter is energized, or you

could get a shock since a high voltage is applied to certain portions of it.

-Do not put your fingers into the panel through a wiring opening or an

opening in the cooling fan cover, or you could get a shock or an injury.

-Do not put or insert anything(e.g., electric cable, bar or steel wire) into the

inverter, or the inverter could cause a shock or fire.

Prohibited

-Do not splash water over the inverter, or the inverter could cause a shock

or a fire.

-Do not turn on the power before attaching the front cover (or closing the

door of the cabinet in which the inverter is installed), or you could get a

shock.

-Turn off the power immediately in case the inverter smokes, smells of

smoke, or produce abnormal noise. Failure to do so could lead to a fire.

In such a case, request your TOSHIBA dealer for repair.

-Due to the possibility of contaminants entering the drive, disconnect the

input power if the drive will be unused for extended periods.

The leakage current caused by the contamination may result in fire.

Mandatory

Reference

　　　　　 Warning

Do not touch any heat sink or braking resistor, or you could get a burn

since they become very hot.

Never touch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Transportation・Installation

Reference

　　　Danger

-Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any part is missing

from it. Operating the inverter in a defective condition could lead to a

shock or a fire. Request your Toshiba dealer for repair.

-Do not put any inflammable material near the inverter, or it could catch a

fire if the inverter sparks because of a breakdown, etc.

-Do not install the inverter where it can be splashed with water, etc., or it

could cause a shock or a fire.

-Use the inverter under environmental conditions specified by this

instruction manual, or it could break down.

-Install the inverter on a non-combustible board, for example, a steel plate.

Installing it on a inflammable board or wall could lead to a fire because its

back is heated up during operation.

1.4.4

Prohibited

Mandatory

1.4.4

-Do not use the inverter with the front cover detached, or it could cause a

shock.

-Install an emergency shutdown device which matches the system (for

example, a switch interlocked with the brake of the machine). Failure to

do so could lead to injury to persons since it has no emergency stop

function.

1.4.4

-Do not use any optional devices other than those designated by our

company.

1.4.4

The use of improper devices could lead to accidents.

Reference

　　　　　　　Warning

-Do not hold the front cover to carry the inverter, or the cover could come

off and cause the main unit to fall, thus causing you to get an injury.

-Do not install the inverter in any place subject to vibration, or it could fall,

causing injury to persons.

1.4.4

Prohibited

Mandatory

-For a model (20 kg or more in weight) designed for 30kW motors or larger,

carry it at least in a twosome, or it could fall and cause you to get an

injury.

-Handle large capacity model using a crane. Lifting heavy inverter causes

injury to persons. Taking care of safety for users, carefully handle in order

not to damage to the inverter.

－

Carefully lift up the inverter, hanging wires on the hanging bolts or halls

on the top or bottom of the inverter.

-Four points and perpendicular lifting is recommended. Even if

perpendicular lifting is impossible, respect the condition described in the

following figure. A crack may be attached to the product body when not

performing perpendicular lifting. Please be careful.

60° Max.

-Install the main unit on a wall, or the like, which is strong enough to

withstand its weight, or it could fall and cause injury to persons.

-Install a mechanical brake whenever the motor requires a brake (device

which retains the motor shaft). Failure to do so could lead to injury to

persons because the inverter itself has no function of mechanically

retaining the brake shaft.

1.4.4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Wiring

Reference

　　　　Danger

-Do not connect the power cable to any output terminal (U/T1, V/T2 or W/T3

on the motor side), or the inverter could break down and cause a fire.

-Do not connect a resistor to any D.C. terminal (between PA and PC or PO

and PC), or the inverter could cause a fire.

2.2

6.13.4

Prohibited

Mandatory

To install external braking resistor, refer to 6.13.4.

-Don’t touch the connector terminals and cables of the devices(MCCB) on

he input side of the inverter within 10 minutes after shutting down the

power source

-Entrust all electrical work to an experienced specialist. Wiring by an

inexperienced person could result in a fire or an electric shock.

-Connect the output terminals (on the motor side) correctly. Incorrect

connection of the terminals causes the motor to rotate in a wrong

direction, and thus could result in injury to persons.

2.2

-Perform wiring always after installing the inverter, or you could get a

shock or an injury.

-Be sure to perform the following preparatory work before proceeding to

wiring.

(1) Turn off the power.

(2) 10 minutes or more after turning off the power, make sure that charge

lamp is extinct.

(3) Using a circuit tester with a D.C. voltage measuring capacity of more

than 800V, check to be sure that the voltage remaining in the D.C.

main circuit (between PA and PC) is below 45V.

Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock.

-Tighten the terminal board fixing screws at the specified torque. Failure to

do so could lead to a fire.

-Make sure that the supply voltage is within +10%/-15% (during continuous

operation or within ±10% under full load) of the inverter's rated voltage

specified on its rating label. Supplying a voltage exceeding the above

range could lead to a breakdown, an electric shock or a fire.

-Connect grounding wires correctly and securely. Otherwise, a breakdown

or electric leakage could lead to an electric shock or a fire.

1.4.4

2.2

Be Grounded

Charged capacitors can present a shock hazard

even after source power is removed

Warning

Drives with EMI filters will retain a charge on the input terminals for up to 10 min. after the power has

been removed. To avoid electrical shock, don’t touch the connector terminals and uninsulated

source cables at either the main circuit disconnect or the drive until the capacitive charge has

dissipated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■About operation

Reference

　　　　Danger

-Do not touch any inverter's terminal when it is energized even if the motor

is standstill, or you could get a shock.

-Do not operate switches with a wet hand or not put a wet cloth on the

inverter, or you could get a shock.

-Do not get near the alarm-stopped motor when the system is in retry

mode, or you could get an injury.

Prohibited

Take safety measures, for example, attaching a cover to the motor, to

protect persons against accidents when the motor unexpectedly restarts.

-Don't set the motor constant 3 (exciting inductance:) as 1/2 or less

value of default setting value. If the motor constant 3 (exciting

inductance :) is set as extremely small value, the stole prevention

function

6.21

will incorrect-operate and will raise output frequency.

6.25.2

-Don't set the stole prevention level() as extremely small value.

When the stole prevention level() is set as motor no-load current

or value lower than it, the stole prevention function always operates. And

if it is judged as regeneration mode, frequency will be raised.

Please do not set the stole prevention level() to 30% or less in

the usual usage.

-Do not turn on the power before attaching the front cover. When the

inverter is installed in a cabinet with the inverter's front panel detached,

always close the door of the cabinet before turning on the power.

Turning on the power with the cover or the door left opened could lead to

an electric shock.

Mandatory

-Turn off the operation signal before resetting the inverter after trouble, or

the motor unexpectedly restarts, causing injury to persons.

Reference

　　　　　　　　Warning

-Operate the motor always within the allowable operation range. (Refer to

the motor’s instruction manual for the allowable operation range.)

Failure to do so could cause injury to persons.

Mandatory

When selecting the sequence that automatically restarts the motor after

recovery from a momentary power failure (Applicable to inverters)

Reference

　　　　　　　　 Warning

-Do not get near the motor or the machine.

6.13.1

The motor and the machine unexpectedly restart after recovery from a

momentary power failure.

-Stick caution labels to the inverter, the motor and the machine, to prevent

accidents due to an unexpected restart of them after recovery from a

momentary power failure.

Mandatory

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When selecting the retry mode (Applicable to inverters)

Reference

　　　　　　　　　Warning

-Do not get near the motor.

6.13.3

When the retry mode is selected, the motor and machine that stopped

after an alarm restart unexpectedly after the selected time has passed,

thus causing injury to persons.

-Stick caution labels to the inverter, the motor and the machine, to prevent

Mandatory

accidents due to an unexpected restart of them in retry mode.

About inspection and maintenance

Reference

　　　　　Danger

-Do not replace any part yourself, or you could get a shock or an injury, or

cause a fire. Request your Toshiba dealer for replacement of parts.

13.2

Prohibited

-Carry out inspection and maintenance on a daily basis. Failure to do so to

find defects in the inverter could lead to accidents.

-Be sure to perform the following preparatory work before proceeding to

inspection.

(1) Turn off the power.

13.

13.2

Mandatory

(2) 10 minutes or more after turning off the power, make sure that charge

lamp is extinct.

(3) Using a circuit tester with a D.C. voltage measuring capacity of more

than 800V, check to be sure that the voltage remaining in the D.C.

main circuit (between PA and PC) is below 45V.

Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock.

About disposal of inverters

Reference

Warning

-When you throw away the inverter, have it done by a specialist in

industrial waste disposal*.

15.

If the collection, transport and disposal of industrial waste is dune by

someone who is not licensed, it is punishable as a violation of the law.

(Laws in regard to disposal and cleaning of waste.)

Mandatory

(*)People who specialize in the processing of waste and are known

as "industrial waste collectors and transporters" or "industrial

waste disposal specialists".

Sticking warning labels

Here are examples of caution labels designed to prevent accidents caused by an inverter, a motor or

a machine. When selecting the automatic restart function or the retry function, stick the applicable

label to a conspicuous position.

Please stick this label to a conspicuous

position when selecting the sequence that

automatically restarts the machine after

recovery from a mini power failure.(An example

of the restart caution label)

Please stick this label to a conspicuous

position when selecting the retry function.

(An example of the retry caution label)

Warning (Retry function enabled)

Warning (automatic restart function enabled)

Do not get near the motor or the machine. The

motor and the machine which stopped.

Do not get near the motor or the machine. The

motor and the machine which stopped after

Because of a mini power failure, unexpectedly

restart after the preset time has passed.

an alarm, unexpectedly restart after the

time has passed.

　preset

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ⅱ． Preface

Thank you for purchasing the industrial inverter "TOSVERT VF-A7".

This inverter has a "Ver. 315"CPU or later.

Please refer to "10. Table of parameters" for the functions available for the inverter

with a CPU in this version.

The CPU version will be frequently upgraded.

■Features

　1. Noise filter incorporated

1)Every 200V or 400V model (200V 0.4～7.5KW and 400V 0.75～15kW models) has a built-in noise

filter.

2)" VF-A7" complies with the European CE marking requirements.

3)" VF-A7" complies with the UL/cUL standard.

4)" VF-A7" saves space and does not require troublesome wiring.

　2. Excellent torque control performance

1) 200% torque even at a frequency of 0.5 Hz(with vector control)

The speed control ratio is 1 :150.

2) Torque limit function

　3. A wide range of applications from simple speed control to system control

1) Auto-tuning function

All you have to do make the " VF-A7" ready for start is to connect it to the motor and the power

supply unit; 　the " VF-A7" does not require cumbersome parameter setting to start it.

2) High flexibility and system expendability

" VF-A7" has a number of functions, including torque control, sensor (or sensorless) vector

control, drooping function, commercial power/inverter switching function and various

communication functions, which allow the inverter to be used as part of a system.

3) Torque control

In addition to speed control by the frequency command, " VF-A7" is capable of speed control by

the torque command, which is best suited to winding control.

　4. Options that widen the range of application

･ Extended terminal board

･ Communication devices

　(RS485, RS232C, TOSLINE-F10M/S20)

･ Add-on cassettes compatible with sensor vector control

　(Speed feedback, torque control and positioning control, etc... )

･ Sensor vector control-compatible board

　(Speed feedback, torque control)

･ Extension panel･Parameter writer

･ Other optional devices common to all models

･ Control power supply unit

･ Heat-sink attachment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

１．Read this section first

1.1 Checking the purchase

Make sure that the inverter delivered is exactly what you ordered.

　 Warning

Use an inverter which matches the input power rating of your three-phase induction motor.

The use of an inverter unsuitable for your motor can cause it to rotate in a wrong

direction, and thus lead to grave accidents, including its burning due to overheating.

Mandatory

　　　　　　 Applicable motor label 　　　　　　　　　　 Inverter main unit 　　　　

Pet name

200V-3.7kW

Power supply

Motor capacity

Warning label

　　　　　　　 Package 　　　　　　　　　　　　 Name plate

TRANSISTOR INVERTER

TYPE-FORM

VFA7-2037PL

Inverter type

SOURCE

OUTPUT

3PH 200-230V-50/60Hz

3PH 200-230V

Power supply

Rated output current

and capacity

0.01

～

80(400MAX)Hz 16.6A 6.5kVA

LOT No.

SERIAL No.

75℃ Cu wire

Type indication

M6587144P005

MADE IN JAPAN

1.2　Contents of the product code

Special

Type

　　 Form

specification code

ＶＦＡ７

２０３７ＰＬＹ－Ａ２２

Additional

functions

Special

Model name

Input voltage

Applicable motor capacity

Operating panel

specification code

A□□ :Special

spec. code

0.4kW:004

75kW:750

90kW:900

P :Provided

F :External

heat sink

0.75kW:007

TOSVERT

2:200V～230V

P1 :Provided

1.5kW:015 110kW:110K

2.2kW:022 132kW:132K

3.7kW:037 160kW:160K

5.5kW:055 220kW:220K

7.5kW:075 280kW:280K

11kW:110

VF-A7 series

4:380V～460V

　(37kW and more) N :with dynamic

PL :Provided braking circuit

with noise filter NF :External

(□□ is a

number)

heat sink

with dynamic

braking circuit

15kW:150

Y :Others

18.5kW:185

(non-standard)

22kW:220

30kW:300

Z :Explosion proof

37kW:370

45kW:450

55kW:550

Note) Turn off the power in advance when checking the rating of the inverter installed in a cabinet.

A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.3 Names and functions

1.3.1 Panel description

VEC lamp

RUN lamp

MON lamp

PRG lamp

Lit when the inverter is in

operation or blinks when It

is in auto acceleration/

deceleration mode.

Lit when the inverter

is in parameter

setting mode.

Lit when the Inverter

is in vector control

mode.

Lit when the

inverter is in

monitor mode.

STOP key

ECN lamp

Pressing this key

while the RUN key

lump is lit causes

the motor to make a

slowdown stop.

Lit when the inverter

is in energy-saving

mode.

MONITOR key

RUN key lamp

Used to display the

operation frequency,

parameter setting

Lit when the RUN key

is enabled.

error messages, etc.

RUN key

Pressing this key

while the RUN key is

lit starts the motor.

ENTER key

　 DOWN key

UP key

UP/DOWN key lam

With these keys, you

can set the operation

frequency while the

UP/DOWN lamp is lit.

[ Front view ]

Connector for options

Optional board

Used to install the following options:

･ Expansion TB option unit

･ Vector option unit

･ F10M option unit

･ S20 option unit

CHARGE lamp

Used to install the

Indicates that a high voltage

remains in the inverter. Do not

open the terminal board cover

for safety while this lamp is lit.

following options:

･ PG feedback options

･ PG feed back board, etc.

Pushing 　mark,

make this cover

slide to the right.

Cover for common serial

option connectors

To use connectors reserved

for options, detach this

cover by sliding it to the

right.

･ Parameter writer

･ Extension panel, etc.

Sink/source

switching

Terminal board cover

Cover for serial RS485

connectors

Be sure to attach the cover

before starting the

operation to prevent

persons from touching the

terminal board in error.

To use an RS485 connector,

detach this cover by sliding it to

the right.(Refer to 2.3.3)

Terminal board cover fixing screws

A-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Warning label on the top (*1)

Cooling fin

Connectors for optional

add-on module/board

Wiring hole (*2)

Ventilation slits

Rating label

[Bottom view]

　[Side view]

(*1) Peel off this label when the inverter is installed in a rather hot place. (Models for 15kW motor or smaller)

(*2) Using scissors or a cutter, cut the rubber bush in the wiring hole as shown below.(Models for 22kW

motor or smaller)

Cut

Rubber bush

Panel indication

LED display is using the following signs to indicate the operation parameter and so on.

LED indication (number)

０

１

２

３

４

５

６

７

８

９

－























LED indication (alphabet)

ＡａＢｂＣｃＤｄＥｅＦｆＧｇＨｈＩｉＪｊＫｋＬｌＭｍ























ＮｎＯｏＰｐＱｑＲｒＳｓＴｔＵｕＶｖＷｗＸｘＹｙＺｚ



















A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.3.2 Main circuit, control power supply and control circuit terminal boards

１）Main circuit terminal board

VFA7-2004PL～2037PL

VFA7-4007PL～4037PL

VFA7-2055PL, 2075PL

VFA7-4055PL, 4075PL

VFA7-2110P～2150P

VFA7-4110PL～4150PL

A-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VFA7-2185P, 2220P

VFA7-4185P, 4220P

Grounding terminal

VFA7-2300P, 4300P

VFA7-4370P1～4550P1

A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VFA7-2370P1～2550P1

VFA7-4750P1

VFA7-2750P1

VFA7-4110KP1, 4132KP1

VFA7-2900P1

VFA7-4160KP1～4280KP1

A-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　２）Control power supply terminal board

Note)To use R0,S0 terminal on 22kW model or smaller, you need a Control power supply

unit option.(Refer to 9.4)

VFA7-2055PL～2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-4300P

VFA7-4055PL～4220P

VFA7-2370P1～2900P1

VFA7-4370P1～4280KP1

Control power

supply inputs

Control power

Power supply

supply inputs(*1) for control circuit

(*1)Refer to 2.2 for the connection of control power

cables by voltage(R46,R41 and S0 terminals).

A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　３）Control circuit terminal

The control circuit terminal board is common to all models.

RES S1

ＩＩ A M

ＶＩ PP

O UT2

FM O UT1

P24

FLA

FLB

FLC

Screw size：M3

ST-CC shorting bar

Refer to section 2.3.2 for the functions of terminals.

1.3.3　Detaching the terminal board front cover

Detach the front lower cover for wiring, following the steps below.

　　　　　■Less than 22kW

①

②

Hooked

Remove the two screws

at the lower part of the

front cover.

To detach the cover, draw

the terminal board cover

toward

you

while

swinging it up a little.

* For a 30kW model or larger, detach the whole front cover for wiring.

A-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4 Notes on the application of inverters

1.4.1　Notes on motors combined with inverters

　　　　　Keep in mind the following notes when using the VF-A7 in combination with a motor.

　　Warning

Use an inverter which matches the input power rating of your three-phase induction motor.

The use of an inverter unsuitable for your motor can cause it to rotate in a wrong direction,

and thus lead to serious accidents, including its burning due to overheating.

Mandatory

　　　　　　Comparison with commercial power operation

The VF-A7 inverter uses a sinusoidal PWM control system. However, the waveforms of

electric currents passing through the main and control circuits are not perfectly sinusoidal but

slightly distorted though they are very close to perfect sine waves. For this reason, a motor

produces more heat, larger noise and larger vibration when operated by means of the inverter

than when operated directly by commercial power.

　　　　　　Operation in low speed ranges

Operating a general-purpose motor by means of the inverter causes a decrease in the cooling

efficiency of the motor. So, reduce the motor's output below the rated load when operating it

in a low speed range.

If you wish to operate a motor continuously at the rated torque, then use a Toshiba VF motor

designed specially for use in conjunction with an inverter. When the inverter is combined with

a VF motor, its overload protection level needs to be changed to "VF motor" ( setting).

　　　　　　Adjustment of overload protection level

The VF-A7 inverter has an overload detection circuit (electronic thermal detection) to protect

the motor from overload. The reference current for the electronic thermal detection is set to

the rated current of the inverter at the factory, and it needs to be adjusted to the rated current

of the general-purpose motor combined with it.

　　　　　　High-speed operation at a frequency of 60 Hz or over

When a motor is operated at a frequency of 60 Hz or over, it produces larger noise and larger

vibration, which can exceed a limit that the motor or its bearings can withstand. Contact the

motor maker if you wish to operate the motor at such a high frequency.

　　　　　　Load of an oil lubrication type

When a speed reducer or a gear motor of an oil lubrication type is operated by the inverter, its

oil lubrication efficiency decreases in low speed ranges. Inquire of the speed reducer maker

about the allowable speed reduction range.

　　　　　　Extremely light load or load producing a very small moment of inertia

When a motor is operated under an extremely light load (e.g., at a load factor of less than

50%) or it drives a load which produces a very small moment of inertia, it sometimes becomes

unstable, for example, it produces abnormal vibration or trips because of an over-current. In

such a case, lower the carrier frequency to cope with this problem.

　　　　　　Unstable operation

When the inverter is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads, it

sometimes makes the operation of the motor or load unstable.

･ A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the inverter

･ A special type of motor, for example, an explosion-proof motor

When using the inverter for such motors, lower the inverter's carrier frequency to stabilize

the operation. (In vector control mode, do not lower it below 2.2 kHz.)

･ A motor with a large backlash, which is coupled with a load

In this case, use the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration function, or in vector control

mode, adjust the response time (setting of moment of inertia) or switch to V/f control

mode to stabilize the operation.

A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

･ A load, e.g., a reciprocating load, which requires a frequent change in the rotating speed

In this case, if the inverter is in vector control mode, adjust the response time (setting of

moment of inertia) or switch to V/f control mode to stabilize the operation.

If it is operated in vector control mode, only a motor whose capacity is same as inverter

standard or 1 rank lower is applied.

If it is operated in V/F (other than vector control), the rotating of motor can be unstable in

combination with 3 or more ranks smaller motor.

① Lower the setting value of F300(PWM carrier frequency). (It causes much magnetic

noise of motor, but it is not abnormal.)

② In the case that it is still unstable even if the carrier frequency is lowered to 2.2kHz at

(①), set the setting value of F489(Dead time compensation) to 1 (Disabled) .

　　　　　　Braking of a motor after power shutoff

If the power is shut off while the motor is still rotating, the motor keeps rotating (or coasting) for

a while before it comes to a complete stop. If you wish to stop it soon after turning off the

power, equip the motor with an auxiliary braking system. There are several types of braking

systems available, for example, mechanical and electrical types. Select a braking system

which matches your system.

　　　　　　Load producing negative torque

When the inverter is combined with a load producing negative torque, the over-voltage or

over-current protective function of the inverter sometimes works and causes the motor to trip.

In this case, it is necessary to install a dynamic braking resistor, etc., suitable for the load.

　　　　　　Motor with a braking system

When a brake-equipped motor is connected directly with the inverter, the brake cannot be

released at start-up because of an insufficient voltage. To avoid this, connect the brake cables

separately from the motor main cables.

(Non-exciting brake)　　　　　　　　　　

MC2

MC1

OUT1

P24

Three-phase

power supply

FLB FLC ST

Three-phase

power supply

MC3

LOW

MC1

MC3

LOW

MC3

MC2

MC3

MC2

MC3

　　　　　　　　　　Circuit configuration 1　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 Circuit configuration 2

In circuit configuration 1, the brake is turned on and off by means of MC2 and MC3. If the

circuit is configured differently, the motor can trip because of a locked rotor current produced

during braking.

In circuit configuration 2, the brake is turned on and off by means of a low-speed signal

OUT1. However, for certain applications, e.g., elevator applications, it is recommended to

use a low-speed detection signal (function of terminal OUT1) to turn on and off the motor.

Contact your Toshiba dealer before designing a system.

A-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.2 Notes on inverters

　　　　　　Over-current protective function

The inverter has an over-current protective function. The current for this protection is adjusted

to the maximum current rating of the applicable motors by default. Therefore, when the

inverter is used to control a motor with a relatively small capacity, it is necessary to readjust the

over-current protection level and the electronic thermal protective function. In such a case,

follow the procedure specified in 5.13 to readjust them.

　　　　　　Inverter capacity

An inverter with a small capacity (kVA) must not be used for a motor with a relatively large

capacity even if the motor is operated under a small load. If an inverter is used this way, the

output peak current rises high because of a current ripple, thus causing the motor to trip easily.

　　　　　　Power factor improving capacitor

No power factor improving capacitor should be connected on the output side of the inverter.

When the inverter is used for a motor equipped with a capacitor for power factor improvement,

remove the capacitor from the motor. Connecting such a capacitor causes the inverter to break

down and the motor to trip, or breaks the capacitor itself.

Inverter

Remove the power factor improving

capacitor and the surge absorber, if any.

Power factor improving capacitor

　　　　　　Use of an inverter at a voltage other than the rated one

There is a need to connect it to a power unit supplying a voltage different from the rated

voltage, increase or reduce the supply voltage to the inverter's rated voltage, using a

transformer, etc.

Use of a set of inverters, which requires circuit-breaking devices

　（Breaking fuse)

M CCB1

M CCB2

M CCB3

IN V 1

IN V 2

M CCBn

IN V n

Circuit-breaking of defective inverter

When two or more inverters are connected to the same power line as shown above, it is

necessary to select a circuit-breaking characteristic ensuring that, for example, if a short circuit

occurs in INV 1, only MCCB2 trips but not MCCB1. If it is difficult to select a proper characteristic,

then insert a breaking fuse between MCCB2 and INV 1 in this case.

■Note on the disposal of inverters

Be sure to dispose of inverters as industrial wastes, when they become unnecessary.

A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.3 Influences of leakage currents and measures against it

　Warning

An electric current can leak through an input or output cable of the inverter because of its insufficient

capacitance and, sometimes, affects the peripheral systems. The amount of a leakage current depends

on the carrier frequency, the length of the input/output cable, etc. It is advisable to take the following

measures to prevent leakage currents.

(1) Influences of a current leaking into other systems via the ground

An electric current can leak not only into other circuits of an inverter but also into other

inverters through grounding wires. Such a leakage current can exerts influences on various

electronic devices, for example, malfunction of ground leakage breakers or relays, ground

relays, fire alarms, sensors, etc., noise on CRTs and display of incorrect current values on a

CRT screen.

Power

supply

Inverter

Measures to be taken:

1. Lower the PWM carrier frequency.

Use parameter  to lower the PWM carrier frequency.

2. Use high frequency-ready ground leakage breakers (e.g., Esper Mighty series(manufactured

by Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd.)). When these ground leakage breakers are installed,

there is no need to lower the PWM carrier frequency.

3. If sensors and CRTs are affected, they can be restored by lowering the PWM carrier

frequency as described in 1 above. However, if lowering the PWM carrier frequency results

in an increase in magnetic noise, contact your Toshiba dealer.

※Cautions for applying models with a built-in noise filter.

For the models with a built-in noise filer, the leakage current value at power supply of

Δ(delta) connecting wire (1 phase earth) can be larger than normal inverter, so be

careful.

VFA7-2004PL～2037PL : about 4mA

VFA7-2055PL, 2075PL : about 13mA

(2) Influences of a current leaking from a cable into other cables

① Thermal relay

If a current leaks from an output cable of an inverter to other cables because of its

insufficient capacitance, the high-frequency elements of the leakage current sometimes

increase the effective current value, and thus cause external relays to malfunction. For a

model with relatively long cables (longer than 50 m) or a model designed for motors with

small current ratings (several amperes), especially 400V model with a small capacity

(3.7kW or less), the external thermal relays can malfunction more easily because a

leakage current can be too large as compared with the current rating of the motor.

A-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power

supply

Inverter

Measures to be taken:

1. Use the electronic thermal function provided for the inverter.

Use parameter , to set the electronic thermal function.

2. Lower the PWM carrier frequency, though this results in an increase in motor magnetic noise.

Use parameter  to lower the PWM carrier frequency.

3. For improvement, connect film capacitors with capacitance of 0.1 to 0.5μF-1000V to the

input and output terminals in each phase of the each thermal relay.

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

② CT and ammeter

When a CT and an ammeter are installed externally to monitor the output current of the

inverter, the ammeter could be burned by the high-frequency elements of a leakage current.

For a model with relatively long cables (longer than 50 m) or a model for motors with small

current ratings (several amperes), especially 400V model with a small capacity (3.7kW or less),

the ammeter can be burned more easily by the high-frequency elements of a leakage current

which flows into it through the external CT because a leakage current can be too large as

compared with the current rating of the motor.

Measures to be taken:

1. For external meters, use the meter output terminals in the inverter's control circuit.

Output currents can also be output to the meter output terminals (AM). Use a 1 mAdc full-

scale ammeter or a 7.5 Vdc-1 mA full-scale voltmeter.

2. Use the monitor function provided for the inverter.

Use the monitor function provided for the inverter to check the output current.

A-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1.4.4 Notes on installation

■Installation environment

The VF-A7 inverter is an electronic control device. Therefore, due consideration should be given

to its installation environment.

　 Danger

-Do not put any inflammable material near the inverter, or it could catch a fire

if the inverter sparks because of trouble.

Prohibited

Mandatory

-Use the inverter under environmental conditions specified by this instruction

manual, or it could break down.

Warning

-Do not install the inverter in any place subject to vibration, or it could fall and cause

injury to persons.

Prohibited

Mandatory

Make sure that the supply voltage is within +10%/-15% (within ±10% during

continuous operation under full load) of the inverter's rated voltage specified on its

rating label.

Supplying a voltage exceeding the above range could lead to a breakdown, an

electric shock or a fire.

A-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

･ Avoid installing the inverter in a hot,

damp, or dusty place, a place subject

to freezing or water splash, or a place

full of metal chips.

･ Do not install the inverter where there

are gases that corrode metal or

solvents that adversely affect plastic.

・Use the inverter at ambient temperatures of -10 to 40℃ (-10 to 50℃ for models designed for

18.5kW motors or larger).

Measuring position

Note) The inverter produces heat. When installing it in a cabinet, consider its ventilating

condition and internal space. When an inverter for 15kW motors or smaller is installed in a

cabinet, it is advisable to peel off the label on the top of the inverter. Models for 18.5kW motors

or larger can be used at ambient temperatures of up to 50℃. (These models have no label on

their top.)

･ Do not install the inverter in any place subject to vibration.

Note) If you intend to install it in a place subject to

vibration, you should take measures to protect it

from vibration. In such a case, contact your

Toshiba dealer in advance.

･ If installing the inverter close to any of the following appliances or devices, take necessary

measures to prevent them from malfunctioning.

Solenoid ... Connect a surge suppressor to the coil.

Brake ... Connect a surge suppressor to the coil.

Magnetic contactor ... Connect a surge suppressor to the

coil.

Fluorescent lamp ... Connect a surge suppressor to the coil.

Resistor ... Move it away from the inverter.

Resistor

A-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Installation

Danger

- Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any part is missing from it.

Operating the inverter in a defective condition could lead to a shock or a fire.

Request your Toshiba dealer for repair.

Prohibited

Mandatory

- Install the inverter on a non-combustible board, such as a steel plate. Installing it

on an inflammable wall or board could lead to a fire because its back is heated up

during operation.

- Do not use the inverter with the front cover detached, or it could cause a shock.

- Install an emergency shutdown device which matches the system (for example, a

switch interlocked with the brake of the machine). Failure to do so could lead to

injury to persons since it has no emergency stop function.

- Do not use any optional devices other than those designated by Toshiba. The use

of improper devices could lead to accidents.

Warning

- Install the main unit on a wall, or the like, which is strong enough to withstand its

weight, or it could fall and cause injury to persons.

- Install a mechanical brake whenever the motor requires a brake (device which

retains the motor shaft). Failure to do so could lead to injury to persons because

the inverter itself has no function of mechanically retaining the brake shaft.

Prohibited

■Installation place

Install the inverter vertically on a flat steel wall in a well-ventilated place. When installing two or

more inverters, leave a clearance of at least 10 cm between inverters placed side by side.

above 10cm

above 5cm

above 10cm

The clearances indicated above are minimum clearances to be secured. Every air-cooling type

model is equipped with a cooling fan. For this type of inverter, therefore, leave as large

clearances as possible above and under the inverter.

For a model designed for 37kW motors or larger, leave a clearance of at least 20 cm above and

under it for easy installation of wires and possible replacement of the fan.

Note) Do not install the inverter in a hot, damp, or dusty place, or a place full of metal chips.

When you intend to install in a critical environment, consult your Toshiba dealer in

advance.

A-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Calorific values of inverters and amount of air to be ventilated

The VF-A7 series of inverter loses about 5% of energy when switching electric currents from AC,

DC, then to AC. To limit a temperature rise due to this energy loss, it is necessary to forcefully

ventilate and cool down the cabinet in which the inverter is installed.

The table below lists the amounts of air to be ventilated forcefully and the heat radiation areas

required for closed-type cabinets containing an inverter.

Applicable Calorific value

Heat radiation area required

Amount of air to be

Voltage

class

motor

(kW)

0.4

of inverter

(W)

for closed-type cabinet

ventilated forcefully

(m³/min.)

0.29

0.40

0.63

0.80

1.3

(m²)

1.0

1.4

2.2

2.8

4.4

6.2

8.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

110

140

220

310

1.8

2.4

420

580

770

940

3.3

4.4

5.4

6.3

8.5

8.7

10.5

12.8

17.4

20.8

0.40

0.63

0.80

1.3

11.6

15.4

18.8

22.2

29.8

30.6

37.0

45.0

61.0

73.0

1.4

200V

18.5

1110

1490

1530

1850

2250

3050

3650

110

140

220

280

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

2.2

2.8

4.4

5.6

1.6

2.1

370

7.4

530

710

800

940

3.0

4.0

4.6

5.4

7.2

8.5

10.3

13.1

15.7

19.1

22.9

27.6

37.9

48.2

10.6

14.2

16.0

18.8

25.4

29.8

36.2

46.0

55.0

67.0

80.2

97.0

133.0

169.0

18.5

400V

1270

1490

1810

2300

2750

3350

4010

4850

6650

8450

110

132

160

220

280

Note)The calorific values in the above table do not include those of optional external devices

(such as input reactors, DC reactors and radio noise filters).

A-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■

Control panel designed in consideration of possible influences of noise

Inverters produce high-frequency noise. To avoid influences of noise, measures must be taken

in designing a control panel. Here are some examples of measures against noise.

･ Separately install the wires of the main circuit and those of the control circuit. Do not install

their wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.

･ Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuit.

･ Separate the input wires (on power supply side) of the main circuit from the output wires (on

motor side). Do not install them in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind

them together.

･ Be sure to ground the grounding terminal (G/E) of the inverter.

･ Be sure to connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay

installed near the inverter.

･ Install noise filters, as required.

■Notes on the installation of two or more inverters in a single cabinet

When installing two or more inverters in a single cabinet, take the following precautions:

･ Leave a clearance of at least 10 cm between inverters placed side by side.

･ Leave a clearance of at least 20 cm between inverters placed one above another.

･ Install a deflector, etc., to prevent the upper inverter from being affected by heat produced and

being exhausted by the lower one.

Inverter

Cooling fun

Deflector

Inverter

Installation of Cooling fun

A-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Heat-sink going out attachment(simple type)

To install a standard VF-A7 designed for 37kW motor or larger, you can choose a one from next

two forms.

(1) Normal attachment (Whole the inverter is in the cabinet)

(2) Heat-sink going out (the cabinet) attachment(simple type)

Heat-sink going out attachment reduces the generation of heat inside the cabinet.

When you carry out heat-sink going out attachment, please change the position of the

attachment ornaments (hanging hole) of the inverter according to the following figure.

(1) Normal attachment

Take this ornament

(2) Heat-sink going out attachment

(simple type)

Take this ornament

off (*1)

Change the

position

Change the position

(*1) Metallic ornaments with the hanging hole are attached only in the following models.

200V class: Applicable motor capacity is 75kW or larger

400V class: Applicable motor capacity is 110kW or larger

A-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Connection

　 Danger

･Never disassemble, modify or repair the inverter. Its disassembly could cause an

electric shock, a fire or an injury. Request your Toshiba dealer for repair.

Disassemble

Prohibited

･Do not put or insert anything (e.g., an electric cable, a bar or a steel wire) into the

inverter, or the inverter could cause a shock or a fire.

･Do not splash water over the inverter, or the inverter could cause a shock or a fire.

Warning

･Do not hold the front cover to carry the inverter, or the cover could come off and

cause the main unit to fall, thus causing you to get an injury.

Prohibited

Mandatory

･For models designed for 30kW motor or larger, carry it at least in a twosome, or it

could fall and cause you to get an injury.

　2.1 Cautions as to wiring

　 Danger

･Never open the front cover of the inverter (or the door of the cabinet in which the

inverter is installed) when the inverter is energized, or you could get a shock since a

high voltage is applied to certain portions of it.

Prohibited

Mandatory

･Do not turn on the power before attaching the front cover (or closing the door of the

cabinet if the inverter is installed in it). Turning on the power with the cover or the

door left opened could lead to an electric shock.

･Entrust all electrical work to an experienced specialist. Wiring by an inexperienced

person could result in a fire or an electric shock.

･Connect the output terminals (on the motor side) correctly. connection of the

terminals causes the motor to rotate in a wrong direction, and thus could result in

injury to persons.

･Perform wiring always after installing the inverter, or you could get a shock or an

injury.

･Be sure to perform the following preparatory work before proceeding to wiring.

(1) Turn off the power.

(2) Wait more than 10 minutes, and make sure that the charge lamp is extinct.

(3) Using a circuit tester with a D.C. voltage measuring capacity of more than 800 V,

check to be sure that the voltage remaining in the D.C. main circuit (between PA and

PC) is below 45 V to do so could lead to an electric shock.

･Tighten the terminal board fixing screws at the specified torque. Failure to do so could

lead to a fire.

･Connect grounding wires correctly and securely. Failure to do so could cause an

electric shock or a fire if current leakage occurs or the inverter breaks down.

Be Grounded

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Warning

･Do not connect any device or unit with a built-in capacitor (noise filter, surge

suppressor, etc.) to output terminals (on the motor side), or it could cause the risk of

a fire.

Prohibited

■Prevention of radio noise

Prevent interference, such as radio noise, separately install and bind cables connected to the

power supply-side terminals (R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3) of the main circuit and those connected to the

motor-side terminals (U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3).

　 ■Power supply to the control and main circuits (for the 22kW and smaller models)

You want to keep the control circuit alive when the main circuit shuts off because of trouble or

tripping, you can use an optional power supply unit to supply power to the control circuit

separately from the main circuit.

■Notes on wiring

･ When connecting wires to the main circuit terminals, use crimp contacts because there is no

large space between terminals, and attach them in order so that they do not come into contact

with each other.

･ Be sure to ground the inverter by connecting wires of the following size or larger to the

grounding terminal G/E.(UL standard)

Voltage

class

Grounding wire size

AWG(cross-section[mm²])

Applicable motor

0.4～5.5kW

7.5kW

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

6(14)

4(22)

2(38)

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

8(8)

For the 200V 0.4~7.5kW

models and the 400V

0.75~7.5kW models, a

grounding screw (M5) is

provided in the wiring hole

cover, in addition to a

grounding terminal.

11～15kW

18.5～22kW

30～37kW

45～55kW

75～90kW

0.75～11kW

15kW

200V

18.5kW

22～30kW

37～55kW

75kW

6(14)

4(22)

2(38)

400V

110～132kW

160～220kW

280kW

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

300(150)

･ Refer to the table in 9.1 for wire sizes.

･ Wire sizes listed in 9.1 is for the case the wire length is below 30m. To use wires longer than

30m, you need larger cables than listed in 9.1.

･ Tighten a terminal stand screw with specified bolting torque.

Recommended bolting torque for terminal stand

N・m

0.5

1.2

2.4

4.0

8.0

lb・ins

4.4

M10

M12

142

283

B-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.2 Standard connection

　 Danger

-Do not connect the power cables to any output terminal (U/T1, V/T2 or W/T3 on the

motor side), or the inverter could break down and cause a fire.

-Do not connect a resistor to any D.C. terminal (between PA and PC or PO and PC), or

the inverter could cause a fire.

To install external braking resistor, refer to 6.13.4.

-Connect grounding wires correctly and securely. Failure to do so could cause an

electric shock or a fire if current leakage occurs or the inverter breaks down.

Prohibited

Be Grounded

[Standard connection diagram for sink logic(minus common)]

200V class: 0.4～22kW

400V class: 0.75～22kW

DC reactor (DCL)

*2 (Optional)

Main circuit power supply

External braking resistor（Refer to 6.13.4 for details）

When using an external braking resistor in 3.7kW

model or less, change the connection of the internal

resistor from terminal PB1 to terminal PR1.

200V class（0.4～7.5kW）：

　　　3-phase 200～230V-50/60Hz

200V class（11～22kW）：

　　　3-phase 200～220V-50Hz

　　　3-phase 200～230V-60Hz

400V class（0.75～22kW）

This circuit is provided

only for the 3.7kW and

smaller models.

PB PC

(PA1)(PB1)

(PR1)

　　　3-phase 380～460V-50/60Hz

Motor

Built-in dynamic braking resistor

MCCB

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

Main circuit

W/T3

When using a separate power source

Forward

Reverse

for the control circuit

For the 22kW and smaller models,

power is supplied to the control circuit

from the main circuit. An optional device

is required to

supply from

another source.

(though

terminals only

Control

circuit

＊１

CN21

FLA

FLB

CN21

Standby

Reset

RES

Control circuit

Option

Factory

default

settings

FLC

are provided.)

Preset

speed 1

*1: The control power supply terminals

RO and SO are optionally

Control panel

Preset

speed 2

P24

available for the 22kW and

Connector for

Preset

speed 3

OUT1

common serial

communication

RS485 connector

for serial

smaller models. Though terminals

RO and SO are fitted as

SINK

Preset

speed 4

standard for the 22kW and

smaller models as well, they

are not connected internally.

*2: The inverter is shipped with

the terminals PO and PA

OUT2

G/E

SOURCE

communication

Common

Current signal

ＩＩ

shorted with a bar. Remove

this shorting bar when installing

a DC reactor (DCL).

RR PP

FP FM AM CC

：4 to 20mA

Voltage signal：-10～+10V

Voltage signal： 0～10V

＋

Digital

Frequency

meter

Ammeter

voltmeter

－

External potentiometer

(or voltage signal between RR and CC: 0～10V)

Voltmeter or ammeter

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Standard connection diagram for sink logic(minus common)]

200V class: 30～55kW

400V class: 30～75kW

External braking resistor (Optional)

（Refer to 6.13.4 for details）

DC reactor (DCL)

*2 (Optional)

Installation of a dynamic braking drive

circuit inside the inverter is required.

Main circuit power supply

200V class 30～55kW）：

（

　　　3-phase 200～220V-50Hz

　　　　　　　200～230V-60Hz

400V class

（30～75kW）：

　　　3-phese 380～440V-50Hz

　　　　　　　380～460V-60Hz

Motor

MCCB

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

Main circuit

W/T3

Forward

Reverse

Control

circuit

＊１

＊４

＊３

(R20)

RES

Standby

Reset

Factory

default

settings

(S20)

*1: Connect a power source for

the control circuit.

＊４

FLA

FLB

Preset

speed 1

*2: The inverter is shipped with

the terminals PO and PA

shorted with a bar. Remove

this shorting bar when

installing a DC reactor (DCL).

*3: Power output for the control

circuit, which is provided

only for the 400V 37kW

and larger models.

Control panel

Preset

speed 2

FLC

Preset

speed 3

P24

SIN K

Preset

speed 4

Connector for

common serial

communication

SO U RCE

OUT1

Common

Single-phase

207.5～220V-50Hz

207.5～230V-60Hz

(10VA)

RS485 connector

for serial

communication

OUT2

G/E

Current signal

ＩＩ

：4～20mA

FM AM CC

V I

Voltage signal：-10～+10V

＋

Digital

Frequency

meter

Ammeter

Voltage signal：0～10V

voltmeter

－

External potentiometer

Voltmeter or ammeter

(or voltage signal between RR and CC: 0～10V)

*4: Connections of control power cables by voltage for the

400V 37kW and larger models.

Single-phase 415～440V-50Hz

Single-phase 380～415V-50/60Hz

415～460V-60Hz

R46

R41

Control

circuit

R20

S20

B-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Standard connection diagram for sink logic(minus common)]

200V class: 75～90kW

400V class: 110 ～280kW

　　　　　　　　Be sure to attach DC reactor.

Dynamic braking resistor (Optional)

（Refer to 6.13.4 for details）

DC reactor (DCL)

*2 (Optional)

Main circuit power supply

200V class 75,90kW）：

3-phase 200～230V-50Hz/60Hz

（

400V class

（110～280kW）：

3-phese 380～460V-50Hz/60Hz

Motor

MCCB

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Main circuit

Forward

run signal

Reverse

Control

circuit

＊４

＊１

run signal

Standby

(R20)

RU N

＊３

M C

Factory

default

settings

(S20)

Reset

RES

＊４

FLA

FLB

Preset

speed 1

b-contact of

Surge suppressor

Control panel

overload relay

Preset

speed 2

O N

O FF

FLC

Preset

speed 3

RU N

P24

SIN K

RU N

Preset

speed 4

Connector for

common serial

communication

RS485 connector

for serial

*1:Connect a power source for

the control circuit.

*2:The inverter is shipped with

the terminals PO and PA

shorted with a bar. Remove

this shorting bar and

SO U RCE

OUT1

Common

OUT2

G/E

Current signal

ＩＩ

4～20m A

communication

install a DC reactor (DCL).

*3:Power output for the control

circuit, which is provided

only for the 400V 37kW

and larger models.

FP FM AM CC

Voltage signal：-10～+10V

＋

　Digital

Single-phase

207.5～230V-50/60Hz

(10VA)

Frequency

Ammeter

voltmeter

meter

Voltage signal：0～10V

－

　　　　　　External potentiometer

Voltmeter or ammeter

(or voltage signal between RR and CC: 0～10V)

*4: Connections of control power cables by voltage for the

400V 37kW and larger models.

* Connection of a RUN relay for the 400V models

Single-phase 415～440V-50Hz

Single-phase 380～415V-50/60Hz

415～460V-60Hz

(R20)

R46

R41

R46

R41

Control

circuit

Control

circuit

(S20)

FLA

FLB

R20

Surge suppressor

O N

O FF

FLC

RU N

S20

RU N

*5: For easy maintenance and inspection, connect the control power terminals RO and SO to the primary side of the MC in the main

circuit so that the control panel can be checked if only the control circuit is energized.

B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.3 Explanation of terminals

2.3.1 Main circuit terminals

Figure below shows an example of the wiring of the main circuit. Use optional devices, as required.

■Connecting a power source and a motor

　 VF-A7 　

Connect the power

source to the terminals cables to the terminals

Connect the motor

Power source

R, S and T.

U, V and W.

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

G/E

Motor

No-fuse

breaker

■Connecting peripheral devices

Magnetic

contactor

Radio noise

reduction filter

reactor (high-attenuation)

Non-fuse

breaker

Input

Surge suppressing filter

Motor

Ｒ/L1

Ｕ/T3

Inverter

Power

source

Ｓ/L2

Ｖ/T2

Ｗ/T1

Ｔ/L3

Zero-phase

reactor

PA P0

PA PB

Simplified radio noise filter

Note) Connect a dynamic

braking unit between

the terminals PA and

PC, if necessary.

DC reactor

■Main circuit

Dynamic braking resistor(See Note.)

Function

Terminal symbol

G/E

Grounding terminal for the inverter's enclosure.

200V class:

0.4～7.5 and 75, 90kW: 3-phase 200～230V-50/60Hz

11～55kW: 3-phase 200～220V-50Hz,200～230V-60Hz

R/L1

，

S/L2，T/L3

400V class:

0.75～22, 110～280kW: 3-phase 380～460V-50/60Hz

30～75kW: 3-phase 380～440V-50Hz,380～460V-60Hz

Used to connect a motor (3-phase inductive motor)

U/T1

V/T2

，W/T3

Used to connect a power source for the control circuit (Optional for the 22kW and

smaller models, though these terminals are provided for them)

200V class:

0.4～7.5 and 75, 90kW: Single-phase 200～230V-50/60Hz

11～55kW: Single-phase 200～220V-50Hz,200～230V-60Hz

400V class:

R0，S0

0.75～22, 110～280kW: 3-phase 380～460V-50/60Hz

(R46, R41)

30～75kW: 3-phase 380～440V-50Hz,380～460V-60Hz

Between R46-S0: Single-phase 415～440V-50Hz, 415～460V-60Hz

Between R41-S0: Single-phase 380～415V-50Hz, 380～415V-60Hz

*Maximum allowable output of control power source:

200V class: 0.4～30kW…50VA, 37～90kW…60VA

400V class: 0.75～30kW…50VA, 37～75kW…150VA,

110 and 132kW…200VA, 160～280kW…350VA

Used to connect a dynamic braking resistor (For the optional dynamic braking unit,

connect it between PA and PC.)the settings of the parameters ,  and/or

, as required, when connecting an external resistor.

PA, PB

B-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Terminal symbol

Function

A negative potential terminal of the internal dc main circuit. This terminal can be used to

connect a dc common power source in conjunction with the terminal PA (positive

potential).

Used to connect a DC reactor (DCL: external option). The inverter is shipped with these

terminals shorted. So, remove the shorting bar when connecting a DCL.

Used to connect the control output cables. Provided only for the 400V class 37kW and

larger models. (10VA)

PO, PA

R20, S20

　400V

37～75kW: Single-phase 207.5～220V 50Hz, 207.5～230V-60Hz

110～280kW: Single-phase 207.5～230V-50/60Hz

Already connected to the internal dynamic braking resistor. If there is no need to use the

resistor, change its connection from (PB1) to (PR1) and change the settings of the

dynamic braking parameters ,. Provided only for the 3.7kW and smaller

models.

(PR1), (PB1)

Used exclusively for the internal resistor. Do not remove nor connect any external device.

Provided only for the 3.7kW and smaller models.

(PA1)

Terminal symbol

Inverter internal circuit

R/L1

S.L2

T/L3

G/E

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

G/E

Circuit of A

200V class 0.4

～

7.5kW, 400V class 0.75

～

15kW…noise filter circuit

200V class 11

～

90kW, 400V class 18.5

～

280kW…noise by-pass circuit

Ｒ/Ｌ１

Ｓ/Ｌ２

Ｔ/Ｌ３

　Ｒ０

　Ｓ０

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

R46

R41

R0, S0

(R46, R41, R20,

S20)

CN21

R20

S20

Fig.1

Fig.2

Fig.1: 200V class 0.4～22kW

400V class 0.7～22kW

Fig.2: 200V class 30～90kW

400V class 30kW

Fig.3

Fig.3: 400V class 37～220kW

Internal braking resistor

ＰＲ１

ＰＡ１

ＰＢ１

ＰＡ

Braking resistor

ＰＢ

ＰＡ

Ｐ０

(*1)

P0, PA, PB, PC,

(PA1),(PB1),(PR1)

(*2)

　ＰＣ

Fig.1

Fig.2

Fig.1: 200V class 0.4～3.7kW, 400V class 0.75～3.7kW

Fig.2: 200V class 5.5～90kW, 400V class 5.5～280kW

(*1) Rush-current prevention circuit is in plus line or minus line.

18.5 and 22kW models contain it in the rectifier-circuit part.

(*2) The dynamic-braking circuit of 30kW model or larger are served as option

correspondence.

B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.3.2 Control circuit terminals (sink logic(minus common))

RES

ＩＩ

A M

O UT2

P24

ＶＩ

O UT1

FLA

FLB

FLC

ST-CC shorting bar

Terminal Input /

symbol output

Electrical

specification

Inverter internal

circuit

Function

The motor rotates in forward direction if F and

CC are connected, while it slows down to a stop

if this Connection is broken. ( ST and CC are

connected).

The motor rotates in reverse direction if R and

CC are connected, while it slows down to a stop

if this connection is broken. (ST and CC are

connected ).

The motor is on standby if ST and CC are

connected. It coasts to a stop (free-run stop) if

this connection is broken. This terminal can be

used for interlocking.

This inverter protective function is disabled if

RES are CC is connected. Shorting RES and

CC has no effect when the inverter is in a

normal condition.

The motor rotates at a preset speed if S1 and

CC are connected.

The motor rotates at a preset speed if S2 and

CC are connected.

The motor rotates at a preset speed if S3 and

CC are connected.

The motor rotates at a preset speed if S4 and

CC are connected.

No-voltage

contact input

Input

24Vdc 5mA and less

When using

contacts, choose

weak current

contacts to

avoid poor

P24

RES

contact.

10k

4.7k

15k

Sink logic/

source logic

switchable

3.9k

0.1μ

Input

Sink input

ON :5Vdc or less

OFF:11Vdc or more

Source input

ON:11Vdc or more

OFF:5Vdc or less

P24

10Vdc

（Allowable load

Voltage

transfer

circuit

0.47μ

Analog input setting power output.

Output

0.1μ

current: 10mAdc)

15k

Multifunction programmable analog input.

Factory default setting: 0 to 10Vdc input sets 0 to (Internal impedance:

80Hz frequency range.

10Vdc

560

10k

18k

Input

33kΩ)

0.1μ

Multifunction programmable analog input.

Factory default setting: 2 to 10Vdc input sets 0 to (Internal impedance

80Hz frequency range.

Multifunction programmable analog input.

Factory default setting: 4 to 20mAdc input sets 0 to (Internal impedance

80Hz frequency range.

10Vdc

I I

560

18k

10k

:33kΩ)

4-20mA

0.1μ

91　 9 1　 91

75　 7 5　 75

:500Ω)

N 5

33k

15k

Multifunction programmable analog input.

10Vdc

68k

Factory default setting: 0 to +/-10Vdc input sets 0 (Internal impedance

Output

10k

:69kΩ)

to +/-80Hz frequency range.

0.1μ

*Multifunction programmable contact input

B-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Terminal Input /

symbol output

Electrical

specification

Inverter internal

circuit

Function

Multifunction programmable analog output. Factory 1mA full-scale dc

default setting: Operation frequency command. ammeter

0.01μ

Output

Connect

1mAdc full-scale ammeter or

7.5Vdc-1mA full-

100k 18k

4.7k

7.5Vdc(10Vdc)-1mA full-scale voltmeter.

scale dc voltmeter

　10 k

470p

0.01μ

Multifunction programmable analog output. Factory 1mA full-scale dc

default setting: Output current. Connect a 1mAdc ammeter

full-scale ammeter or a 7.5Vdc(10Vdc)-1mA full- 7.5Vdc-1mA full-

0.1μ

33k

15k

scale voltmeter.

scale dc voltmeter

P24

Multifunction open collector output. This terminal

outputs pulses at 1.00 kHz to 43.20 kHz. Factory

default setting: 3.84kHz.

Max. 50 mA

3.9k

10k

Output

Common

to I/O

Common terminal of the control circuit.

P24

F U S E

0 .1 μ

24Vdc power output (power for control of the

inverter).

24V_DC-100mA

P24

Output

68k

Multifunction programmable open collector output.

The terminal has been set by default so as to detect

and output low-speed signal output frequencies.

Multifunction programmable open collector output.

The terminal has been set by default so as to detect

and outputs signals indicating the completion of

acceleration/ deceleration.

Open collector

output:

24Vdc-50mA

*Sink logic/

source logic

switchable

OUT1

OUT2

F U S E

1 5 0

Relay contact output. Contact rating: 250 Vac = -2

A (cosφ= 1), 30 Vdc-1 A and 250 Vac-1A (cosφ =

0.4). Used to detect the activation of the inverter's

protective function. If the protective function is

activated, FLA-FLC circuit is closed, while FLB-FLC

circuit is opened .

P24

FLA

FLB

250Vac-2A

30Vdc-1A

:resistor load

250Vac-1A

:cosφ=0.4

FLA

FLB

FLC

Output

10k

B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■

Sink logic (minus common)/source logic (plus common)

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 ... Switching I/O terminal　

The input terminals of most control circuits are designed so that they turn on when a current flows out.

This type of logic is referred to as the "sink logic" (default setting). In Europe, however, the "source

logic" is widely adopted, in which the input terminals of control circuits turn on when a current passes

into them.

Sink logic

Source logic

24V

D C

input

common

output

P 2 4

output

Ｆ

common

C C

2 4 V

24V

D C

output

O U T1

input

O U T 1

common

C C

Inverter

Programmable

controller

Inverter

Programmable

controller

■Switching logic

Before proceeding to wiring, switch logic without supplying power to the inverter. Switching between

the sink logic and the source logic at start-up or when the inverter is energized causes the inverter to

trip. In such a case, before resetting the inverter, make sure that the logic have been switched

correctly.

① Detach the cover

(Push the

mark and make

the cover slide to the right.)

② Detach the switch cover

③Switch between the sink

④Attach the

logic and the source logic.

switch cover

※After switching logic, be sure to

attach the switch cover to

prevent the logic from being

switched by mistake.

sink

source

☆

If the error message  (sink/source switching error) is displayed, check to be sure that the

sequence is normal, then reset the inverter.

B-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2.3.3 Serial RS485 communication connector

■Figure of serial RS485 communication connector

To use the serial RS485 connector, detach the cover

for serial RS485 connector.

Pin-8

Pin-1

Signal name Pin number

content

RXA

RXB

TXA

TXB

2,8

Same phase reception data(positive line)

Anti-phase reception data(positive line)

Same phase transmitting data(positive line)

Anti-phase transmitting data(positive line)

Ground line of signal data

This table shows signal line of inverter side.

(Example: RXA signal is received by inverter.)

※Never use pin-1(24Vdc) and pin-7(5Vdc).

■Connecting diagrams for RS485 communication

straight

cross each other

Upper computer

straight

VF-A7(slave)

or VF-A7(master)

RXA

RXB

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

TXA

TXB

RXA

RXB

TXA

TXB

Terminal resistor

100Ω-1/4W

■Note

※ Detach a communication line and the main circuit wiring 20cm or more.

※ Do not connect pin-1(24Vdc) and pin-7(5Vdc).

※ Twist the lines between RXA and RXB, between TXA and TXB by the twist pair cable.

※ Connect terminus resistance at the terminal (both ends) of a transmission way.

※ When you use it by 2 line type, please short-circuit between RXB and TXB, between RXA and TXA.

※ Master side reception(pin-4,pin-5) / slave side transmitting(pin-3,pin-6) lines may not connect at the time

of communication between inverters.

※ Fix the communication cable, and do not apply the stress to the RS485 connector.

B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Operating the inverter

　　Danger

･Do not touch any inverter's terminal when the inverter is energized even if the

motor is at a standstill, or you could get a shock.

･Do not operate switches with a wet hand or not wipe it with a wet cloth, or you

could get a shock.

Prohibited

･Do to get near the alarm-stopped motor when the inverter is in retry mode, or you

could get an injury. Safety measures, for example, attach a cover to the motor, to

protect persons from accidents when the motor unexpectedly restarts.

･Do not turn on the power before attaching the front cover (or closing the do or of

the cabinet in which the inverter is installed), or you could get a shock.

･Turn off the power immediately in case the inverter smokes, smells strangely, or

produce abnormal noise. Failure to do so could lead to a fire. If any defect is found,

request your Toshiba dealer for repair.

Mandatory

･Turn off the power before leaving the inverter out of operation for a long period of

time.

･Do not turn on the power before attaching the front cover. When the inverter is

installed in a cabinet with the inverter's front panel detached, always close the

door of the cabinet before turning on the power. Turning on the power with the

cover or the door left opened could lead to an electric shock.

･Turn off the operation signal before resetting the inverter after trouble, or the

motor unexpectedly restarts, causing injury to persons.

Warning

･Do not touch any heat radiating fin or heat radiating resistor, or you could get a

burn since they become very hot during operation.

Never touch

Mandatory

･Operate the motor always within the allowable operation range. (Refer to the

motor's instruction manual for its allowable operation range.) Failure to do so

could cause injury to persons.

C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.1 Control modes of the VF-A7 inverter　

[Speed control mode] : The motor runs at the speed specified by a frequency

command.

(1) V/f control - V/f constant (constant torque characteristic) ... [default setting]

For loads, such as belt conveyors and cranes, that require, even in low speed ranges, the

same torque as that produced at their respective rated speeds.

(2) V/f control - Square reduction torque

For loads, such as fans, pumps and blowers, the torque of which are proportional to the

squares of their respective rotating speeds.

(3) Automatic torque boost mode.

In this mode, the inverter automatically adjusts the supply voltage to ensure that the motor

produces constant torque in any speed range.

(4) Sensor-less vector control mode,

In this mode, the inverter controls the motor so that it produces sufficiently large torque

even in an extremely low speed range and it keeps its rotating speed constant even if the

load torque fluctuates. This mode of operation is best suited to transportation, lifting and

winding equipment.

(5) Automatic energy-saving mode.

In this mode, the inverter monitors the output voltage and passes an output current

commensurate with the load. This mode of operation is used in conjunction with the above

mode (3) or (4).

[Torque control mode] : The motor torque is controlled by torque command signals.

The motor's rotating speed is determined by the

relationship between the load torque and the torque

produced by the motor.

■Sensor vector control (Optional)

When combined with a sensor-equipped motor, the inverter controls the motor with a

higher accuracy.

[Speed control mode] :

[Torque control mode] :

The motor's rotating speed is controlled with a higher

accuracy, even in low speed ranges, by feedback

signals.

The motor torque can be controlled in this mode. The

motor speed is determined by the relation ship between

the load torque and the motor torque. The accuracy in

controlling regenerative torque and power-running

torque at extremely low speeds is improved by feedback

signals.

[Position command mode] : Positioning control is carried out by means of pulses.

■Pre-operation check the following check again before starting operation

Pre-operation check the following check again before starting operation.

1) Are all wires and cables connected correctly?

2) Does the supply voltage agree with the rated input voltage?

C-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.2 Simple operation of the VF-A7 [1] [Speed control mode]

A speed control mode can be selected from among three: control panel operation, terminal board

operation and combination of both. (Refer to 5.3 for other modes of operation.)

[Terminal operation] :

Operation by means of external signals

[Panel operation] :

Operation by means of keys on the control panel

[Panel + terminal operation] : Frequency, start and stop signals can be sent individually

from the control panel and the terminal board.

3.2.1Operation from the terminal(external signals) Terminal operation

■Start/Stop

Operation command mode selection ＝[Default setting]

and　　　　 closed : Forward run

ＣＣ

Ｆ

★To make the motor coast to a stop (coast

stop),described on the left, break the

connection between ST and CC when the

motor is out of operation. Then,  is

displayed on the LED display of the

inverter rotating speed,

and

open : Slowdown stop

Ｆ

ＣＣ

(When terminals

connected.）

and

are electrically

ＳＴ

ＣＣ

Coast stop

Motor

speed

Slowdown stop

Frequency

O N

F-CC

O FF

Terminal F-CC

OFF

ST-CC

O N

O FF

Terminal ST-CC

OFF

■Example of typical connection

M C C B

Motor

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

Power

supply

W/T3

Forward run if ON

Deceleration stop if OFF

Reverse run if ON,

Slowdown stop if OFF

Stand-by if ON,

free-run stop if OFF

Control panel

G/E

I I

Current signal：4～20mAdc

VI RR PP

CC RX

Voltage signal：-10～+10Vdc

Voltage signal：0～10Vdc

External potentiometer (or voltage signal RR-CC: 0 to 10V)

C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Frequency setting

１）Setting the operation frequency with an external volume control

By default, the VF-A7 inverter has been set to a mode in which an external volume

control can be used for setting the operation frequency.

★ Volume control

The operation frequency by potentiometer (1 to

ＰＰ

10kΩ1/4 W) for setting

Refer to 7.3 for details of adjustment.

80Hz

M A X

Frequency setting

with potentiometer

　　　　　Ｒ　Ｒ　　：

Frequency

M IN

ＣＣ

MIN

MAX

[Parameter setting]

Speed setting mode selection parameter  at .

(There is no need to set this parameter before the first use after purchase.)

２）Setting the frequency by voltage signals (0 to 10 V)

★ Voltage signal　

Voltage signals (0 to 10 V) for setting t

he operation frequency

＋

ＲＲ

ＣＣ

Refer to 7.3 for details of adjustment.

　：Voltage signal 0 to 10Vdc

80Hz

－

周波数

Frequency

10Vdc

0Vdc

[Parameter setting]

Speed setting mode selection parameter  at .

(There is no need to set this parameter before the first use after purchase.)

３）Setting the frequency by a current signal (4 to 20 mA)

★Current signal

Current signals (4 to 20 mA) for setting the

operation frequency.

Refer to 7.3 for details of adjustment.

＋

ＩＩ

ＣＣ

：Current signal 4 to 20mAdc

80Hz

Frequency

－

[Parameter setting]

20mAdc

4mAdc

Speed setting mode selection parameter  at .

This setting cannot be made when the terminal VI is used.

C-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

４）Setting the frequency by voltage signals (0 to 10 Vdc)

★Voltage signal

Voltage signals (0 to 10 V) for setting the

＋

ＶＩ

　　　　　　　　：Voltage signals 0-10Vdc

operation frequency Refer to 7.3 for details of

adjustment.

80Hz

ＣＣ

－

Frequency

10Vdc

0Vdc

[Parameter setting]

＊ Necessary to change the VI/II input point 1 setting .

Speed setting mode selection parameter  at .

This setting cannot be made when the terminal II is used.

５）Setting the frequency by voltage signals (0 to +/-10Vdc)

The direction can be changed by switching between positive and negative signals.

★Voltage signal

Voltage signals (0 to +/-10 V) for setting the

operation frequency Refer to 7.3 for details

＋

ＲＸ

　　　　　　　　：Voltage signal 0-±10Vdc

of adjustment.

80Hz

Forward run

－

ＣＣ

-10Vdc

+10Vdc

Reverse run

80Hz

[Parameter setting]

Speed setting mode selection parameter  at .

Note)Set reference priority selection  at (, Default setting). Changing the

settings of two speed command parameters at a time, refer to 6.6.

[Ex.: To set the frequency by current signal (4 to 20 mAdc) through the terminal]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.) (If the monitor display mode setting

parameter  is set at  [Running frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON

▲　　▼

ENT







Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set value).

(Default setting: )

▲　　▼

ENT

Change the parameter setting to  by pressing the ▽ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then, and the

set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

C-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.2.2 Operation from the control panel　［Control panel operation］

This section describes how to start/stop the motor, and set the operation frequency with the operating panel.

Ex. of typical connection

▲

：

Set the operation freq

Start the motor

▼

Motor

MCCB

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

ＲＵＮ

Power

supply

ＳＴＯＰ：Stop the motor.

(Deceleration stop)

★

For coast stop

Shipped

Change the setting of the parameter

.

Control panel

with these

terminals

shorted

Coast stop

I I

Motor speed

G/E

VI RR PP

★The operation frequency can be changed

anytime even during operation.)

　■Change the settings of the following two parameters first from the operating panel.

　：（Control panel: Parameter determining the operation mode）

　：（Control panel: Parameter determining the input mode of speed reference）

[Setting procedure]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode setting

parameter  is set at  [Running frequency].)



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).







MON

▲　　▼

ENT

Select “” by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

(Default setting: )

Change the parameter setting to  (Operating panel enabled)

by pressing the △ key.

▲　　▼

ENT



Save the change by pressing Enter key. Then, and the

set value are displayed alternately.

⇔





▲　　▼

Select “” by pressing △ key or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

(Default setting: ).

ENT

▲　　▼

ENT

Change the parameter setting to  (Operating panel input). by

pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

　　　＊To return to the standard monitor mode (operation frequency), press MON key.

C-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Example of control panel operation

Key operated LED display

Operation

Display the running frequency. (If the monitor display

selection parameter  is set at  [Running frequency])



Set the operation frequency.

▲　　▼



Save the operation frequency by pressing Enter key.

Then,  and the set frequency is displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

Pressing the Run key causes the motor to accelerate to the

set frequency in the specified acceleration time.

⇒

RUN

You can change the operation frequency anytime, even

during operation, by pressing △ or ▽ key.



▲　　▼

Pressing the Stop button reduces the frequency and causes

the motor to slow down to a stop.

STOP

⇒

■Selecting a stop mode with the control panel

In addition to deceleration stop by pressing

key (in the specified deceleration

ＳＴＯＰ

time), the operating panel has the following two stop modes.

Stop mode

Coast stop

Description

Operation, setting, etc.

This stop mode is enabled only in modes where the

control panel can be used for operation. To enable

the free-run stop mode, set the panel stop pattern

selection parameter  at .

Refer to 6.30.7 for details of this setting. * Factory

default setting:  =  (Coast stop)

In this mode, power

supply from the inverter

to the motor is shut off

instantaneously, which

causes the motor to

coast to a stop.

A stop mode can be

selected from among:

･ Coast stop

In modes other than the control panel operation

mode, you can urgently stop the motor (emergency

stop) by entering a command from the control

panel. (To quickly stop the motor in the control

panel operation mode, set the parameter  to

this mode.) quickly stop the motor in case of an

emergency, press twice the Stop key on the control

panel.

Emergency stop

(from the control

panel in modes

other than the panel

operation mode)

･ Slowdown stop

･ DC injection braking

Note)default setting:

 = 

(Coast stop)

(1) Press the Stop key. “” starts blinking.

(2) Press the Stop key again.  (Emergency

stop) =  to , the motor makes an

emergency stop (or trips) according to the

setting.

IF  is displayed and  is set at  to , an

error detection signal () is issued ( is

activated). (does not operate if  is set

at ～.) To clear , press any key other

than the Stop key while  is being displayed.

Refer to 6.26.4 for details.

＊Factory default setting:  =  (Coast stop)

Note)

The emergency stop function is designed to

forcefully stop the motor by pressing the Stop key

on the control panel in modes other than the

control panel operation mode.

The emergency stop function cannot be disabled

By any setting. Every emergency stop is

memorized as a trip in the trip history record.

C-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. 3 Simple operation of the VF-A7 [2] [Torque control mode]

An operation mode can be selected from among three: control panel operation, terminal

board operation and combination of both.

[Terminal operation] : Operation by means of external signals

[Operating panel operation] : Operation by pressing keys on the control panel

[Operating panel+terminal operation] : Frequency, start/stop signals can be sent individually

from the Operating panel and terminal board.

Torque control

(motor torque)

Reference torque set with an external signal

Load

torque

Motor torque

Speed limit level

Speed

Coast stop

The rotating speed varies according to the load torque.

Standby：ST-CC

Start of operation：F-CC

3.3.1 Setting a control mode

[Torque control mode]

The inverter has been set by default to the speed control mode (V/f constant). When us

ing the torque control mode, therefore, it is necessary to switch control modes.

Step 1: Setting the basic parameter  (motor control mode selection) at

　　　　　  (sensor-less vector control (speed/torque switching)

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when

the motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode

setting parameter is set at  [Running frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON





▲　　▼

Select “” by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

ENT

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.



Change the parameter setting to  (sensorless vector control

speed/torque switching) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the set

value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

C-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　　Step 2: Switching from speed control mode to torque control mode, using external

terminals, and assigning the control mode switching function to the terminal S4.

U/T1

V/T2

W /T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W /T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Ｍ

S4: Control mode

switching

S4: Control mode

switching

S4-CC disconnected: Speed control

S4-CC connected: Torque control

Control mode

Speed control

Control mode

Torque control

Speed command RR-CC (Default setting)

Torque command RX-CC(Default setting)

[Setting procedure: Assigning a control mode switching function to the terminal S4]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting

when the motor is out of operation.) (If the monitor display

mode setting parameter  is set at [Running

frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter

 (automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON











▲　　▼

Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Pressing the Enter key displays extend parameters starting

at 100.

ENT

▲

Select“” (input terminal function selection #8 (S4))

by pressing △ key.

ENT

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

Change the parameter setting to  (control switching)

by pressing △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,

and the set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

C-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.3.2 Polarity of torque command　

When using the torque limit function in torque control mode or speed control mode,

change the polarity of the torque command, as required.

Title

Function

Torque reference : Fixed direction

: Forward/reverse permitted

Title Adjustment range

Default setting





mode selection

(1) Power-running/regenerative torque

This setting is used when the machine requires a frequent change in the direction of rotation of

the motor.

Operation by forward run command (F)

Positive torque

Operation by Reverse run command (R)

Negative Torque



Power running torque

limit #1



Regenerative torque limit #1

Area②

Area①

Same

torque

Reverse run

Forward run

reference

Area③

Area④



Regenerative torque limit #1



Power running torque limit #1

Positive torque

Negative Torque

 Torque reference mode selection →: Fixed direction

 Reverse run prohibition

→: Prohibited except specified direction

→: Power-running/regenerative torque limit

 Torque limit mode (polarity)

(2) Positive/negative torque

This setting is used when the machine requires a frequent change in the direction of rotation of

the motor, though a load is applied always in the same direction.

Positive torque

Torque command

(Continuous forward/reverse)



Power-running torque limit #1

Area②

Area①

Forward run

Reverse run

Area③

Area④



Regenerative torque limit #2

Negative Torque

 Torque reference mode selection

 Reverse run prohibition

→: Forward/reverse permitted

→: Both directions allowed

 Torque limit mode (polarity)

→: Positive/negative torque limit

C-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.3.3 Operation from the terminal(external signal)

[Torque control mode]

■Start/stop

★

If this connection or

disconnection has no effect,

check the following parameter.

＝

　and　　　　 are connected : Forward run

ＣＣ

Ｆ

(Operation command mode

selection)

　and　　　　 are disconnected : Free-run stop

ＣＣ

(When terminals

and

are electrically connected)

ＣＣ

[Example of typical connection]

Motor

U/T1

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

Forward run if ON

Deceleration stop if OFF

ON: Torque control

OFF: Speed control

Operating panel

G/E

CC RX

Standby:

On standby if ON,

Coast stop if OFF

II RR PP

Voltage signal : -10 to +10V

Current signal: 4 to 20mA

External potentiometer (or voltage signal RR-CC: 0 to 10 V)

■Torque command

To enter a torque command externally, it is necessary to change a setting according to the input

signal. Default setting: Voltage signals ranging from -10 to +10Vdc to RX.

１）Torque setting by means of voltage signals (0 to 10 Vdc)

★Voltage signal

Torque command by means of voltage

＋

ＲＸ

　　　　　　　　：V oltage signals 0－±10 Vdc

signals (0 to 10 Vdc)

１００％

－

ＣＣ

Positive torque

-10V

+10V

Negative torque

-１００％

Set the torque reference selection  at  (RX input). (Default setting)

C-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) Torque setting by means of current signals (4 to 20 mAdc)

★ Current signal　

Torque command by means of current signals

(4 to 20 mAdc)

　　＋

ＩＩ

100%

：Current signals 4－20 mAdc

Motor torque

ＣＣ

　　－

20mAdc

4mAdc

　Set the torque reference selection  at (VI/II input).)

3) Torque setting by means of voltage signals (0~10 Vdc)

★ Voltage signal

Torque command by means of voltage

signals (0 to 10 Vdc)

　　＋

ＲＲ

ＣＣ

100%

：Voltage signal 0－10Vdc

Motor torque

　　－

10Vdc

0Vdc

＊It is necessary to change the setting of the VI/II input point 1 setting parameter .

　 Set the torque reference selection parameter  at  (RR signal input).

４）Torque setting by means of voltage signals (0~10 Vdc)

★Voltage signal

Torque command by means of voltage signals

(0 to 10 Vdc)

ＶＩ

　　＋

100%

　　　　　　　　　　voltage signals 0-10Vdc

　　－

ＣＣ

Motor torque

10Vdc

0Vdc

　Set the torque reference selection  at  (VI/II input).

５）Torque setting by means of a volume control

★volume

ＰＰ

Torque command by means of a volume

M A X

control.

100%

ＲＲ

　　　　　　　　　　：

Potentiometer

Motor torque

M IN

ＣＣ

MIN

MAX

[Parameter setting]

　Set the torque reference selection parameter  at (RR signal input).

C-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5) Others

 : RX2

 : Control panel parameter(Refer to 3.3.4 for details.)

 : Binary/BCD input

 : Communication common serial option

 : Communication RS485(Refer to 6.3.2 for details.)

 : Communication add-on option

[Setting procedure: Setting the parameter  at  for current signal(4 to 20mAdc)]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode setting

parameter  is set at  [Running frequency])

Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).













MON

Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the first parameter .

ENT

▲

Select  by pressing the △ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

ENT

▼

Select  (VI/II signal input) by pressing the ▽ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

C-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3.3.4 Operation from the control panel 　　[Torque control mode]

This section describes how to set the start and stop control modes, as well as torque commands

from the control panel.

■Setting the start and stop modes

To make it possible to start/stop from the operating panel in torque control mode,

[Set the basic parameter (operation command mode selection) at (operating

panel).]

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when

the motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode

setting parameter  is set at  [Running frequency])

Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).









MON

Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting. (Default

setting: )

ENT

Change the parameter setting to  (Operating panel input

enabled) by pressing △ key.

▲



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and

the set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

■Selecting a torque command mode

To make it possible to set a torque command from the operating panel in torque control mode,

[Set the extended parameter  (torque command selection) at  (Control panel).]

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when

the motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode

setting parameter  is set at  [Running frequency])

Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic













MON

parameter  (Automatic acceleration/deceleration).

Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the first parameter

.

Select  (Torque reference selection) by pressing the

△ key.

ENT

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

ENT

▲

Select  (Panel input) by pressing △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then, 

and the set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

■Torque command

　　　　　 See the next page for the setting procedure.

Title Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

 Control panel torque command

～ [%]



C-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Example of control panel operation

1. Set the torque command.

Follow the steps described in the

table below to set the torque

command ().

Example of typical connection

Motor

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

ＲＵＮ

：Starts the motor

ＳＴＯＰ

3.　　　　　　：Stops the motor

Operating panel

G/E

Note)Pressing the Stop key causes the

motor to coast to a stop.

ON: Torque control

OFF: Speed control

II RR PP

CC RX

Control panel torque command 85%

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Out of operation.)

(If the monitor display mode setting parameter  is

set at [Running frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic

parameter  (Automatic acceleration/deceleration)

MON

▲　　▼

ENT











Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

Select  by pressing the △ key.

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

ENT

Change the parameter setting (torque command) by

pressing △key.

▲



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then, 

and the set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

Press the Monitor key three times in a row to display the

frequency.

　　　　　　　×３

MON



Press the Run key to start the motor. According to the

torque, the motor accelerates to a frequency

commensurate with the load.

⇒

RUN

You can change the operation frequency anytime even

during operation, by pressing △ or ▽ key. (Change

of the  setting)



▲　　▼

Press the Stop key to stop the motor. The motor coasts

to a stop. (Free-run stop)

⇒

STOP

C-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Speed control mode]

4. Basic operation of the VF-A7　

[Torque control mode]

　The VF-A7 inverter has the following three display modes:

[Normal monitor mode]：Normal display mode. The inverter automatically enters this

display mode when it is turned on.

This mode enables you to monitor the output frequency and set frequency command

values. This mode is also used to display operation status alarm codes and error

messages if the inverter trips.

･ Frequency command setting => Refer to 3.2.1.

･ Status alarms

If something unusual occurs in the inverter, an alarm code and the output frequency

are displayed alternately on the LED display.

: Indicates that a current exceeding the over-current stall limit is passed.

　　 : Indicates that an voltage exceeding the over-voltage stall limit is applied.

: Indicates that the load exceeds 50% or more of the overload trip limit.　　　　

: Indicates that the temperature in the inverter reaches the overheat protection

alarm level (about 85℃)

　[Setting monitor mode] :In this mode, you can set inverter's operation parameters.

　　　　　　　　　　　　　 How to set parameters => Refer to 4.1.

[Status monitor mode]　：In this mode, you can monitor inverter's various statuses,

for example, the set frequency, the output voltage, the output

current and terminal information.

How to use the monitor => Refer to 8.1.

MON

Press the

key to switch to another display mode.

Normal monitor mode

MON

Setting monitor mode

Status monitor mode

MON

4.1 Setting parameters

[Setting monitor mode]

The VF-A7 inverter is shipped with certain parameters factory-set by default. The para

meters are broadly classified under the following three groups. First, you need to select

the parameter you want to change or check.

[Basic parameter]

: Parameters that you need to set before the first use after

purchase.

[Extended parameters] : Parameters used for detailed or particular settings

[User parameter]

: Used to search for parameters the settings which have been

changed and are different from the factory default settlings.

Use this parameter to check parameter settings again after

confirmation or when changing parameter settings.(Parameter

code: )

(For searching for parameters the settings of which have been changed).

D-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

★About the parameter's adjustment range

　: A value larger than the upper-limit value is entered or the value set for the currently-selected

　　　 parameter becomes larger than the upper-limit value because another parameter was changed.

　: A value smaller than the lower-limit value is entered or the value set for the currently-selected

　　　parameter becomes smaller than the lower-limit value because another parameter was changed.

If the above alarm code  or  blinks, change the parameter setting below the  value or

above the  value, respectively. When any of these alarm codes is blinking, no change can be

made to any parameter.

4.1.1 How to set basic parameters [Basic parameter]

Every basic parameters can be set in the same way.

　　[Procedure for setting a basic parameter]

：

Press this key to switch to setting

MON

★ The inverter is shipped with

certain parameters factory-set

by default.

monitor mode.

：

▲　　▼

Press these keys to select the

parameter you want to change.

★ Use "Parameter list" to select the

parameters you want to change.

★ If you feel puzzled about what to

do next during this operation,

press the Monitor key to return to

the first step (^is displayed).

：

Press this key to display the

parameter setting.

ENT

：

Press these key to change the

parameter setting.

▲　　▼

：

Press this key to save the change.

Follow the procedure below to set a basic parameter.

　　　　　(Example of setting: Changing the maximum frequency from 80 to 60 Hz)

ENT

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Out of operation.)

(If the monitor display mode setting parameter  is

set at [Operation frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter

 (automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON





▲　　▼

Select "" by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to display the changed maximum

frequency.

ENT

▲　　▼

ENT



Change the maximum frequency to 60 Hz by pressing▽

key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

set maximum frequency are displayed alternately.

⇔

After this,

→ Press this key to

　display the same

parameter setting.

→ Press this key to

switch to status

monitor mode.

→ Press these keys

to call up other

parameters.

▲　 ▼

MON

ENT

D-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Basic parameter list]

Default

setting

Reference

section

No.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Automatic

: Manual acceleration/deceleration

: Automatic acceleration/deceleration

:－(0 is always displayed.)

: Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning

: Sensorless vector control (speed) + auto-tuning

: Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning

: Terminal block enabled



5.1.1



acceleration/deceleration

Automatic V/f mode setting



5.2



: Operating panel enabled

Operation command mode

selection

: Common serial communication option enabled

: Serial communication RS485 enabled

: Communication add-on cassette option enabled

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

: RX (voltage input)

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

: Operating panel input

: Binary/BCD input(optional)

: Common serial communication option(FA01)

: Serial communication RS485(FA05)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA07)

: Up-down frequency



5.3



Speed setting mode

Selection





: Pulse input #1 (optional)

FM terminal meter selection ～



5.4





FM terminal meter

－

adjustment

:－

: 50Hz standard setting

: 60Hz standard setting

: Factory default setting

: Trip clear

: Clearing accumulating operation time

: Initialization of type form information

: Memorization of user-defined parameters

: Reset of user-defined parameters

: Forward,

Standard setting mode

selection



5.5

5.6





Forward/reverse selection

(At panel control only)

Acceleration time #1

Deceleration time #1

Maximum frequency

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

Base frequency #1

: Reverse

See J-28



5.1.2

5.7

5.8

()～ [s]

～ [Hz]

～ [Hz]

～ [Hz]

～ [Hz]

















5.9



: Constant torque

: Variable torque mode

: Automatic torque boost

: Sensorless vector control (speed)

: Automatic torque boost + automatic energy-saving

: Sensorless vector control (speed) + automatic energy-saving

: V/f 5-points setting

Motor control mode

selection



5.10



:Sensorless vector control (speed/torque switching)

: PG feedback vector control (speed/torque switching)

: PG feedback vector control (speed/position switching)

～ [%]

See J-28

5.12

5.13

Manual torque boost



Setting









Type

Overload protection

Overload stall

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

protect

not protect

protect

Standard

motor

Selection of electronic

thermal protection

characteristics







not stall

stall

VF motor

(special

motor)



protect





not protect

not stall

stall

～ [Hz]



Preset-speed # 1

Preset-speed # 2

Preset-speed # 3

Preset-speed # 4

Preset-speed # 5

Preset-speed # 6

Preset-speed # 7







5.14











～

Extended parameter

Setting of extended

－

4.1.2

Automatic edit function

To search parameters different from default value.



D-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.2 How to set extended parameters

The VF-A7 inverter has extended parameters to allow you to make full use of its functions.

The code of every extended parameter is composed up of an  and a 3-digit number.

～

～

～

～

～

～

～

～

～

Extended parameter



















ENT

MON

Press the Monitor key once, then press

the ▲ or ▼ key to select a parameter

(～ ) from among the basic

parameters.

Select the parameter you want to

change by pressing▲ and ▼

key, then press the Enter key to

display the parameter setting.

[Procedure for setting an extended parameter]

：Press the Monitor key to switch to parameter setting

mode. ( is displayed.)

MON

：Select the parameter (～) the code of which

▲　　▼

is the closest to that of the parameter you want to change.

ENT

：Press the Enter key to activate the selected parameter.

：Select the parameter you want to change .

▲　　▼

：Press the Enter key to display the extended parameter

ENT

setting (value) you want to change.

：Change the extended parameter setting (set value).

▲　　▼

：Press the Enter key to save the change.

ENT

You can return to the previous step by pressing the

key

MON

instead of the

key.

ENT

D-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　■Example of parameter setting

Follow the procedure below to set a parameter.

(Example of setting: Changing the positive torque limit parameter  from 150 to 100)

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting

when the motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor

display mode setting parameter  is set at

[Running frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON

▲　　▼

ENT











Switch to the parameter group  by pressing the

△ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to activate the selected parameter

group starting at .

Press the △ key to switch to the power running torque

limit #1 .

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting

(set value).

ENT

Change the positive torque limit parameter from 

to  by pressing the ▽ key.

▲　　▼



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then, the

⇔ parameter code and the set value are displayed

ENT

alternately.

If you feel puzzled about what to do next during this operation, press the Monitor key

several times to return to the step  and follow the above steps all over again.

4.1.3 Searching for changed parameters and changing their settings again

You can search for and display all parameters the settings of which have been changed

are different from their respective default settings, using the user parameter group .

With this parameter, you can also change their settings.

Some parameters are not displayed on the user parameter group  even if the setting is

different from the default setting.(see 4.1.5)

Notes on operation

･ The user parameter group  does not display changed parameters anymore if their

settings have been returned to their respective default settings.

･ It may take several seconds to display changed parameters because all data stored in the

user parameter group is checked against the factory default settings.

To cancel the parameter search in process, press the

key.

MON

D-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Searching for a parameter and changing its setting

　 Follow the procedure below to search for parameters and change their settings.

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting

when the motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display

mode setting parameter  is set at [Running

frequency])



Press the MON key to call up the first basic parameter

 (Automatic acceleration/deceleration).





MON

▲　　▼

ENT

Select the user group parameter  by pressing the

△ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to enter the user parameter search

and change mode.



ENT

The inverter searches for and displays parameters the

settings of which are different from their respective

default settings. Press the Enter key or△ key to switch

parameters displayed. (Press the▽key to search for

parameters in reverse direction.)



▲　　▼

Press the [MON] key to display the parameter setting

(set value).

ENT

▲　　▼

ENT





Change the parameter setting by pressing △ or ▽

key.

Press the enter key to save the change. Then, the

parameter code and the set value are displayed

alternately.

⇔

Following the same steps as above, search for and

display other parameters you want to change, one by

one, by pressing the △ or ▽ key, to check or change

their settings.



()

　　　　(　　　　)

▲

▼

 is displayed again after completion of a

search for all changed parameters.

　　　　(　　　　)

▲

▼



Parameter display

To cancel the parameter search in process, press the

Monitor key. Press the Monitor key once during search

to return to parameter setting mode. Then, press the

Monitor key to return to status monitor mode or normal

monitor mode (operation frequency display mode).

MON

↓



↓



If you feel puzzled about what to do next during this operation, press the Monitor key

several times to return to the step  and follow the above steps all over again.

D-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4.1.4　Parameters that cannot be changed during operation

For safety, the following parameters are designed so that they cannot be changed when

　　　　　　the inverter is in operation. So, you need to stop the motor in advance to change these

　　　　　　parameters.

[Basic parameters]





(Automatic acceleration/deceleration)

(Automatic V/f mode setting)

 (Operation command mode selection)

 (Speed setting mode selection)



(Maximum frequency)





(Standard setting mode selection)

(Motor control mode selection)



(Selection of electronic thermal protection characteristics)

For the parameter used to write-protect of extended parameters during operation, refer to

Parameter list in 10.

4.1.5 Resetting all parameters to the factory default settings at a time

All changed parameters can be reset to their respective factory default settings at a

time by setting the standard setting mode selection parameter at .

Note) Refer to 5.5 for details of the standard setting mode selection parameter .

Note on operation

Setting the parameter  at  causes all parameters to return to the factory default

settings. Therefore, it is advisable to note all changed settings before returning them to

the default settings.

■Procedure for resetting all parameters to the factory default settings at a time

LED display

Key operated

Operation

The operation frequency is displayed. (Make this setting

when the motor is out of operation.)



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON







Switch to  by pressing △ or ▽ key.

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set

value). ("" is always displayed when the parameter

 is called up.)

ENT

Change the parameter setting by pressing △ or ▽

key. To return all parameters to the factory default

settings, change the parameter setting to .

▲　　▼



 is displayed while all parameters are being

reset to their respective default settings.

ENT





The LED returns to the original display mode.

If you feel puzzled about what to do next during this operation, press the Monitor key

several times to return to the step  and follow the above steps all over again.

D-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　Following parameters are designed considering maintenance that they cannot be reset to the

factory default setting even if you set the parameter  at  (see 5.5). Moreover, x-marked

parameters are not displayed on the user parameter group  (see 4.1.3) even if their settings

are different from their default settings. So please be careful.



Title

Function

Title

Function

display

Ｘ

FM terminal meter selection

VI/II reference bias

VI/II reference gain

RR reference bias

RR reference gain

RX reference bias

RX reference gain

RX2 reference bias

RX2 reference gain





















Ｘ

FM terminal meter adjustment

AM terminal meter selection













AM terminal meter adjustment

Optional analog terminal #1 meter selection

Optional analog terminal #1 meter adjustment

Optional analog terminal #2 meter selection

Optional analog terminal #2 meter adjustment

D-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Explanation of the basic parameters

Basic parameters refer to parameters you need to set before the first use after purchase.

5.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration times　

 ：Automatic acceleration/deceleration

 ：Acceleration time #1

 ：Deceleration time #1

･ Function

1)The acceleration time parameter  is to set the time in which the inverter's output

frequency goes up from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency .

2)The deceleration time parameter  is to set the time in which the inverter's output

frequency goes down from the maximum frequency  to 0 Hz.

　5.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

　In this mode, the acceleration and deceleration times are changed automatically

　according to the load applied.  ＝

　　　＊ The acceleration and deceleration times are adjusted automatically within a range of

　　　　1/8 to 8 times longer than the times set with the  and the , respectively.

Output frequency

[Hz]

Output frequency

[Hz]

Under a small load

Under a large load



０

Time [s]

Deceleration time

Acceleration time

Acceleration and deceleration times

→ Relatively long

→ Relatively short

Set the parameter (automatic acceleration/deceleration) at (enabled).

　[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Automatic acceleration/

deceleration

Adjustment range

: Manual acceleration/deceleration

: Enabled (automatic setting)

Default setting





☆When the automatic acceleration/deceleration is selected (enabled), the acceleration/deceleration times

constantly change according to the load condition. So, use the manual setting(,) for machines

that need to be accelerated and decelerated always at constant rates.

☆Set manually the acceleration and deceleration times (＝) in the case that braking resistor or

braking unit is applied (＝).

☆Before setting this parameter, connect the inverter to the motor.

E-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

☆If you set in advance the acceleration and deceleration times (,) so that they match the

average load condition, you can make the optimum setting to control the motor with a higher accuracy

according to changes in the load applied.

[Procedure for setting the automatic acceleration and deceleration times]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (If the monitor display

mode setting parameter  is set at [Running

frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic

parameter  (Automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON

ENT

▲



Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.





Change the parameter setting to  (automatic

acceleration/deceleration enabled) by pressing △ key.

Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and

the set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

5.1.2 Manually setting the acceleration and deceleration times

This section describes how to set the acceleration time (the operation frequency goes up from

0Hz to the maximum frequency  and the deceleration time (the operation frequency goes

down from the maximum frequency  to 0Hz).

Output frequency [Hz]



＝ (Manual setting)

０

Time [s]





[Parameter setting]

Title





Function

Acceleration time #1

Deceleration time #1

Adjustment range

 (See note.) ~  [s]

Default setting

Model dependent

 (See note.) ~  [s]

Note) The minimum setting of acceleration and deceleration times have been set respectively

at 0.1sec. by default, but they can be changed within a range of 0.01 to 10 sec. by

changing the setting of the parameter  (Acceleration/deceleration time lower

limit).

→

Refer to 6.23.3 for details.

☆ If the acceleration or deceleration time is set shorter than the optimum time, which varies

according to the loading condition, it may become longer than the set time because of the

over-current stall function or the over-voltage stall function. In addition, if the acceleration or

deceleration time is set much shorter, the inverter trips more easily to protect itself from an

over-current or an over-voltage.

(Refer to 12.1 for details.)

E-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.2 Increasing starting torque/ energy-saving operation mode

 ：Automatic V/f mode setting

･ Function

This parameter enables the inverter to automatically switch V/f control modes and set the

motor constant (online automatic control) at the same time to make the motor produce

larger torque. With this parameter, two control modes can be set at a time, for example,

special V/f control modes, including the automatic torque boost mode and the vector

control mode.

･ Constant torque characteristic (Default setting)

･ Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning

･ Vector control (speed control) + auto-tuning

･ Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning

Note) With the motor control selection parameter , you can set the square

　　　reduction torque, the sensor vector control (optional), etc.

　　　　=> Refer to 5.10 for details.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: ―( is always displayed.)

Automatic V/f

mode setting

: Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning

: Sensorless vector control (speed) + auto-tuning

: Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning　





Note) The parameter always returns to  after completion of the setting. To check the setting

(set value), check the  previous monitor in monitor mode. (Refer to 8.1 for details.)

1) To automatically increase the torque according to the load condition

Set the automatic V/f mode setting  at (automatic torque boost + auto-tuning).

When the automatic V/f mode setting  is set at (automatic torque boost + auto-tuning),

the load current is observed in all speed ranges and the inverter's output voltage is adjusted

automatically so that the motor can always produce torque large enough for stable operation.

Note1) The same characteristic can be obtained by setting the motor control mode selection

Parameter  at (automatic torque boost) and the automatic tuning  (auto-

tuning) at . => Refer to 5.10 for details.

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting When the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display selection

parameter is set at [Running frequency])



Press the [MON]key to read the first basic parameter 

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON

▲







Switch to the parameter  (automatic control) by pressing

the △ key.

ENT

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set value).

Change the parameter setting to (automatic torque boost +

auto-tuning) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

　Note 2) Setting  at  causes  to be set at  automatically.

E-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) The vector control (Increasing the starting torque and operating with a higher accuracy)

Set the automatic V/f mode setting  at (vector control (speed) and auto-tuning).

By setting the automatic V/f mode setting  at (vector control (speed control) and auto-

tuning), the motor reach its full potential and produce large torque even at low speeds. Also, you

can minimize motor speed fluctuations caused by load fluctuations for more accurate operation.

This mode of control is best suited to conveyor and crane/hoist application as operated in speed

control mode.

[Setting procedure]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display selection

parameter  is set at [Running frequency])



Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic

parameter (automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON

▲







Switch to the parameter (Automatic V/f mode setting)

by pressing the △ key.

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set

value).

ENT

▲

Change the parameter setting to 2 (sensor-less vector

control and auto-tuning) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and

the set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

Note 1) The same characteristic can be obtained by setting the motor control mode selection

parameter at (vector control) and the auto-tuning parameter  at . Refer

to 5.10 for details.

2) Setting  at  causes to be set at  automatically.

3) To operate the inverter in energy-saving mode

Set the automatic V/f mode setting  at (automatic energy-saving + auto tuning).

When the automatic V/f mode setting  is set at , the inverter passes a current

commensurate with the load to save energy.

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode setting

parameter  is set at [Running frequency])

Press the [MON] key to call up the first basic parameter 

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).



MON







Switch to the parameter (Automatic V/f mode setting)

by pressing the △ key.

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set

value). (The value is always .)

ENT

▲

Change the parameter setting to  (automatic energy-saving

and auto-tuning) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

parameter set value  are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

If you fail to make the setting for vector control ...,

First, read the notes on vector control in 9) of section 5.10)

1) If the expected torque cannot be obtained

=> Selection 3 in 6.20

2) If the auto-tuning error message  is displayed => Selection 3 in 6.20

E-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■(Automatic V/f mode setting) and (Motor control mode selection)

The automatic control parameter is designed to set motor control mode selection parameter

() and the auto-tuning parameter() by one operation. Therefore, changing the 

setting causes the settings of all related parameters to be changed automatically.

Parameters set automatically







Check the  setting (set value).

((constant torque) if no change is

made to )

－

 is always displayed.

















Executed (Returns

to  after

execution)

Automatic torque boost

+auto-tuning

Automatic torque boost

Executed (Returns

to  after

execution)

Vector control (speed) +

auto-tuning

Sensor-less vector control

(speed control)

Executed (Returns

to  after

execution)

Automatic energy-saving +

auto-tuning

Automatic energy-saving +

sensorless vector control

4) To increase torque manually (V/f constant control)

The VF-A7 inverter has been set to this control mode by default.

This control mode in which the torque is kept constant is suitable for belt conveyers, and so on.

It is recommended to select this mode if you want to manually increase the starting torque.

To return to the V/f constant control mode after changing the setting of the parameter ,

Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at (constant torque)

=> Refer to 5.10

Note 1) If there is a need to further increase the torque, increase the torque boost rate, using the

manual torque boost parameter . For the procedure for setting the manual torque

boost parameter 

=> Refer to 5.12)

2) The square reduction torque characteristic (set the motor control mode selection

parameter at ) is effective in controlling such loads as fans and pumps.

=> Refer to 5.10

E-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.3 Selecting an operation mode

 : Operation command mode selection

 : Speed setting mode selection

･ Function

These parameters are to select the operation command from among the operating panel,

the terminal board, a communication device and other optional control devices, to which

priority should be given when start, stop or frequency reference are issued by them.

[Parameter setting]　

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Terminal block enabled

Default setting

: Operating panel enabled

Operation command

mode selection

: Common serial communication option enabled

: Serial communication RS485 enabled

: Communication add-on cassette option enabled





　[Set value]

: Terminal operation

　 Start and stop control is exercised by means of external signals.

: Operation panel

Start and stop control is exercised by pressing the

key on the control panel.

STOP

RUN

(Including start and stop control from an extended panel (optional))

: Communication common serial optional

Start and stop control is exercised from an RS232C device (optional) and a RS485

(optional).

: RS485 communication(standard)

Start and stop control is exercised from RS485 communication device fitted as standard.

: Communication option

Start and stop control is exercised from add-on module communication option.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

Default setting

: RX (voltage input)

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

: Operating panel input

: Binary/BCD input(optional)

: Common serial communication option(FA01)

: Serial communication RS485(FA05)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA07)

: Up-down frequency

Speed setting mode

selection





: Pulse input #1 (optional)

E-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Set value]

: VI/II input

Speed commands are entered by means of external signals (terminal VI: 0 to 10 Vdc

or terminal II: 4 to 20 mAdc).

: RR input

Speeds commands are entered by means of external signals (terminal RR: 0 to 10Vdc).

: RX input

Speed commands are entered by means of external signals (terminal RX: 0 to

+/-10 Vdc (+/-5 Vdc).

: RX2 control

Speed commands are entered by means of external signals (terminal RX2 (optional):

0 to +/-10 Vdc (+/-5 Vdc)).

: Operating panel input enabled

▲

▼

Frequencies are set by pressing the

extended control panel (optional).

: Binary/BCD input

key on the control panel or an

Speed commands are entered from 12/16-bit binary input(optional) or a BCD (optional).

: Communication common serial option

Speed commands are entered from an RS232C device (optional) or terminal board-

equipped RS485 device (optional). 　→ Communication number: FA01

: Communication RS485

Speed commands are entered from the RS485 communication device fitted as standard.

　→ Communication number: FA00

: Communication add-on module option

Speed commands are entered from the network communication device

TOSLINE-F10M or S20 (optional).

: Up-down frequency

Speed commands are entered by means of up-down frequency signals from the

terminal board (refer to 7.2).

: Pulse input

Speed commands are entered by means of pulses (optional).

Note) This function and the vector control with sensor cannot be used at the same

time.

☆The following communication devices are optionally available.

･ RS232C (Type: RS2001Z)

･ RS485 (Type: RS4001Z. Up to 64 units can be connected.)

･ TOSLINE-F10M/TOSLINE-S20

☆The functions assigned to the following control terminals (contact input: Refer to 7.2.)

are always activated regardless of the settings of the control device selection

parameter  and the speed command selection parameter .

･ Reset terminal (assigned to RES by default, enabled only when the invertor trips)

･ Standby terminal (assigned to ST by default)

･ Emergency stop terminal

☆Be sure to put the inverter out of operation before changing the control device selection

parameter  or the speed command selection parameter , though no change

can be made to them if the inverter is in operation.

■Preset speed operation

 : Set this parameter at  (terminal board).

 : Any setting is valid.

E-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1) Setting the start, stop and operation frequencies with the operating panel

[Start/stop]: Press the 　　　　　　　key on the control

Title

Function

Set value

RUN STOP

panel.

Operation command

Mode selection

Speed setting mode

selection

(operating panel)



☆To switch between forward run and reverse run, use

the forward/reverse run selection parameter .

[Frequency ref.]: Set the frequency, using the

(operating panel)



　　　　 key on the operating panel.

▲

▼

Motor

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Power

supply

To save the frequency, press

the Enter key. Then, 

and the set frequency are

displayed alternately for a

while.

Control panel

G/E

The inverter is shipped with

these terminals shorted.

RX VI II RR PP

2) To set the start and stop frequencies (forward run, reverse run and free-run stop) by

　　 means of external signals and to set the operation frequency with the control panel

Title

Function

Set value

[Start/stop]: Connection and disconnection of terminals

F-CC/R-CC (Standby: connection of

Operation command

Mode selection

Speed setting mode

selection

(Terminal input)



terminals ST and CC)

[Speed command]: Set the frequency, using the　

(operating panel)



　 key on the control panel.

▼

▲

★As for the action the motor

Motor

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

takes

when

both

and

the

are

Power

supply

terminals

Forward run if ON

Slowdown stop if OFF

connected at the same time,

you can make selection

between reverse run and a

stop. => Refer to 6.2.2.

Reverse run if ON

Control panel

Slowdown stop if OFF

Standby if ON,

Coast stop if OFF

★ To save the frequency,

press the Enter key. Then,

 and the set frequency

are displayed alternately for

a while.

G/E

RX VI II RR PP

E-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3) Start and stop (forward run, reverse run, free-run stop) with

　the operating panel and to set the operation frequency by external signals

[Start/stop]: Press the 　　 key on the

RUN

STOP

Title

Function

Set value

　　　　　　operating panel.

Operation command

mode selection

(operating panel)



　To switch between forward run and reverse run,

use the forward/reverse run selection .

(VI/II)

(RR)

(RX)

[Speed command]: By means of external signals

(1) VI: 0 to +10 Vdc (0 to +5 Vdc)　II: 4 to 20 mAdc

(2) RR: Volume / 0 to +10 Vdc (0 to +5 Vdc)

(3) RX: 0 to +/-10 Vdc (0 to +/-5 Vdc)

Speed setting

mode selection





Panel stop pattern

(Coast stop)

※Other speed setting

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)*

Motor

U/T1

R/L1

Power

supply

: 12/16-bit binary input (optional)*

: Serial communication (optional)*

: Serial communication RS485

: Communication add-on(optional)*

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

: Up-down frequency

: Pulse input (optional)*

Operating panel

The inverter is shipped with

＊For the setting to be made when using

an asterisked optional device as an

input device, refer to the instruction

manual for the input device used.

these terminals shorted.

G/E

VI RRPP

＋

―

③０～±１０Ｖｄｃ

（０～±　５Ｖｄｃ）

①０～＋１０Ｖｄｃ

（０～＋　５Ｖｄｃ）

＋

―

＋

―

　①４～２０ｍＡｄｃ

②External volume control

4) Start and stop (forward run, reverse run, free-run stop) and

to set the operation frequency by means of external signals

[Start/stop]: Connection and disconnection of terminals

　　　　　 F and CC/terminals R and CC.

[Speed command]: By means of external signals

(1) VI: 0 to +10Vdc (0 to +5Vdc)/II: 4 to 20mAdc

(2) RR: Volume/0 to +10 Vdc (0 to +5Vdc)

(3) RX: 0 to +/-10 Vdc (0 to +/-5Vdc)

Title

Function

Operation command

mode selection

Set value

(Terminal input)



(VI/II)

(RR)

(RX)

Speed setting

mode selection



As for the action the motor takes

when both the terminals F and R

are connected at the same time,

you can make a selection between

Motor

U/T1

R/L1

Power

supply

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

Forward run if ON

Slowdown stop if OFF

reverse run and a stop.

=> Refer to 6.2.2

Reverse run if ON

Slowdown stop if OFF

Standby if ON

※Other speed setting

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)*

Control panel

: 12/16-bit binary input (optional)*

: Serial communication (optional)*

: Serial communication RS485

: Communication add-on(optional)*

　 Free-run stop if OFF

G/E

CC RX VI II RR PP

＋

―

③０～±１０Ｖｄｃ

（０～±　５Ｖｄｃ）

①０～＋１０Ｖｄｃ

（０～＋　５Ｖｄｃ）

　①４～２０ｍＡｄｃ

: Up-down frequency

: Pulse input (optional)*

＋

―

＋

―

＊For the setting to be made when using

an asterisked optional device as an

input device, refer to the instruction

manual for the input device used.

②External volume control

E-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.4 Setting and calibrating meters

 ： FM Terminal meter selection

 ： FM Terminal meter adjustment

 ： AM Terminal meter selection

 ： AM Terminal meter adjustment

・Function

Inverter’s operation data is outputted to the FM terminal (AM terminal) as analog voltage

signals. The “FM terminal-connected meter adjustment ” (AM terminal-connected meter

adjustment ) parameter is used to calibrate the meter.

Note 1: The signal output from the FM and AM terminal is an analog voltage signal. (positive (+) side output.

For signed data, an absolute value is output.)

Note 2: To the FM terminal, connect either a full-scale 0~1mAdc ammeter or a full-scale 0~7.5Vdc (or 10Vdc)

voltmeter, if necessary. The FM terminal can also be used as a 0(4)~20mAdc output terminal. To the

AM terminal, connect a full-scale 0-1mAdc ammeter.

Connect meters as shown below.

＜Connection to terminal FM＞　　　　　　　　　　　　＜Connection to terminal AM＞

Meter : Frequency meter

(Default setting)

Meter: Ammeter

(Default setting)

＋

－

＋

ＦＭ

ＡＭ

ＶＦ－Ａ７

－

ＣＣ

The reading of the

ammeter fluctuates during

calibration.

frequency meter fluctuates

during calibration.

☆An frequency meter QS60T is optionally available.

☆Use an ammeter capable of measuring up to a current

1.5 times larger than the rated current of the inverter.

[Terminal FM-related parameters]

　 Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Adjustment level



: Running frequency

(a)

(b)

(a)

(b)

(a)

(c)

(e)

(b)

(d)

(c)

－

: Frequency command

: Current

: DC voltage

: Output voltage

: After-compensation frequency

: Speed feedback (real-time value)

: Speed feedback (1 second filter)

: Torque

: Torque reference

: Internal torque reference

: Torque current

: Exciting current

: PID feedback value

: Motor overload factor (OL2 data)

: Inverter overload factor (OL1 data)

: PBr overload factor (PBrOL data)

: PBr load factor (pulse duty)

: Input power

FM terminal meter

selection





: Output power

: Peak output current

: Peak DC voltage

: Motor counter dummy PG

: Position pulse

: RR input

: VI/II input

: RX input

: RX2 input

: FM output

: AM output

: Fixed output for meters

: Analog output for communication

: Acc/dec torque removal

:Current (with filter)

(c)

(b)

FM terminal meter

adjustment

－



E-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　[Terminal AM-related parameters]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Same as (: disabled)

AM Terminal meter selection

AM Terminal meter adjustment







－

■Resolution

Both the terminals FM and AM have a maximum resolution of 1/1024.

★With the default settings, FM terminal outputs about 16 V (external impedance is

infinity) or about 3mA (external impedance is 0 ohm), when running frequency

is 80Hz. AM terminal outputs about 16 V or about 3mA, when the output current

reading on the control panel is 150%

■Calibrating a meter when the inverter is out of operation

If it is difficult to calibrate a meter because of large fluctuations of its reading, you may put the

inverter out of operation to make its calibration easier.

It is possible to adjust the meter for hte data item selected with the parameter  or

. Refer to the table on the next page for the calibration procedure.

Adjustment level:

(a): The output voltage FM/AM-CC reaches 100% at the maximum frequency ().

(b): The output voltage at FM/AM-CC reaches 100% when the reading on the control panel is 150%.

(c): The output voltage at FM/AM-CC reaches 100% when the reading on the control panel is 100%.

(d): Special output (Refer to the instruction manual for the applicable device.)

(e): The output voltage at FM/AM-CC reaches 100% when the electric power is

√3×200V(400V)×(inverter rated current).

[Example of the calibration of the frequency meter connected to the terminal FM-CC]

　　　　*Before proceeding to calibration, make the zero-adjustment of the meter itself.

Key operated,

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed.(If the monitor display

mode setting  is set at [Running frequency])

－



Press the MON key to call up the first basic parameter

 (automatic acceleration/deceleration).





MON

▲　　▼

Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.



Press the Enter key to display the running frequency.

ENT

Adjust the meter by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Note that the meter reading varies during adjustment,

though the reading in the digital LED (monitor) on the

control panel does not change.

▲　　▼



[Point] Holding down the key for several

seconds facilitates this adjustment.

★By setup, before the needle of meter begins to sway,

it will take time.

Press the Enter key to terminate the meter calibration.

ENT

MON

⇔ Then,  and the running frequency are displayed

alternately.

Press the Monitor key to return to the running frequency



display mode.(If the monitor display mode setting parameter

 is set at [Running frequency])

★For meter connection, the VF-A7 inverter has two output terminals; FM and AM,

which can be used simultaneously.

E-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Example: Procedure of calibrating the meter connected to the terminal AM to which "output

current" is assigned.]

Key operated,

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed.(If the monitor display mode

setting parameter  is set at . [Running frequency])

－



Press the MON key to call up the first basic parameter

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON



Select  by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

▲　　▼

ENT









Press the Enter key to display the parameter .

Select the terminal AM terminal meter selection parameter

 by pressing △ key.

▲　　▼

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting

(set value).

ENT

▲

Set the parameter at  (fixed output for meter

calibration) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,

 and the set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

Select the AM terminal meter sdjustment  by

pressing ▽ key.





▼

Press the Enter key to switch to the data display mode.

ENT

Calibrate the meter by pressing the △ or ▽ key. Adjust

the pointer to the graduation to which you want it to point

when the inverter passes a current 150% larger than its

rated output current.

(Note that the meter reading varies during adjustment,

though the reading in the digital LED (monitor) on the

control panel does not change.)

▲　　▼



[Point] Holding down the key for several

seconds facilitates this adjustment.

★By setup, before the needle of meter begins to sway,

it will take time.

Press the Enter key to save the setting. Then,  and

the set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

　　　▼





Select the terminal AM terminal meter selection parameter

 by pressing ▽ key.

ENT

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

Return the parameter setting to  (output current display).

　　　▼



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and

the newly-set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

Press the Monitor key three times to return to the running

frequency display mode.(If the monitor display mode setting

 is set at [Running frequency])

MON



E-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.5 Factory default setting

 ：Standard setting mode selection

･ Function

This parameter is to set two or more parameters at a time for different commands.

Using this parameter, all parameters can be also return to their respective default settings by

one operation, and save or set specific parameters individually.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: -

: 50Hz standard setting

: 60Hz standard setting

: Factory default setting

: Trip clear

: Clearing accumulating operation time

: Initialization of type form information

: Memorization of user-defined parameters

: Reset of user-defined parameters

Standard setting

mode selection





★This parameter is used to change the settings of other parameters. Therefore, 0 is always displayed.

★This parameter cannot be used when the inverter is in operation. So, put the inverter out of operation

before using this parameter.

★You can check the previous settings by selecting  last set data in status monitor mode. (Refer to 8.1

for details.)

[Set value]

[ 50 Hz standard setting (  = ) ]

Setting at  causes all the following parameters to be set for operation using a

base frequency of 50Hz.(This does not change the settings of any other parameters.)

･ Maximum frequency : 50Hz

･ Base frequency #1 : 50Hz

･ Base frequency #2 : 50Hz

･ Base frequency #3 : 50Hz

･ Base frequency #4 : 50Hz

･ Upper limit frequency : 50Hz

･ VI/II reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ RR reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ RX reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ RX2 reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ BIN reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ Pulse reference point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ Forward speed limit input level : 50Hz ･ Point #2 frequency : 50Hz

･ Reverse speed limit input level : 50Hz

･ Automatic light-load high-speed operation frequency : 50Hz

･ Commercial power/inverter switching frequency : 50Hz

[ 60 Hz standard setting (  = ) ]

Setting  at  causes all the following parameters to be set for operation using a

base frequency of 60Hz.(This does not change the settings of any other parameters.)

･ Maximum frequency : 60Hz

･ Base frequency #1 : 60Hz

･ Base frequency #2 : 60Hz

･ Base frequency #3 : 60Hz

･ Base frequency #4 : 60Hz

･ Upper limit frequency : 60Hz

･ VI/II reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ RR reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ RX reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ RX2 reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ BIN reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ Pulse reference point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ Forward speed limit input level : 60Hz ･ Point #2 frequency : 60Hz

･ Reverse speed limit input level : 60Hz

･ Automatic light-load high-speed operation frequency : 60Hz

･ Commercial power/inverter switching frequency : 60Hz

E-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[ Factory default setting (  =  ) ]

Setting  at  returns all parameters to their respective default settings.

When this parameter is set at 3,  is displayed for a while, then switches back

to the original display (  or  ). Note that this setting also clears all trouble

history records.

[ Trip clear (  =  ) ]

Setting  at  clears the oldest 4 trip history records.

(This setting does not change any parameter settings.)

[ Clearing accumulating operation time (  =  ) ]

Setting  at  clears the cumulative operation time (resets it to zero).

[ Initialization of type form information (  =  ) ]

When a trip occurs because of a type error ( is displayed), you can clear the

trip by setting  at . This function is used to reformat a control circuit board to

adapt it to an inverter, for example, when a circuit board is removed from an inverter to

　　　　　 use for another inverter for maintenance or for other reasons. This setting clears all

type data stored in the inverter.

[ Memorization of user-defined parameters ( =  ) ]

Setting  at  causes all the current parameter settings to be stored individually.

[ Reset of user-defined parameters (  =  ) ]

Setting  at  returns all parameters to the settings saved by setting this

parameter at .

The above settings  and  allows you to have your own default parameter settings.

E-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.6 Forward/reverse run selection (for the panel control only)

 ：Forward/reverse selection

･ Function

This parameter is used to set the direction of a motor when it is started or stopped by pressing the

Run key or Stop key on the control panel. This parameter is valid only when the operation command

mode selection parameter  is set at (control panel input enabled).

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Forward run

: Reverse run

Default setting

Forward/reverse selection





★The direction of rotation can be checked in status monitor mode.

: Forward run, : Reverse run => Refer to 8.1

★When the terminal board is used for operation, the direction of rotation is switched with the

terminal F,R. Consequently, the forward/reverse run selection parameter becomes invalid.

F-CC connected: Forward run

R-CC connected: Reverse run

★If F and CC, as well as R and CC are connected at the same time: Reverse run (Default setting)

Use the parameter  to change the direction of rotation in this case.

=> Refer to 6.2.2 for details.

★This parameter is valid only when  is set at (Operating panel enabled.)

5.7 Maximum frequency

 ：Maximum frequency

･ Function

1) This parameter is used to set the range of frequencies (the maximum frequency) that the

inverter can output.

2) The frequency is used a the reference for setting the acceleration and deceleration times.

Output freq. [Hz]

･ Set the maximum frequency

according to the rating of the

motor.







: In case of =80Hz



: In case of =60Hz

･ The maximum frequency cannot

be adjusted during operation. So,

put the inverter out of operation

when making this setting.

0　　　　　　　　　　　　　100

Frequency setting signal [%]

★When increasing the , adjust the upper limit frequency parameter  as well, if necessary.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

Default setting

Maximum frequency





E-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.8 Upper and lower limit frequencies

 ：Upper limit frequency

 ：Lower limit frequency

･ Function

These parameters are used to set the upper and lower limit frequencies which are

the largest and smallest frequencies, respectively, that the inverter can output.

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

Output frequency [Hz]









0　　　　　　　　　　100%

Frequency setting signal

0　　　　　　　　　　100%

Frequency setting signal

★The inverter does not output

any frequency exceeding the .

★The output frequency cannot

be set below the .

■Parameter setting

Title





Function

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

Adjustment range

Default setting



～

～



5.9 Base frequency

 ：Base frequency #1

･ Function

This parameter is used to set the base frequency according to the rated frequency of the

motor or the specification of the load.

Note) This is an important parameter required for setting the constant torque control area.

Base- frequency voltage #1



Output voltage [V]

Output frequency [Hz]



Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

Default setting

Base frequency #1





E-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.10 Control mode selection

 ：Motor control mode selection

･ Function

The VF-A7 has the following V/f control modes:

･ Constant torque characteristic

･ Variable torque mode

･ Automatic torque boost *1

･ Sensorless vector control (speed) *1

･ Automatic torque boost + automatic energy-saving

･ Sensorless vector control + automatic energy-saving *1

･ V/f 5-point setting

･ Sensorless vector control (torque/speed switching)

･ PG feedback vector control (torque/speed switching)

･ PG feedback vector control (torque/position switching)

(*1) The automatic control parameter automatically sets this parameter and the

auto-tuning parameter at a time.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Constant torque characteristic

Default setting

: Square reduction torque characteristic

: Automatic torque boost

: Sensorless vector control (speed)

Motor control

mode selection

: Automatic torque boost + automatic energy-saving

: Sensorless vector control (speed) + automatic energy-saving

: V-f 5-points setting





: Sensorless vector control (torque/speed switching)

: PG feedback vector control (speed/torque switching)

: PG feedback vector control (speed/position switching)

1) Constant torque characteristic (Normal way of use)

[Set the motor control mode selection  at (Constant torque characteristic)]

Usually, this control mode is used for loads, such as belt conveyers and cranes, that

require the same torque as that produced at the rated speed, even at low speeds.

Base-frequency voltage #1



Output voltage [V]



Output frequency [Hz]

Base frequency #1 

◎

To further increase the torque, use the manual torque boost parameter .

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　=> Refer to 5.1.2 for details.

E-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) Setting suitable for fans and pumps

[Set the motor control mode selection  at (Variable torque mode).]

This control mode is used for such loads as fans, pumps and blowers, with the characteristic

that the torque is proportional to the square of the rotating speed of the load.

Base-frequency voltage #1



Output voltage [V]



Output frequency [Hz]

Base frequency #1 

3) To increase the starting torque

[Set the V/F control selection parameter  at (Automatic torque boost).]

In this mode, the load current is monitored in all speed ranges and the inverter's

output voltage is adjusted automatically so that the motor can always produce torque

large enough for stable operation.

Base-frequency voltage #1



Output voltage [V]

(1) 　：The torque

boost rate is adjusted

０

Base frequency #1 

Output frequency [Hz]

automatically.

Note) Some loads produce vibration if operated in this control mode. For such a load,

set the motor control mode selection parameter  at (V/f constant control)

and manually set the torque boost rate.

★This control mode involves the setting of the motor constant.

Basically, however, there is no need to set the motor constant if the inverter is used

for a Toshiba 4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter.

The motor constant can be set in any of the following three ways:

Set the basic parameter  at . With this parameter, you can make the

setting of both the automatic torque boost and the motor constant (auto-tuning)

at a time.

=> Refer to 5.2.1) for details.

Set the extended parameter  at . In this mode, the motor constant is

set automatically. (Auto-tuning) => Refer to selection 2 in 6.20 for details.)

The constants of motors can also be set individually.

=> Refer to selection 3 in 6.20 for details.

E-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4) To increase starting torque and the accuracy of operation - Vector control

[Set the V/f control selection parameter  at (Sensorless vector control).]

In vector control mode, the VF-A7 inverter enables the Toshiba standard motor combined with it

to produce large torque even at extremely low speeds. The vector control mode is effective in:

(1) Obtaining large torque

(2) Achieving smooth and stable operation even in low speed ranges

(3) Eliminating load fluctuations due to slippage of the motor

(4) Making the motor produce large starting torque.

★This control mode involves the setting of the motor constant.

Basically, however, there is no need to set the motor constant if the inverter is used for a

Toshiba 4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter. The motor constant can be set in any

of the following three ways:

1)Set the basic parameter  at . With this parameter, you can make the setting of

both the sensorless vector control and the motor constant (auto-tuning) at a time.

=> Refer to 5.2.2) for details.

2)Set the extended parameter  at . In this mode, the motor constant is set

automatically. (Auto-tuning)

=> Refer to selection 2 in 6.20 for details.

3)The constants of motors can also be set individually. => Refer to selection 3 in 6.20 for details.

[Procedure for setting the V/f control selection parameter  at (Sensorless vector control)]

key operated, LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display selection

parameter  is set at [Running frequency])



Press the MON key to call up the first basic parameter

(Automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON





Switch to the parameter (Motor control mode selection)

by pressing △ key.

▲

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set

value). (Default setting: (Constant torque))

ENT

▲



Change the parameter setting to (Sensorless vector

control) by pressing the △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and the

set value  are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

5) To increase the starting torque while saving energy

[Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at 

(Automatic torque boost + automatic energy-saving).]

In this mode, the load current is monitored in all speed ranges and the inverter's output

voltage (torque boost) is adjusted automatically so that the motor can always produce

torque large enough for stable operation. In addition, the output current is optimally

adjusted for energy saving according to the load applied.

★This control mode involves the setting of the motor constant.

Basically, however, there is no need to set the motor constant if the inverter is used for

a Toshiba 4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter.

The motor constant can be set in any of the following two ways:

1)Set the extended parameter  at . In this mode, the motor constant is set

automatically. (Auto-tuning)

2)The constants of motors can also be set individually.

=> Refer to selection 3 in 6.20 for details.

=> Refer to selection 2 in 6.20 for details.

E-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6) To increase starting torque and the accuracy while saving energy

[Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at 

(Sensor-less vector control + automatic energy-saving).]

In vector control mode, the VF-A7 inverter enables the Toshiba standard motor

combined with it to produce large torque even at extremely low speeds. In addition, the output

current is optimally adjusted for energy saving according to the load applied.

This function is effective in:

(1) Obtaining large torque,

(2) Achieving smooth and stable operation even in low speed ranges

(3) Eliminating load fluctuations due to slippage of the motor, and

(4) Making the motor produce large starting torque.

★This control mode involves the setting of the motor constant.

Basically, however, there is no need to set the motor constant if the inverter is used for a

Toshiba 4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter.

The motor constant can be set in any of the following three ways:

1)Set the basic parameter  at . In this mode, you can make the setting of both the

automatic energy-saving and the motor constant (auto-tuning) at a time.

=> Refer to 5.2.3) for details.

2)Set the extended parameter  at . In this mode, the motor constant is set

automatically. (Auto-tuning)

3)The constants of motors can also be set individually.

=> Refer to selection 3 in 6.20 for details.

=> Refer to selection 2 in 6.20 for details.

7) To set the V/F characteristic arbitrarily

[Set the V/f control selection parameter  at (V/f 5-points setting).]

In this mode, the base frequency and the base-frequency voltage for the V/f control need to

be set to operate the motor while switching a maximum of 5 different V/f characteristics.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

Default setting

V/f 5-point setting V/F1 frequency



























～ [%] ※

～ [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting V/F1 voltage

V/f 5-point setting V/F2 frequency

～ [%] ※

～ [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting V/F2 voltage

V/f 5-point setting V/F3 frequency





～ [%] ※

～ [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting V/F3 voltage

V/f 5-point setting V/F4 frequency





～ [%] ※

～ [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting V/F4 voltage

V/f 5-point setting V/F5 frequency





～ [%] ※

V/f 5-point setting V/F5 voltage



※100% adjustment value (200V class: 200V,400V class: 400V)

V/f 5-point setting

Base frequency voltage #1 

VF5



VF4





Output voltage [V]

VF3

VF1



VF2





Output frequency

[Hz]

０























Note) Set the manual torque boost () from 0 to 3%. Boosting the torque too much may impair the

linearity between points.

E-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8) To control the torque

[Set the V/f control selection parameter  at 

(sensorless vector control (speed/torque switchable).]

In this mode, the torque produced by the motor is controlled by means of torque command

signals. The rotating speed of the motor is determined by the relationship between the load

torque and the torque produced by the motor.

★This control mode involves the setting of the motor constant.

Basically, however, there is no need to set the motor constant if the inverter is used for

a Toshiba 4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter.

The motor constant can be set in any of the following two ways:

1) Set the extended parameter  at . In this mode, the motor constant is set

automatically. (Auto-tuning)

2) The constants of motors can also be set individually.

=> Refer to selection 3 in 6.21 for details.

=> Refer to selection 2 in 6.21 for details.

9) Notes on the vector control

1) The vector control fully exerts its effect in frequency ranges below the base

frequency () and its effect is reduced in frequency ranges above the base

frequency.

2) Set the base frequency between 40 and 120 Hz when selecting a sensorless vector

control mode (＝～

), or between 25 and 120 Hz when selecting a

sensor vector control mode (＝

).

3) Use a general-purpose or squirrel-cage motor with the same rating as the inverter,

or smaller by one rank.

This inverter cannot be used for motors with capacities of less than 0.4 kW. If the

VFA7-2004PL is combined with a 0.2 kW motor, an auto-tuning error () may

arise, and thus disable the vector control.

4) Use a motor with 2 to 16 poles.

5) Use the inverter for a single motor at a time. This inverter is incapable of vector

-controlling more than one motor simultaneously.

6) Do not use wires longer than 30 m for the connection between the inverter and the

motor. When using wires longer than 30 m, select a normal auto-tuning mode to

improve the low-speed torque characteristics in vector control mode. In this case,

the torque produced by the motor decreases more or less around the rated

frequency because of a voltage drop.

7) If a reactor or surge suppressing filter is connected between the inverter and the

motor, the torque produced by the motor may decreases or the inverter may trip

() in auto-tuning mode, and therefore the vector control can not be used.

8) Connect speed sensor for vector control with sensor to the motor. Connecting via

gear, etc. causes motor’s oscillating or inverter’s trip by lack of rigidity.

9) When  is set at ,  or , the impressed voltage to a motor might decrease

according to the specification of a power supply.

10) To use vector control with a sensor, the option (refer to 9.5 or 9.6) is needed.

E-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.11 Switching between speed control and torque control

 ： Motor control mode selection

 ～  ：Input terminal selection #1 to #8

(One of these functions(terminals) is used.)

･ Function

These parameters are used to switch between speed control and torque control by

external operation (signal input to a terminal) or by communication.

■Speed/torque switching

Speed control

Torque control　　　　　　

Ｍ

S4：Speed/torque

switching

Speed control

(＝

Torque control

Control

mode

Control

mode







,

)

(＝, )

Speed/torque

switching

Speed

Speed/torque

switching

Torque

S4-CC disconnected

RR-CC (default setting)

S4-CC connected

RX-CC (default setting)

command

Command

１）Terminal function setting

The terminalS4 has been assigned to preset-speed 4 by default. Therefore, to use

this terminal for switching of control modes, it is necessary to change this assignment.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setup value

Input terminal selection #8 (S4) ～





Note 1) If the terminal S4 is already assigned to another function, use another terminal for this switching.

2) The ON/OFF logic can be reversed by setting this parameter at 113.

２）Selection of command value

[Speed setting]

The command set with the parameter  is valid. (Default setting: RR input)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

: RX (voltage input)

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

: Operating panel input

Default setting



Speed setting

mode selection

: Binary/BCD input(optional)





: Common serial communication option

: Serial communication RS485

: Communication add-on cassette option

: Up-down frequency

: Pulse input (optional)

E-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Torque reference]

The command set with the parameter  is valid. (Default setting: RX input)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

Default setting

: RX (voltage input)

: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

: Operating panel input

: Binary/BCD input(optional)

Torque reference

selection





: Common serial communication option

: Serial communication RS485

: Communication add-on cassette option

E-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.12 Manual torque boost - Increasing the torque produced at low speeds

　 ：Manual torque boost

･ Function

When the torque produced in low speed ranges is not large enough, it can be

boosted up by increasing the torque boost rate with this parameter.

Base-frequency voltage 

Output voltage [Ｖ]



Output frequency [Hz]

Base frequency　 

　[Parameter]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [%]

Default setting

Manual boost

Model dependent



★This parameter is valid when  = (V/f constant), (square reduction torque) or

(V/f 5-points setting).

Note 1) Torque boost rate has been set optimally according to the inverter capacity. Do not set the

torque boost rate too high, or the inverter may trip during start-up because of an over-current.

When needs to be changed, be careful not to increase more than +/-2% of the default value.

　5.13 Setting the electronic thermal protective function

 ：Selection of electronic thermal protection characteristics

 ：Motor overload protection level #1

 ：Overload reduction start-up frequency

 ：Motor 150%-overload time limit

　･ Function

These parameters are used to set the electronic thermal protective function according to

the rating and characteristic of the motor to be controlled.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Kind of

motor

Overload

protection

protect

Setting

Overload stall

















not stall

stall

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

protect

Standard

motor

Selection of electronic

thermal protection

characteristics

not protect

protect

not protect





VF motor

(special

motor)

Motor overload protection

level #1

～ [%]





E-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1) Setting the electronic thermal protection characteristics parameter  and

the motor overload protection level #1 

The electronic thermal protection characteristics selection parameter  is used to

enable or disable the motor overload trip function () and the soft stall function.

The motor overload trip function () needs to be selected with the parameter

, while the inverter overload trip function () is always activated.

Explanation of terms

Overload stall(Soft stall):

The function of automatically lowering the output frequency before the motor

overload trip function  is activated when the inverter detects that an

excessive load is applied to the motor. (Lowers maximum about 48Hz when

base frequency is 60Hz.) This function enables the inverter to

output a frequency commensurate with the load current so that the motor can

keep running without tripping. This function is useful for such loads as fans,

pump and blowers, which have the square reduction torque characteristic that

the current passed decreases as the rotating speed falls.

Note) Do not use this overload stall function for loads with a constant torque characteristic (e.g., a belt

conveyer to which a constant load current is always passed regardless of their speed).

[A general-purpose motor (other than motors intended for use with inverters)]

When a motor is operated in a frequency range below its rated frequency, its cooling

efficiency drops. To prevent the motor to overheat because of this, the overload detecting

point is advanced when the inverter is used for a general-purpose motor.

■Setting the electronic thermal protective function 

Set value

Overload protection

protect

Overload stall

not stall

stall









protect

not protect

not stall

stall

■Setting the motor overload protection level #1 

When the inverter is used for a motor with a capacity or a current rating smaller than that of the

inverter, it is necessary to adjust the motor overload protection level #1 parameter  to

the rated current of the motor.

Output current reduction rate [%]

 ×1.0

 ×0.6

Output frequency [Hz]

Note) The motor overload starting level is fixed at 30 Hz.

If necessary, set  at ～.

(See the next page for the setting procedure.)

E-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Example of setting: VF-A7 2007PL with a 0.4 kW motor (rated current: 2A)]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when the

motor is out of operation.)(If the monitor display mode setting

parameter  is set at [Running frequency])

Press the MON key to call up the first basic parameter

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

Switch to (extended parameters of from  to

) by pressing the △ or ▽ key.

Press the Enter key to call up the parameter 

(electronic thermal motor protection level 1).

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting (set

value). (Default setting:  %)











MON

▲　　▼

ENT

Change the parameter setting to

▲　　▼

 = (motor's rated current/inverter's rated output

current) x 100



= 2.0/5.0 x 100)

Press the Enter key to save the change. Then, 

and the set value are displayed alternately.

⇔

ENT

[VF motor (motor intended for use with an inverter)]

■Setting the electronic thermal protective function 

Set value

Overload protection

protect

Overload stall

not stall

stall









protect

not protect

not stall

stall

VF motors (intended for use with an inverter) can be operated in lower frequency

ranges than general-purpose motors. If a VF motor is operated in an extremely low

frequency range, however, its cooling efficiency drops. In such a case, set the OL

reduction start frequency parameter  according to the characteristics of the

motor. (See the figure below.)

As a guide, it is advisable to set this parameter around the default value (VF motor 6Hz).

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Overload reduction start-up

frequency

～ [Hz]





Note)  is enabled when  is set at , , , or .

■Setting the motor overload protection level #1 

When the inverter is used for a motor with a capacity or a current rating smaller than that of the

inverter, it is necessary to adjust the motor overload protection level #1 parameter 

according to the rated current of the motor.

When the output current is displayed in %,100% corresponds to the rated output current of the inverter.

Output current reduction rate [%]

 ×1.0

 ×0.6

Setting of motor overload start level

０

 ＝ 6.0

Output frequency [Hz]

E-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　2) Motor 150%-overload time limit 

The motor 150%-overload time limit parameter  is used to set the time elapsed before

the motor trips under a load of 150% (overload trip ) within a range of 10 to 2400 seconds.

[Example: setting of ]

Monitored output

current [%]

Motor overload withstanding time [s]

(Outline data)

Operation frequency

no less than 

=

=



=



=

≦  [Hz] ≦  [Hz]

Operation frequency

0.01 [Hz](*1)

－

12000

2400

1200

800

600

270

7200

3600

1000

600

420

310

270

230

190

170

110

－

6000

1200

600

400

300

135

3600

1800

500

300

210

155

135

115

Motor overload

withstanding time [s]

100

112

120

130

140

150

200

100

Motor 150%-overload

time limit



Monitored output current [%]

×1.1

(*1) Except for the cases of

＝,  [Hz]

×1.5

×0.6

Title



Function

Motor 150%-overload time limit

Adjustment range

 to  [s]

Default setting



3) Inverter overload characteristic

This function is provided to protect the inverter itself and it cannot be changed or

disabled by changing any parameter setting.

If the inverter overload trip function () is activated frequently, this condition can be

improved by changing the setting of the stall prevention level parameter  to a

lower level or increasing the acceleration time  or the deceleration time .

Inverter overload withstanding time

Output

Inverter overload

withstanding time [s]

[s] (Outline data)

current

[%]

200V:0.4

～

55kW

200V:75,90kW

280kW

400V:0.75

4800

480

240

160

120

～

75kW 400V:90/110～

111

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

215

2400

240

120

small/medium capacity types: 120

large capacity types: 60

0.3

0.5

０

Monitored output current [%]

100%: Inverter's rated output current

110

150

＊ If the load applied to the inverter exceeds 150% of its rated load or the

operation frequency is less than 0.1Hz, the inverter may trip in a shorter time.

Inverter's overload protective characteristic

E-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5.14 Preset-speed operation (15 speeds)

 ～  ：Preset-speed #1 to #7

 ～  ：Preset-speed #8 to #15

 ～  ：Preset-speed #1 to #15 control mode

Function

These parameters allow you to set up to 15 operating speeds just by switching contact

signals externally. Preset-speed frequencies can be set arbitrarily between the lower limit

frequency  and the upper limit frequency .

[Setting method]

1) Start/stop

Start and stop control is experienced by the control panel. (Default setting)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Terminal block enabled

: Operating panel enabled

Operation command

mode selection

: Common serial communication option

: Serial communication RS485

: Communication add-on cassette option





Note) When speeds commands (analog signal or digital signal input) need to be switched in a

preset-speed mode, then make a selection with the speed setting mode selection

parameter .=> Refer to 5.3 for details.

2) Setting preset-speed frequencies

A required number of speeds (frequencies) can be set.

Setting speeds 1 to 7

Title

Function

Adjustment range Default setting

～

～

Preset-speed #1 to #7



Setting speeds 8 to 15

Title

Function

Adjustment range Default setting

～

～

Preset-speed #8 to #10



Example of preset-speed contact input signal

0: ON, -: OFF (If all terminals are off , a speed command other than the preset speed commands is valid.)

Preset-speed

１２３４５６７８９１０１１１２１３１４１５

Terminal

S1-CC

S2-CC

S3-CC

S4-CC

○ － ○ － ○ － ○ － ○ － ○ － ○ － ○

－ ○ ○ －－ ○ ○ －－ ○ ○ －－ ○ ○

－－－ ○ ○ ○ ○ －－－－ ○ ○ ○ ○

－－－－－－－ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

☆Functions assigned to terminals (Default setting)

Terminal S1 ... Input terminal selection #5 (S1) ＝ (S1)

Terminal S2 ... Input terminal selection #6 (S2) ＝ (S2)

Terminal S3 ... Input terminal selection #7 (S3) ＝ (S3)

Terminal S4 ... Input terminal selection #8 (S4) ＝ (S4)

E-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[An example of the connection of terminals ]

Forward run command)

Reverse run command)

F (Forward run)

R (Reverse run)

Preset-speed #1

Preset-speed #2

Preset-speed #3

　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　Preset-speed #4

3) Use of a preset-speed command in combination with another speed command

When no preset-speed command is issued, the inverter accepts an input command

from the control panel or another analog input device.

Other speed commands

Preset-speed Frequency setting signals from the

Analog signal input command

(VI, II, RR, RX1 and RX2)

command

control panel

Entered

Not entered

Entered

Not entered

Preset-speed

command valid

Control panel

command valid

Preset-speed

command valid

Preset-speed

command valid

Preset-speed

command valid

Entered

－

Not entered

Analog signal valid

★If a preset-command and another speed command are entered at the same time,

priority is always given to the preset-speed command.

The following figure shows an example of the operation in preset-speed 7 modes with default setting.



Output frequency [Hz]













Time [s]

ST-CC

OFF

F-CC

S1-CC

S2-CC

S3-CC

OFF

　　　　　　　Example of the operation in preset-speed 7 modes

E-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4) Setting the operation mode

An operation mode can be selected for each preset-speed.

Operation mode setting

Title

Function

Present-speed operation : Disabled

mode : Enabled

Adjustment range

Default setting





: Disabled ... Only frequency commands are governed by the preset-speed

command (#1 to #15) entered.

: Enabled ... The direction of rotation, the V/f control mode, the acceleration and

deceleration times and the torque limit can be set individually for each

preset-command.

☆If you selected “enabled”,the motor runs operation mode setting directions as below

without following terminal F,R.

Operation mode setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

+: Forward run

+: Reverse run

+: Selection of acc/dec

switching #1

Default setting

+: Selection of acc/dec

switching #2

+: Selection of V/f switching #1

Present-speed

#1 to #15

control mode

～



+: Selection of V/f switching #2

+: Selection of torque limit

switching #1

+: Selection of torque limit

switching #2

☆ For the settings marked with +, more than one function can be selected at the same time by

entering the sum of the numbers of the desired functions.

Ex.1) (+) + (+) = 

By entering , you can activate the reverse run function and the acceleration/deceleration

time #2 function at the same time.

Ex.2) (+) + (+) + (+)= 

By entering , you can activate the forward run function and the acceleration/deceleration

time #4 function at the same time.

(Selecting both of acc/dec switching #1 and acc/dec switching #2 means selection

of acceleration/deceleration time #4. This manner is common to V/f pattern and

torque limit.)

E-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Extended parameters

Speed control mode　Torque control mode

Extended parameters are used for sophisticated operation, fine adjustment and special purposes.

Change parameter settings, as required.

Extended parameter list => Refer to Chapter 10.

6.1　Frequency signals

6.1.1 Low-speed signal

 ：Low-speed signal output frequency

・Function

When the output frequency exceeds the frequency set with the parameter F100, an ON

signal is put out. The function of this parameter is to send a signal for exciting or releasing

an electromagnetic brake.

★through the open collector terminal OUT1 or OUT2 (24 Vdc - max. 50 mA). (Default setting: OUT 1)

[Parameter setting]

Tytle

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

～

Low-speed signal output frequency





Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency



[s]

Low-speed signal output (Default setting)

P24-OUT1

OFF

Low-speed signal output: Inversion

P24-OUT1

)

(

OFF

[Connection diagram (Sink logic)]

P24

OUT1(or OUT2)

・Output terminal setting

The low-speed signal (ON signal) output function has been assigned to the

terminal OUT1 by default. To invert output signals, it is necessary to change

the setting of the output terminal selection parameter.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Set value

: Low speed signal(a-contact)

Output terminal

selection #1 (OUT1)

～



: Low speed signal(b-contact)

Note) To use OUT2 terminal, set the parameter .

F-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.1.2 Putting out signals of arbitrary frequencies

 ：Speed reach setting frequency

 ：Speed reach detection band

・Function

When the output frequency enters the frequency range delimited by the frequencies

set arbitrarily with the parameters  and ( (-set frequency) +/-

(-set frequency) ), an ON or OFF signal is put out.

■Setting of reach frequency and detection frequency band

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～

Default setting



Speed reach setting frequency

Speed reach detection band





～



■Setting of output terminal parameter

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Set value

: Specified speed arrival(a-contact)

Output terminal

selection #2 (OUT2)

～



: Specified speed arrival(b-contact)

Note) To put out signals to OUT 1, select the parameter .

1) If detection frequency band + Speed reach setting frequency < Reference frequency

Output frequency [Hz]

 ＋ 



 － 

[s]

Speed reach setting frequency(Default setting)

P24-OUT2

OFF

Speed reach setting frequency：Inverse

P24-OUT2

)

(

OFF

2) If detection frequency band + speed reach frequency > reference frequency

Output frequency [Hz]

 ＋ 



 － 

[s]

Speed reach setting frequency(Default setting)

P24-OUT2

OFF

Speed reach setting frequency：Inverse

P24-OUT2

)

(

OFF

F-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.2 Selection of input signals

6.2.1 Changing standby signal function

 ：ST (standby) signal selection

・Function

This parameter is used to set the function of the standby signal (ST).

1) Normal setting (Standby if ST and CC are connected (ON), gate OFF if they are disconnected

(OFF) (coast stop)

2) Always ON

3) Interlocked with F/R (Forward/reverse run if F/R and CC are connected, coast stop if they are

disconnected)

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

ST (standby)

signal selection

: Standard, : Always ON,

: Interlocked with F/R terminal





1) Standard

Motor speed

Coast stop

Use this setting if a standby

terminal is needed

＊The inverter is shipped with

terminals ST and CC shorted

with a bar. Remove the

shorting bar when using

these terminals.

０

OFF

F-CC

OFF

ST-CC

2) Always-ON

The inverter is always on standby regardless of the status of the terminal ST. The terminal ST

can be assigned to another function. In this mode, the motor slows down from the set frequency

speed to a stop in the predetermined deceleration time.

3) Interlocked with terminal F (forward)/R (reverse)

　　　　　　　　　＜F-CC＞

Breaking the connection of the

operation frequency terminal

(F/R) causes the motor to coast

Motor speed

Coast stop

to a stop. (Free-run stop)

＊The inverter is shipped with

terminals ST and CC shorted

with a bar. Remove the

shorting bar when using

these terminals.

０

OFF

F-CC

OFF

ST-CC

6.2.2 Priority selection (both F-CC, R-CC are ON)

 ：Priority selection (both F-CC, R-CC is ON)

・Function

This parameter is used to select the operation to which priority is given when F-CC and R-

CC are closed simultaneously.

1) Reverse run

2) Slowdown stop

Function

■Parameter setting

Title

Adjustment range Default setting

:Reverse，:Stop

Priority selection (both F-CC, R-CC are ON)





F-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[=(reverse)]

The motor runs in reverse direction if F-CC and R-CC

are closed simultaneously.

Output frequency [Hz]

Reference frequency

Forward

[s]

０

Reference frequency

Reverse

F-CC

R-CC

OFF

The motor slows down to a stop if F-CC and R-CC are

closed simultaneously.

[=(Stop)]

Output frequency[Hz]

Forward

[s]

Reference frequency

０

Reverse

F-CC

R-CC

OFF

6.2.3 Assigning priority to the terminal board in panel operation mode

 ：Priority setting of input terminal

・Function

This parameter is used to give priority to certain external commands entered from the

terminal board in control panel operation mode, for example, when jogging the motor by

giving signals externally.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Priority setting of input terminal : Disabled,: Enabled





［: Disabled (Terminal board has no priority)］

Priority is given always to commands (operation commands) entered from the control

panel. To give priority to commands from the terminal board, it is necessary to switch

from control panel operation to terminal board operation by sending signals through the

terminal board.

Command from the control panel

(=)

Internal command

The mode switching terminals are

used to switch to terminal board o

peration mode. (Refer to G-4)

Command from the terminal board

F-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[: terminal board has priority (Enabled)]

Priority is given to commands entered from the terminal board even in control panel operation

mode.

Command from the control panel

Internal command

(=)

Command from the terminal board

A: No command from the terminal board.

A: Command from the terminal board.

■Priority command from terminal board (Operation command)

Jog run

：input terminal function 18/19

Injection braking

：input terminal function 22/23　(*1)

Forced jog run(forward) ：input terminal function 50/51　(*1)

Forced jog run(reverse) ：input terminal function 52/53　(*1)

(*1)These settings are invalid when the control panel stop pattern parameter  is set at .

An example of switching to jog run in control panel operation mode

[Incase that terminals S4 and CC are assigned to jog run]

Assign the control terminal S4 (default: 16 (preset-speed #4)) to jog run.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

～

Input terminal selection #8 (S4)

(Jog run)



Output frequency[Hz]

Reference

Forward

０

ＲＵＮ

ＳＴＯＰ

ＲＵＮ

ＳＴＯＰ

ＲＵＮ

ＳＴＯＰ

Panel key

ST-CC

S4-CC

(Jog run)

F-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[When terminalsS3, S4 and CC are assigned to forced jog forward/reverse]

Assign the control terminal S4 (default: 16 (preset-speed # 4)) to jog run.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value



～

Input terminal selection #7(S3)



(Forced JOG forward rotation)



～

Input terminal selection #8(S4)



(Forced JOG reverse rotation)

Output frequency [Hz]

Reference

Forward

Reverse

０

ＲＵＮ

ＳＴＯＰ

Panel key

ST-CC

S3-CC

Forced jog(F)

Ｓ4-CC

Forced jog(R)

6.2.4 Binary/BCD signal selection(Expansion TB option unit)

 ：Binary/BCD signal selection(Expansion TB option unit)

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the optional device.

F-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.3 Selection of terminal functions

6.3.1 Keeping an input terminal function always active (ON)

 ：Always active function selection

・Function

This parameter is used to select a function to be kept always active (ON) from among the

input terminal functions. (One function can be selected)

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

～

Always active function selection





　　※The selected function is kept always active regardless of the type of logic (positive or negative) in the

table of function settings in 7.2.1.

6.3.2 Changing input terminal functions

 ：Input terminal selection #1 (F)

 ：Input terminal selection #2 (R)

 ：Input terminal selection #3 (ST)

 ：Input terminal selection #6 (S2)

 ：Input terminal selection #7 (S3)

 ：Input terminal selection #8 (S4)

 ：Input terminal selection #4 (RES)  ～  ：Input terminal selection #9～#16

 ：Input terminal selection #5 (S1)

Refer to 7.2.1 for details.

6.3.3 Signal on completion of acceleration/deceleration (OUT 2)

 ：Output terminal selection #2 (OUT2)

・Function

If this parameter is so set, a signal is put out on completion of acceleration/deceleration.

★Open collector output terminal OUT1 or OUT2 (24 Vdc - max. 50 mA)

■Setting of output terminal

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

: Acceleration/deceleration

completion(a-contact)

: Acceleration/deceleration

completion(b-contact)

Output terminal

selection #2 (OUT2)

～



Note) OUT1 for putting out a signal, select the parameter .

Output frequency [Hz]

Reference



(Speed reach detection band)

[s]

０

Acc. Completed(a-contact)

OFF

Acc. Completed(b-contact)

OFF

(

)

F-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.3.4 Changing output terminal functions

 ：Output terminal selection #1 (OUT1)

 ：Output terminal selection #2 (OUT2)

 ：Output terminal selection #3 (FL)

 ～  ：Output terminal selection #4～#7

Refer to 7.2.2 for details.

6.3.5 Response times of input/output terminals

 ：Input terminal #1 response time (F)

 ：Input terminal #2 response time (R)

 ：Input terminal #3 response time (ST)

 ：Input terminal #4 response time (RES)

 ：Input terminal #5～#8 response time (S1～S4)

 ：Input terminal #9～#16 response time

 ～  ：Output terminal #1～#7 delay time

 ～  ：Output terminal #1～#7 holding time

Refer to 7.2.3 for details.

F-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.4 Basic parameters #2

6.4.1 Switching among V/f characteristics #1, #2, #3 and #4 from input terminal

 ：Base frequency #2

 ：Manual torque boost #3

 ：Motor overload protection level #3

 ：Base frequency #4

 ：Base frequency voltage #2

 ：Manual torque boost #2

 ：Motor overload protection level #2  ：Base frequency voltage #4

 ：Base frequency #3

 ：Manual torque boost #4

 ：Base frequency voltage #3

 ：Motor overload protection level #4

・Function

These parameters is useful for - for example - when 4 motors are connected to a

single inverter and thus they need to be switched from time to time to operate or

there is a need to change V/f characteristics (#1 to #4).

　　1) Switching with input terminal

　　2) Switching by parameter settings => Refer to 6.29.6.

Note) The setting of the parameter  (V/f control mode selection) is valid only when V/f #1 is

selected. If V/f #2, V/f #3 or V/f #4 is selected, V/f control is performed in constant torque mode.

Do not switch motors when the parameter  (Motor control mode selection) is set at 7, 8 or 9.

For parameters selected when changing V/f characteristics (1 to 4), refer to table on the next

page.

■Setting of switching terminals

The V/f #1, V/f #2, V/f #3 and V/f #4 switching function is not yet assigned to any terminal.

Therefore, it is necessary to assign them to unused terminals.

Ex.) Assigning the V/f switching #1 function to S1 and the V/f switching #2 function to S2.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～

Setting value

Input terminal selection #5(S1)

Input terminal selection #6(S2)

: (V/f switching #1)

: (V/f switching #2)





～

Ｍ

S1：V/f switching #1

S2：V/f switching #2

F-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

S1(V/f switching #1) S2(V/f switching #2)

V/f

Parameters selected

-CC

Base frequency #1

Base frequency voltage #1

Manual torque boost

Motor overload protection level #1 ：

Acceleration time #1

Deceleration time #1

：

：

：

：

：

OFF

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #1 ：

Power running torque limit #1

Regenerative torque limit #1

Base frequency #2

Base frequency voltage #2

Manual torque boost #2

：

：

：

：

：

Motor overload protection level #2 ：

Acceleration time #2

Deceleration time #2

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #2 ：

Power running torque limit #2

Regenerative torque limit #2

Base frequency #3

Base frequency voltage #3

Manual torque boost #3

：

：

OFF

：

：

：

：

：

Motor overload protection level #3 ：

Acceleration time #3

Deceleration time #3

：

：

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #3 ：

Power running torque limit #3

Regenerative torque limit #3

Base frequency #4

Base frequency voltage #4

Manual torque boost #4

Motor overload protection level #4 ：

Acceleration time #4

Deceleration time #4

：

：

：

：

：

：

：

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #4 ：

Power running torque limit #4

Regenerative torque limit #4

：

：

☆ Select V/f #1 when using the sensor-less vector control or the V/f 5-point setting.

Selecting V/f #2, #3 or #4 disables the vector control but enables the V/f constant control.

In addition, if the torque limit switching function and the acceleration/deceleration

switching function are assigned to input terminals, their settings are valid.

Note) With the control panel or communication, the following parameters can be set individually:　

･V/f switching ()

　　･Acceleration/deceleration switching()

　　･Torque limit switching()

　＊These functions are active only in control panel operation mode.

6.5 V/f 5-point setting





：

V/f 5-point setting VF1 frequency









：V/f 5-point setting VF4 frequency

：V/f 5-point setting VF4 voltage

：V/f 5-point setting VF5 frequency

：V/f 5-point setting VF5 voltage

：

V/f 5-point setting VF1 voltage

V/f 5-point setting VF2 frequency

V/f 5-point setting VF2 voltage

V/f 5-point setting VF3 frequency

V/f 5-point setting VF3 voltage









：

Refer to 5.10.7 for details.

F-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.6 Speed/torque command gain and bias

6.6.1 Using two types of frequency (speed) commands

 ：Speed setting mode selection

 ：Reference priority selection

 ：Speed setting mode selection #2

 ：／ switching frequency

・Function

These parameters switch two types of frequency

･ Switching by parameter setting

･ Automatic switching by means of switching frequencies

･ Switching with input terminal

1) One frequency (speed) reference

Reference priority selection =(Default setting)

Frequency(speed) reference



Priority is given to the reference set with .

2) Switching with input terminal (=)

Reference can be switched if the frequency priority switching function is assigned to a terminal.





Frequency reference

　Ａ： has priority ―― Frequency priority switching terminal OFF

　Ｂ： has priority ―― Frequency priority switching terminal ON

Ex.) When the frequency priority switching function is assigned to terminal S4.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

 (Frequency reference

～

Input terminal selection #8(S4)



priority switching)

Reference priority

C C

OFF

 has priority

 has priority

F-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3) Automatic switching by means of switching frequencies (＝)

Command selected with 

Frequency reference

Command selected with 

A: If the frequency set with  is higher than that set with 

・・・Priority is given to the command set with 

B: If the frequency set with  is equal to or lower than that set with 

・・・Priority is given to the command set with 

Frequency reference







Priority is given to

the command set

with .

the command set

with .

4) Automatic switching by means of switching frequencies(=).

A: If the frequency set with  is higher than that set with 

・・・Priority is given to the reference set with 

B: If the frequency set with  is equal to or lower than that set with 

・・・Priority is given to the reference set with 

Frequency reference







Priority is given to

the command set

with .

Priority is given to

the command set

with .

F-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

:VI(voltage input)/II(current input)

:RR(volume/voltage input)

:RX(voltage input)

:RX2(voltage input)(optional)

:Operating panel input

:Binary/BCD input (optional)

:Common serial communication option

:Serial communication RS485

:Communication add-on cassette option

:Up/down frequency

:Pulse input #1 (optional)

:

:

Speed setting mode selection







: has priority

: has priority

Reference priority selection



:/ switching

(input terminal function 104)

Speed setting mode selection #2 Same as 







～

/ switching frequency



6.6.2 Setting frequency command characteristics

 ：VI/II reference point #1

 ：VI/II reference point #1 frequency  ：RX2 reference point #1 frequency

 ：VI/II reference point #2  ：RX2 reference point #2

 ：VI/II reference point #2 frequency  ：RX2 reference point #2 frequency

 ：RR reference point #1  ：BIN reference point #1

 ：RR reference point #1 frequency  ：BIN reference point #1 frequency

 ：RR reference point #2  ：BIN reference point #2

 ：RR reference point #2 frequency  ：BIN reference point #2 frequency

 ：RX reference point #1  ：Pulse reference point #1

 ：RX reference point #1 frequency  ：Pulse reference point #1 frequency

 ：RX reference point #2  ：Pulse reference point #2

 ：RX2 reference point #1

 ：RX reference point #2 frequency  ：Pulse reference point #2 frequency

Refer to 7.3 for details.

6.6.3 Setting torque reference characteristics

 ：VI/II reference point #1

 ：VI/II reference point #2

 ：VI/II reference point #1 rate

 ：VI/II reference point #2 rate

 ：RR reference point #1

 ：RR reference point #2

 ：RR reference point #1 rate

 ：RR reference point #2 rate

 ：RX reference point #1

 ：RX reference point #2

 ：RX reference point #1 rate

 ：RX reference point #2 rate

Refer to 6.21 for details.

 ：RX2 reference point #1

 ：RX2 reference point #2

 ：RX2 reference point #1 rate

 ：RX2 reference point #2 rate

 ：BIN reference point #1

 ：BIN reference point #2

 ：BIN reference point #1 rate

 ：BIN reference point #2 rate

F-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.7 Operation frequency

6.7.1 Start-up frequency and End frequency

 ：Start-up frequency

 ：Stop frequency

・Function

The frequency set with the parameter  is put out immediately.

These parameters are used if the acceleration/deceleration time causes a delay in the response of

the starting torque. It is advisable to set these frequencies between 0.5 and 2 Hz (at a maximum

of 5 Hz). This setting reduces the slippage of motor below the rated value to prevent over-current.

If 0 speed torque is needed(pt = ,), set ,  at .

･ At startup: frequency set with  is put out immediately.

･ At stop: The output frequency drops to 0 Hz immediately by the frequency set with .

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Start-up frequency

Stop frequency

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

～ [Hz]

Default setting









Output frequency [Hz]

Start-up frequency

Stop frequency





０

[s]

Note) Set these parameters so that the start-up frequency  is higher than the stop frequency .

If the -set frequency is lower than the -set frequency, the reference frequency

must be higher than the -set frequency to start the motor.

6.7.2 Operating by means of reference signals

 ：Run frequency

 ：Run frequency hysteresis

・Function

The start and stop of the motor can be controlled simply by giving frequency setting signals.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Run frequency

Run frequency hysteresis

Adjustment range

～

～ [Hz]

Default setting









Output frequency [Hz]



The motor starts to accelerate when the

frequency setting signal reaches point B, while

it starts to decelerate and stop when the

frequency setting signal falls below point A.

 ＋ 



 － 

0　 A　

100 Frequency reference [%]

6.7.3 0Hz dead band frequency

 ：0Hz dead band frequency

・Function

In order to fixe the motor axis by the control with a sensor, you may set frequency

reference as 0[Hz] by the analog input etc.. But it may be set to 0[Hz] neither

by the drift nor offset. In such a case, this function sets frequency instructions to

0[Hz] certainly. When frequency reference is smaller than -set value,

frequency reference is set to 0[Hz].

F-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

Default setting

0Hz dead band frequency





notes 1) This function is invalid to preset-speed operation.

notes 2) It is effective as frequency instructions to the

frequency reference chosen by the priority

Frequency after 0Hz

dead band operation

carried out.



processing by , , communication, etc.

notes 3) The addition and multiplication of the override

function is carried out to the frequency in which

this function operated.

0 [Hz]

Frequency reference

6.8 DC injection braking

6.8.1 DC injection braking

 ：DC injection braking start frequency

 ：DC injection braking current

 ：DC injection braking time

 ：Forward/reverse DC braking priority control

・Function

These parameters apply a direct current to the motor to obtain large braking torque.

These parameters are used to set the direct current to be applied to the motor, the

braking time and the braking start frequency.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [s]

Default setting

DC injection braking start frequency

DC injection braking current

















DC injection braking time

: OFF, : ON

Forward/reverse DC braking priority control

Output frequency [Hz]

Reference

DC injection braking

Display of  blinks

DC injection braking

start frequency 

０

[s]

Output current [A]

DC injection braking current



０

DC injection braking time 

OFF

Operating signal（F-CC）

Note) The sensitivity of the inverter's overload protective function increases during D.C. braking. To avoid

tripping, the inverter may automatically adjust the D.C. braking rate. When DC injection braking current

 is set at 60% or more at the time of standard motor use, by setup of DC injection braking time

, overload protection may operate by motor overload protection level. Do not set 0.0% to DC

injection braking current .

<D.C. braking start conditions>

The forward/reverse DC braking priority control function  recognizes certain conditions as

stop commands from the inverter, and is activated when the output frequency goes down below

the DC injection braking start frequency set with . In this case, the conditions under which

DC injection braking starts include not only the issue of a start or stop command from the control

panel or an external input device, but also a fall in the reference frequency below the value set with

 (stop frequency setting) or a fall in the output frequency below the operation stop

frequency.

F-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[D.C. braking under normal conditions]

: DC injection braking



(Forward/reverse DC braking priority control =[OFF])

Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency





〜〜

０

time [ｓ]

Reference frequency

①

②

③





〜〜

OFF

Operating signal (F-CC)

　① If  and  > reference frequency

　② If  > reference frequency > 

　　 If  and  > reference frequency

: DC injection braking，

: Operation at command frequencies,

: DC injection braking

　③ If an operation command is entered during D.C. braking : D.C. braking is discontinued to restart the

operation.

[Priority to DC injection braking during forward/reverse operation]

(Forward/reverse run D.C. braking priority control  =  (ON))

＝

＝

: DC injection braking



Output frequency [Hz]



Set frequency



〜〜

０

time [ｓ]

④

⑥

⑤

Reference frequency





〜〜

０

〜〜

OFF

signal (F-CC)

signal (R-CC)

OFF

　④During normal forward/reverse run(＝)：

Not recognized as a stop command, so that DC injection braking is not active.

　⑤If a reverse run (or forward) command is entered during forward run (or reverse)

(＝)：DC injection braking starts when the frequency set with  exceeds the

reference frequency during deceleration.

　⑥If an operation command is entered during D.C. braking：priority is given to D.C. braking.

6.8.2 Motor shaft fixing control

 ：Motor shaft fixing control

・Function

This function is useful for preventing the motor shaft from rotating freely or for

preheating the motor.

F-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Motor shaft fixing control

: Disabled, : Enabled





If the motor shaft fixing control parameter  is set at , DC braking continue at half a

braking rate of that set with  to retain the motor after it has come to a full stop by DC

braking. To terminate the motor shaft fixing control, cut off the standby signal (ST signal).

Output frequency [Hz]

LED display  lights

Setting frequency

 lights



[s]

Output current [A]

　

OFF

Operating signal (F-CC)

OFF

Stand-by signal (ST-CC)

Note 1) Almost the same motor shaft fixing control can be exercised when DC injection braking is controlled

by means of external signals.

Note 2) If the motor shaft fixing control parameter  is set at (enabled) when the output frequency

is below the DC injection braking start frequency  and terminals ST-CC are closed (ON), the

DC injection braking function is activated and the motor shaft fixing control continues regardless of

the setting of the D.C. braking time parameter .

However, when a general-purpose motor is operated, if the D.C. braking rate  is set above

60% and the D.C. braking time  is set at a certain value, the overload protective function

may be activated by the electronic thermal protective function.

In addition, the inverter may automatically control the D.C. braking rate to avoid tripping.

Note 3) If the motor shaft is set free because of a power failure, the brake shaft fixing control is

discontinued. Also, if the inverter trips when the motor shaft fixing function is active, the fixing

control is discontinued, whether or not it automatically recovers from tripping by its retry function.

6.8.3 Zero-speed stop mode selection

 ：Zero-speed stop mode selection

・Function

This function controls motor in the zero-speed state at the time of a stop. If this

function is set up, 0Hz reference will be put out instead of DC braking at the time

of a stop, and a motor will be controlled in the setting time stop state. The monitor

display serves as  during this control operation. This function operates only at

the time of vector control (= , ) with a sensor.

Refer to the direct-current braking (6.8.1) for conditions of operation. The portion of

DC injection braking is served as operation which set frequency reference to 0Hz.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Standard(DC injection braking)

: 0 Hz command

Zero-speed stop mode selection





～ [Hz]

～ [s]

DC injection braking start frequency

DC injection braking time









Note.1) This function doesn't operate when  = .

Note.2) If this function is set up, motor shaft fixing control()cannot be used.

Note.3) This function doesn't operate at the time of a torque control and position control.

Note.4) This function doesn't operate except the time of the vector control (= , ) with a

sensor. In order to use this function, the option board for PG feedback is required. In

other than the vector control (= , ) with a sensor, the usual DC injection braking

operates.

Note.5) Since the reference frequency that will suspend the motor abruptly from the state of high

F-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

rotation if  is set up highly, please be careful. A trip may occur according to load

conditions.

Note.6) Setting of this function will influence following DC injection brakings.

1. DC injection braking by terminal command (the input terminal functions 22 and 23)

2. DC injection braking by command via communication

3. DC injection braking when (Jog stop control) is set at .

4. DC injection braking when (Emergency stop mode selection) is set at  or .

6.9 Jog run

 ：Jog run frequency

 ：Jog stop control

・Function

The jog run parameters are used to jog the motor. When a jog run signal is given, the jog

run frequency is put out immediately irrespective of the predetermined acceleration time.

Jog run is operational when the terminals S4(assigned to Jog)-CC are active.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

～ [Hz]

Jog run frequency





: Deceleration stop, : Coast stop,

: DC injection braking stop

Jog stop control





Forward jog run when S4-CC (Jog terminal) is ON, and F-CC are ON (connected)

Reverse jog run when S4-CC (Jog terminal) is ON, and R-CC are ON (connected)

( Forward run (or reverse) if a frequency reference is given when F-CC are ON (or R-CC are ON) )

Output frequency [Hz]

Setting frequency

Forward

Reverse

time [s]

ST-CC

F-CC

R-CC

S4-CC

Setting frequency

･ The terminals S4 and CC assigned to jog run are enabled when the operation frequency is lower than

the jog frequency, and they are disabled if not. To switch to jog run during normal operation, set the

forced jog run parameter (input terminal function selection) at 50 or 51 (inversion), and 52 or 53

(inversion).

･ Jog run is operational when the jog run terminals S4-CC is active (ON).

･ Priority is given to jog run even when an operation command is entered during jog run.

･ In control panel operation mode, setting the parameter  (input terminal priority selection) at 

makes it possible to perform jog run, using the Run and Stop keys.

･ Even when  is set at  or , an emergency DC injection braking stop can be used ( is

set at  or ).

･ If F-CC and R-CC are ON simultaneously when  (Priority selection) is set at  (reverse run),

operation modes switches as follows:

Forward jog run -> slowdown stop (jog frequency -> 0 [Hz]) -> reverse jog run.

[Setting of jog terminals S4-CC]

Assign the control terminal S4 to jog run (default setting:16 (preset-speed #4)).

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

～

Input terminal selection #8 (S4)

(Jog run)



Note) During jog run, Low-speed signal may be output but not RCH signal, and PID control is disabled.

F-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.10 Jump frequency - Jumping resonant frequencies

 ：Jump frequency #1

 ：Jump frequency band #1

 ：Jump frequency #2

 ：Jump frequency band #2

 ：Jump frequency #3

 ：Jump frequency band #3

・Function

These parameters are used to jump resonant frequencies to avoid resonance with the

natural frequency of the mechanical equipment operated. In jump mode, the motor

exhibits hysteresis with respect to the jump frequency.

Output frequency [Hz]

Jump frequency band #1

()

Jump frequency #1()

Jump frequency band #2

Jump frequency #2()

（）

Jump frequency band #3

（）

Jump frequency #3()

Setting frequency

０

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

～

Jump frequency #1

Jump frequency band #1

Jump frequency #2

Jump frequency band #2

Jump frequency #3

Jump frequency band #3















～

～

～

～

～





☆

If the upper limit frequency () is within a jump frequency range,

it is limited to the lowest frequency in the jump frequency range.

☆

If the lower limit frequency () is within a jump frequency range,

it is limited to the highest frequency in the jump frequency range.

Do not overlap upper limit freqency () and lower limit

frequency () within a jump frequency range. If they are

overlapped,it is operated lowest jump frequency.

☆

Do not overlap two or more jump frequency ranges,or it cannot

be operated within normal range.

Jump frequency

band #2

Jump frequency

band #1

The operation frequency is not jumped during acceleration

or deceleration.

6.11 Preset-speed #8～15

 ～  ：Preset-speed #8～#15

Refer to 5.14 for details.

F-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.12 PWM carrier frequency

 ：PWM carrier frequency

・Function

1) The sound tone of acoustic noise can be changed by adjusting the PWM carrier frequency. This

adjustment is effective in preventing the motor from resonating with its load(machine) or its fan cover.

2) Decreasing the carrier frequency is also effective in reducing electromagnetic.

Note) Decreasing the carrier frequency reduces electromagnetic noise but increases acoustic noise.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～  ) [kHz](*1)

[Upper limits differ by applicable motor

capacity. Refer to the table below.]

Default setting

(

Model

dependent

PWM carrier frequency



　(*1)Setting the PWM carrier frequency larger than the default value, reduction of rated current is

needed. For details, refer to figure and table below.

Rated current [%]

100

①

Default setting

②

Upper limit

PWM carrier frequency [kHz]

PWM carrier freq. [kHz]

Default setting Upper limit

Voltage Applicable motor

class [V] capacity [kW]

①Rated current

at upper limit [%]

②Max value, no rated current

reduction is needed [kHz]

0.4～2.2，

5.5～11，18.5

No need of rated current reduction

3.7

2.2

200

No need of rated current reduction

75，90

0.75～2.2,

5.5～11, 18.5

3.7，15，22

No need of rated current reduction

2.2

No need of rated current reduction

400

2.2

90/110～220

280

Note1) In vector control mode, set the carrier frequency to 2.2 [kHz] or over. Operation may

become unstable if the carrier frequency is lower than 2.2 [kHz].

Note2) In the case that the operation frequency is more than 130Hz,carrier frequency is limited

to less than 10kHz automatically.

Note3) Set the carrier frequency to 2.2kHz when sine wave filter (LFL,LFC)is used at output

side of inverter. Filter can be damaged by fire in the case of other than 2.2kHz.

6.13 Trip-less enhancement

6.13.1 Auto-restart (restart during free-run (coast))

 ：Auto-restart

 ：Auto-restart mode

 ：Auto-restart adjustment #1

 ：Auto-restart adjustment #2

 ：Auto-restart adjustment #3

Warning

･ Do not get near the motor or the machine.

The motor and the machine unexpectedly restart after recovery from a momentary power

failure, which might cause injury to persons.

･ Stick caution labels to the inverter, the motor and the machine, to prevent accidents due

to an unexpected restart of them after recovery from a momentary power failure.

Mandatory

F-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

・Function

Auto-restart detect the rotating speed and direction of rotation of the motor during coasting

or momentary power failure, to ensure that the motor restarts smoothly (Motor speed

search function). With this parameter, you can also switch from commercial power

operation to inverter operation without stopping the motor.

When this function is being performed, “” is displayed.

Step 1: Set the control method of Auto-restart

1) Restart after a momentary power failure

Input voltage

Motor speed

OFF

F-CC

★=: This function is performed when the inverter recovers from a momentary power

failure after under-voltage of the main circuit and the control circuit).

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting Setting value

: Disabled

Auto restart

(Motor speed search)

: Enabled(at power failure)

: Enabled(at ST ON/OFF)

: Enabled( + )

 or 





* This function is performed in retry mode regardless of the setting of this parameter.

* The function (=,,) is activated when the reset of trip or the control power is turned on.

* The function (=,) is activated when a voltage is detected in the main circuit.

2) Restart of coasting motor (Motor speed search function)

Motor speed

OFF

F-CC

ST-CC

★=: This function is performed when ST-CC are OFF and then connected again.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Disabled

Default setting Setting value

Auto restart

(Motor speed search)

: Enabled(at power failure)

: Enabled(at ST ON/OFF)

: Enabled( + )

 or 





※ To restart the inverter in control panel operation mode, press the RUN key after a power failure.

※ When (Number of PG input phases) is set at  (single phase) in PG feedback vector control mode (= ),

the inverter may trip (: speed error) if the direction of rotation of the motor does not agree with.

Step 2: Set the mode of Auto-restart

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Speed search #1 (*1),(*2),(*3)

: Restart at coasted frequency #1 (*3)

: Restart at coasted frequency #2 (*3)

: Speed search #2 (*2),(*3)

: Special method

Default setting

Auto-restart mode

(When  is set at

 or , set this

parameter at .)

Model

dependent



(*1),(*2),(*3): Refer to inside of

box in the next page.

: This setting is for special usage. Do not set at this.

F-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Adjustment value]

Speed search #1



：

　　VF-A7 searches the motor speed and restarts. It detects the motor speed also at

the time of a power supply injection. This method needs setting of motor constant

parameters. Activation of zero speed motor needs waiting times.

Restart at coasted frequency #1



：

　　It starts from the frequency, when coast started in instant electric power failure, ST

terminal OFF, etc... Usual starting is performed at the time of a power supply

injection and after (Control circuit insufficient voltage) detection, at the time

of a trip reset.

Restart at coasted frequency #2



：

　　It starts from the frequency, when coast started in instant electric power failure, ST

terminal OFF, etc. It starts on setting frequency (speed reference frequency) at the

time of a power supply injection and after (Control circuit insufficient voltage)

detection, at the time of a trip reset.

Speed search #2



：

This setting is used for the models 37kW or more. Do not set it as = for

other models. If it is set as = from a model 30kW or less, since the

rotational frequency of a motor is normally undetectable, there is a possibility that

trips, such as an over-current, overload, and an over-voltage, may occur.

The rotational speed and the rotation direction of a motor are searched It searches

also at the time of a power supply injection. The time taken to detect the rotational

speed of a motor becomes short as compared with the speed search #1.

Use at factory default setting (0.4~30kW:= 37~280kW:=).

The setting =, is for short time starting without speed searching to save

waiting times(*1). It may give the machine load of torque momentarily so use it

carefully.

Caution!

★By using retry function  together, auto restart function can be actuated at the time of

tripping.

Adaptation for elevator applications

The load may go down in the waiting time after operation start signal is inputted until it starts.

When you apply an inverter to an elevator, make the setting as =. And do not use

the retry function.

In the case the auto restart function does not work

When a trip occur at the time of auto restart, or auto restart function does not work well,

please adjust parameters referring to step 3.

(*1)Case ＝

★For the sake of motor speed detection after the power restoration, there are following waiting

times(longest time) at time of auto restart.

Type of inverter

waiting times (longest time) [s]

VFA7-2004PL～2037PL，4007PL～4037PL

VFA7-2055PL～2300P，4055PL～4300P

About 2

About 4

★When the auto restart function is selected, the this function is actuated also at time of

activation of motor and at the first operation after the reset of tripping. The operation will

restart after the waiting time passes.

★Before using the auto restart function, be sure to confirm the setting value of the motor

constant parameters;～, ～

If the wrong setting value is used, motor speed cannot be searched and tripping accident

such as over-current, overload, over-voltage, etc. can occur.

★In the case of the combination with a motor smaller two or more frames than inverter rated

capacity, this function may be unable to detect the rotational speed of the motor.

You cannot use a smaller capacity motor for check of operation etc., please be careful.

★Even when the auto restart function is selected, motor speed may not be detected if the

frequency is more than 60[Hz]. In this case, tripping accident such as over-current, overload,

over-voltage, etc. can occur.

★If the motor is idle state and motor-load is light, the motor may rotate a little. Be careful.

F-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 3: Set the property of Auto-restart

1) Case =

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～

Default setting

Model dependent

Auto-restart adjustment #1

Auto-restart adjustment #2





Example of setting) In the case adjustment value is , set at ～ and check the property.

Notice that in this case, waiting time for the restart grows to 110～120[%]. If it cannot be adjusted at

setting , , reset the range of  (motor constant #2)at 20~30% lower.

2) Case =～

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Fast(0.5[s])(with a small inertia application)

: Normal(1.0[s])

Default setting

Model

dependent

Auto-restart

adjustment #3



～: 1.5～4.5[s]

: Slow(5.0[s])

This parameter adjusts the rising time of motor torque at time of restarting. Adjust this parameter to

inertia moment of the load.

6.13.2 Regenerative power ride-through control / Deceleration stop

 ：Regenerative power ride-through control / Deceleration stop

 ：Ride-through time / Deceleration time

・Function

1) Regenerative power ride-through control

When instant electric power failure occurs during operation, this function makes

operation continue using the regeneration energy from a motor.

2)Deceleration stop

When instant electric power failure occurs during operation, this function stops the

motor quickly compulsorily. A forcible stop is carried out in (Deceleration

time) using the regeneration energy from the motor. (Deceleration time changes with

control.) After a compulsive stop, it maintains a stop state until operation instruction

is once turned off.

[When power is shut off]

★The time for which the motor keeps running

Input voltage

Motor speed

varies with the inertial of the machine operated

and the loading conditions. So, conduct a test

to determine the time before using this function.

★Using this function in conjunction with the retry

function enables the inverter to restart without

making a fault stop.

free run time

About 100[ms]

★The power ride-through control ( = ) is

exercised for about 100 [ms]. (A inverter which

Applicable Motor capacity is 22kW or less is

able to continue to control the motor a few

seconds.)

[＝]

[When power fails momentarily]

Input voltage

Motor speed

Less than 100[ms] [＝]

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: OFF

Default setting

Regenerative power ride-through

control / Deceleration stop

: ON (Regenerative

power ride-through control)

: ON (Deceleration stop)

～ [s]







Ride-through time / Deceleration time



Note) Even if these functions are used, a motor may free run according to load conditions. In this case,

please use the auto restart function together.

Note) These functions do not operate at the time of torque control or position control.

Note) Usual slowdown time comes at the time of notes =  and =.

F-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.13.3 Retry function

 ：Retry selection

Warning

･Do not get near the alarm-stopped motor and machine.

When the inverter is in retry mode, the alarm-stopped motor and machine unexpectedly

restart when the predetermined time has passed, and thus might cause you to get an injury.

･Stick caution labels to the inverter, the motor and the machine, to prevent accidents

due to an unexpected restart of them because of the retry function.

Mandatory

・Function

The inverter automatically resets itself when it has tripped. During a retry, according to

the setting of  (Auto-restart mode selection) the inverter automatically restarts

and this function makes smooth motor activation possible.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Disabled, ～ times

Retry selection





Causes of tripping and retry process

Cause of tripping

Retry process

Canceling conditions

Momentary

power failure

Over-current

Over-voltage

Overload

a maximum of 10 consecutive retries

Retry is canceled if the inverter

trips again for reasons other than a

momentary power failure, over-

current, over-voltage or overload,

or if the inverter fails to restart

within the predetermined number

of retries.

1st retry : about 1 [s] after tripping

2nd retry: about 2 [s] after tripping

3rd retry : about 3 [s] after tripping

　　　　　　　…

10th retry : about 10 [s] after tripping

Kinds of trips can be retried

・，，　　：Over-current

・　：Overload of inverter ・　：Over heat

・，，：Over-current of DC injection ・　：Overload of motor

・，，　　：Over-voltage

・　：Overload of braking resister

★No retry is performed if the inverter trips for the following reasons:

・,, : Arm short circuit

・ : Interruption communication error

・

・

・

: Phase failure(input side)

: Phase failure(output side)

・ : Gate array fault

・ : Output current detector error

Loaded side over-current at start time・ : Optional unit fault

・, : Ground-fault

・ : Flash memory fault

・ : Sink/source switching error

・ : Speed error (Over speed)

・ : Key error

・

: Emergency stop

: EEPROM error

: Main RAM error

: Main ROM error

: CPU fault

・

・

・

・

・Others (other than the above)

★During a retry, the fault detection relay (FLA, B and C) is not active.

★A virtual cooling time is set for trips due to an overload (,,). Therefore, a

retry is performed after a virtual cooling time and the retry time have passed.

★In the case of a trip due to an over-voltage (～), the inverter may trips again

unless the voltage in its D.C. section falls enough.

★In the case of a trip due to overheating (), the inverter may trip again unless the

temperature inside it falls enough; the inverter monitors the temperature in it.

★A retry is performed if  is set enabled, even if the trip holding selection parameter

 is set at .

★During a retry,  and the value selected with the status monitor selection

parameter  are displayed alternately.

F-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.13.4 Dynamic (regenerative) braking - To urgently stop the motor

 ：Dynamic braking mode selection

 ：Dynamic braking resistance

 ：Dynamic braking resistor capacity

・Function

Dynamic braking is used in the following cases:

1) need to stop the motor quickly.

2) The inverter trips because of an over-voltage (OP) during deceleration.

3) Fluctuation of load condition causes a regenerative power even at a constant speed

such as press machine.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Disabled

Dynamic braking mode selection

: Enabled/overload

detection enabled

～ [Ω]

～ [kW]



Model

dependent

Dynamic braking resistance

Dynamic braking resistor capacity





※Default settings vary from model dependent. Refer to 6.13.4-4).

Protection level is defined by (Refer to 6.13.5).

Note 1) While dynamic braking is in operation, “P” blink is displayed at left side of the

monitor. (It is not an error.) The blink starts at achieving (over-voltage

stall protection level / dynamic braking protection level).

Note 2) In the case of oscillating of monitor or taking long time at deceleration, set

(over-voltage stall protection) = .

Note 3) When using braking unit(PB3), set (dynamic braking mode selection) = ,

and (over-voltage stall protection) = .

Note 4) Dynamic braking operates even if the ST-CC terminal is opened.

1) An internal braking resistor (for 3.7kW model and smaller)

Note)

ＭＣＣＢ

ＰＢ１

ＰＡ１

ＰＲ１

Motor

Ｕ

Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

Power

supply

Ｖ

ＩＭ

Internal braking

Ｗ

resistor

Inverter

Ｇ/Ｅ

　Note) The internal braking resistor is already connected to terminals PA1 and PB1 (so

that the internal resistor is ready for use). When the internal braking resistor is not

used, change its connection from PB1 to PR1, and also change the setting of the

dynamic braking-related parameter. See 2) on the next page for the connection.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Dynamic braking

mode selection

Adjustment range

: Disabled

: Enabled/overload detection enabled

Setting value





F-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) An external braking resistor (optional)

　　　a) External braking resistor (with a thermal fuse) (optional)

External braking resistor

(optional)

MCCB

ＰＡ

ＰＢ

Motor

Ｕ

Ｖ

Ｗ

Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

Power

supply

Inverter

Ｇ/Ｅ

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Dynamic braking

mode selection

Adjustment range

: Disabled

: Enabled/overload detection enabled

Setting value





　　☆In the case that the internal dynamic resistor is used in 3.7kW model or less, then do not

use any external braking resistors. When using an external braking resistor instead of

the internal resistor, change the connection of the internal resistor from terminal PB1 to

terminal PR1. (For boosting braking force)

Do not connect an external resistor with a resistance (combined resistance) smaller

than the minimum admissible resistance.

For overload protection, be sure to set the parameters  and  properly.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [Ω]

Setting value

Any value

Dynamic braking resistance

Dynamic braking resistor capacity





～ [kW]

[Externally connectable braking resistors (resistance)]

Voltage

class [V]

Applicable motor

capacity [kW]

Internal braking

resistor

Minimum admissible resistance

connected externally [Ω]

0.4, 0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

0.75, 1.5

2.2

100

120[W] - 70[Ω]

120[W] - 40[Ω]

120[W] - 150[Ω]

200

400

3.7

F-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　b) When using a braking resistor without thermal fuse

External braking resistor

(optional)

＊

If no power supply is provided

for the control circuit

THR

ＭＣＣＢ

ＭＣ

ＰＡ

ＰＢ

Motor

Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

Ｕ

Power

supply

Ｖ

Ｗ

2:1

(*2)

Forward/stop

Reverse/stop

Ｆ

Inverter

ＦＬＢ

ＦＬＣ

ＦＬＡ

ＭＣ

Ｒ

(*1)

Fuse

Surge killer

ＣＣ

Power

supply

ＴＣ

Ｇ/Ｅ

　(*1) Connection when using an MCCB with a top coil instead of an MC.

　(*2) A step-down transformer is required for 400V models but not for 200V models.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Dynamic braking

mode selection

PBR resistor

PBR resistor capacity

Adjustment range

: Disabled

: Enabled with over load detection

～ [Ω]

Setting value





Any value　(*3)





～ [kW]

(When the standard internal braking resistor option is not used, be sure to set the parameters F308

and F309 properly for overload protection.)

(*3)  is for overload protection of our optional PBR and PBR3 type. When DGP type is used,

set  = 600 kW and protect the circuit by external thermal.

　※A thermal relay (THR) must be connected as the last resort for fire prevention in case a failure

occurs in the overload and over-current protective functions provided for the inverter to protect the

braking resistor. Select and connect a thermal relay (THR) with a capacity (watt) commensurate

with that of the braking resistor used.

　- Caution -

　In the above circuit, the MC in the main circuit is turned off if an inverter's protective function is

activated, and consequently no trip message is displayed. The inverter recovers from a trip if it is

turned off. So, check the trip history record after turning off the inverter and then on again. (Refer

to 8.1.)

To prevent a trip condition from being cleared by turning off the power and then on again,

change the setting of the inverter trip retention selection parameter F602. (Refer to 6.25.3)

＊Control power unit option（22kW or less）

ＭＣ

In a circuit where a control power supply

is connected to RO and SO, when the

MC in the main circuit is turned off when

a trip is occurred, trip data is saved so

Ｒ

22kW or less

Ｓ

Option

Ｔ

that trip messages can be displayed (FL

output also is retained.) For optional

control power supply units, refer to 9.4.

Ｒ０

Ｓ０

When using a custom braking resistor, be sure to select a braking resistor with a resistance larger

than the minimum admissible resistance. Refer to 4 on the next page for the minimum admissible

resistance.

F-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3) Selection of braking resistor option and braking unit

Overload relay(THR)

Regulated

braking resistor option

Continuous

regenerative

braking

allowable

Type

Model

amperage

(reference)

(*4)

Type form

Rating

form

[A]

capacity (*1)

VFA7-2004P～2022PL

VFA7-2037PL

VFA7-2055PL

VFA7-2075PL

VFA7-2110P

120W - 70Ω

120W - 40Ω

240W - 20Ω

440W - 15Ω

660W - 10Ω

880W - 7.5Ω

100W

120W

96W

130W

200W

270W

－

Installed

PBR3-2055

PBR3-2075

PBR3-2110

PBR3-2150

VFA7-2150P～2185P

VFA7-2220P

1760W - 3.3Ω

610W

－

PBR3-2220

VFA7-2300PN (*2)

VFA7-2370P1N～2550P1N (*2)

VFA7-2750P1N～2900P1N (*3)

VFA7-4007PL～4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL

VFA7-4110PL

VFA7-4150PL～4185P

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300PN (*2)

VFA7-4370P1N～4750P1N (*2)

VFA7-4110KP1N～4160KP1N (*3)

VFA7-4220KP1N (*3)

VFA7-4280KP1N (*3)

2200W - 2Ω

3.4kW - 1.7Ω

120W - 150Ω

240W - 80Ω

440W - 60Ω

660W - 40Ω

880W - 30Ω

1000W

3400W

120W

96W

130W

190W

270W

－

T65J

－

PBR-222W002

DGP600W-B1

Installed

PBR3-4055

PBR3-4075

PBR3-4110

PBR3-4150

－

1760W - 15Ω

540W

－

PBR3-4220

1760W - 8Ω

7.4kW - 3.7Ω

8.7kW - 1.9Ω

14kW - 1.4Ω

1000W

7400W

8700W

14000W

－

PBR-417W008

DGP600W-B2

DGP600W-B3

DGP600W-B4

T65J

T100J

T115J

110

(*1) Continuous regenerative braking allowable capacities vary according to the rated capacity and

resistance of the resistor for reasons of endurance.

(*2) To use braking resistor, installing a braking resistor drive circuit option is needed.

(*3) To use braking resistor (DGP600 series), installing a braking resistor drive circuit option is needed.

And overload relay on this table is needed.

(*4) Type forms of Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd. products.

4) Connectable braking resistors and their minimum resistances

The table below lists externally-connectable braking resistors and their minimum

admissible resistances. Do not connect any braking resistor with a resistance (total

resistance) smaller than the minimum resistance admissible for it.

200V class

400V class

Applicable motor

capacity [kW]

Standard

minimum

Standard

minimum

option [Ω]

resistance [Ω]

option [Ω]

resistance [Ω]

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

110

132

160

220

280

70 (Installed)

7.5

3.3

1.7

1.3

－

150 (Installed)

－

100

13.3

6.7

40 (Installed)

7.5

3.3

13.3

－

1.7

－

3.3

－

3.7

1.9

1.4

2.5

1.3

－

F-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.13.5 Avoiding over-voltage trip

 ：Over-voltage stall protection

 ：Over-voltage stall protection level (high response)

 ：Over-voltage stall protection level

・Function

The functions automatically keep constant or increase the output frequency to prevent

tripping due to over-voltage in the DC bus during deceleration or constant-speed run. When

the over-voltage stall protection is active, it may take longer than the deceleration time.

Maximum frequency

If DC voltage rise and reach the level set

up by , output frequency will be

controlled in order to control this rise. If DC

Output frequency

voltage rise more and reach the level set

up by , this control operation is

performed with high response.

Real deceleration time (differ from regenerative power)

Set deceleration time

←

Over voltage stall protection level (high response)



DC voltage

Over voltage stall protection level



～

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Enabled, : Disabled,

: Enabled (forced quick deceleration)

Over-voltage stall protection





Over-voltage stall protection level

(high response)

～ [%] (*2)









～ [%] (*2)

Over-voltage stall protection level (*1)

(*1)  serves also as the level of dynamic (regenerative) braking operation.(Refer to 6.13.4)

(*2) 100% (200V class = 200×√2 [V], 400V class = 400×√2 [V])

6.13.6 Adjusting the output voltage and voltage compensation

 ：Voltage of base frequency(output voltage adjustment)

 ：Selection of base frequency voltage(voltage compensation)

・Function

Voltage of base frequency (output voltage adjustment)

This parameter set the base frequency  voltage. And this parameter can make it so that no

voltage exceeding the  value is put out. (This function is active when  is set  or .)

Selection of base frequency voltage (voltage compensation)

The function keeps the V/f ratio constant for prevention of torque drop at low speeds

even when the input voltage drop.

　　○Voltage compensation... The V/f ratio is kept constant even at input voltage fluctuation.

　　○Voltage limitation ... The output voltage is limited to . If the voltage compensation fun

ction is disabled, no limitation is imposed to the output voltage.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [V]

Default setting

Base frequency voltage #1

(output voltage adjustment)

 [V]

/ [V]



: without voltage compensation(limitless output voltage)

: with voltage compensation(limitless output voltage)

: without voltage compensation(limited output voltage)

Base frequency voltage

(voltage compensation)





: with voltage compensation(limited output voltage)

　　☆If  is set at  or , the output voltage varies with the input voltage.

　　☆The output voltage does not exceed the input voltage, even if the base frequency voltage

() is set above the input voltage.

F-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

☆The ratio of the voltage to the frequency can be adjusted to the motor capacity. Setting

 at  enables the inverter to prevent the output voltage from increasing with the

input voltage when the operation frequency is higher than the base frequency.

[=: no voltage compensation/not limited]　 [=: voltage compensation/not limited]

Input voltage

high



input

voltage



low

Output

voltage

low

Rated voltage

Output

voltage

[V]

Output frequency



　　　　　　＊＝, , 



＊

The output voltage can exceed  if the output

frequency is higher than the base frequency ##,

even when  is lower than the input voltage.

＞1: no voltage higher than

Rated voltage

the input voltage is put out.

[=: no voltage compensation/limited

]　

[=: voltage compensation/limited]

Input voltage

Input

voltage

high

input

voltage



high



Rated voltage

low

Output

voltage

Output

voltage

[V]

Output frequency



＊＝, , 



Rated voltage

＞1, no voltage higher than

the input voltage is put out.

6.13.7 Prohibiting the reverse operation

 ：Reverse-run prohibition

・Function

The function prevents the direction of operation from being reversed in case an in

correct operation signal is given.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Reverse-run

prohibition

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Permitted, : Reverse run prohibited : Forward run prohibited,





: Direction designated by command permitted(*1)

(*1): Top priority is given to the command specifying the direction of rotation (forward run or reverse

run command).In preset-speed operation mode or forced jog run mode, you can prevent the motor

from rotating in the opposite direction to that specified by the forward run or reverse run command.

Caution!

･

This parameter is invalid in positioning mode. In addition, if the motor runs in a prohibited direction in

preset-speed mode or forced jog run, operation commands become invalid irrespective of the control mode.

If the motor constant is not set optimally in vector-control, automatic-torque boost mode, the motor may

slightly run in reverse direction because of the slip frequency. Before using this parameter, set parameter

 (stop frequency) at a frequency close to the slip frequency. When the inverter is in sensor vector

control mode (



and 

), depending on the setting of , the motor may rotates in the

opposite direction to that prohibited when it is turned off and then on again, regardless of the setting of this

parameter.

F-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.14 Drooping control

 ：Drooping gain

 ：Speed at a drooping gain 0%

 ：Speed at the drooping gain 

 ：Drooping insensitive torque band

 ：Output filter for drooping

Note : Above parameters are valid only when  is set at ,  or .

・Function

When operating a single load with more than one inverter and one motor, these parameters distribute

the load to the inverters. These parameters can adjust the frequency range, the insensitive torque band

and gains.

Ｇａｉｎ１

Ｇａｉｎ２

Drooping

gain

Drooping

gain





－ 

Internal torque reference





Frequency

－ 

Dead band

Adjustment range

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Default setting

～ [%]

Drooping gain













～ [Hz]

～ [%]

Speed at a drooping gain 0[%]

Speed at the drooping gain 

Drooping insensitive torque band

Output filter for drooping





～ [rad/s]



・When torque larger than the dead band torque is applied, the frequency is decreased (during power

running) or increased (during regenerative braking).

・Drooping takes effect within the frequency range above the frequency set with .

・In the frequency range between  and , the drooping rate varies with the torque.

The change in the frequency during drooping can be calculated as described below.

a) Gain by internal torque reference (Gain 1)

If internal torque reference [%]≧0

　Gain1 ＝（internal torque reference－dead band  ）/ 100

　　Grain 1 needs to be set at 0 or a positive number.

If internal torque reference [%]＜0

　Gain1 ＝（internal torque reference＋dead band  ）/ 100

　　Grain 1 needs to be set at 0 or a negative number.

b) Gain by frequency after acceleration (Gain 2)

If  ＜ 

｜Frequency after acceleration｜≦Frequency 1 set with 

　Gain2 ＝ 0

｜Frequency after acceleration｜＞Frequency 2 set with 

　Gain2 ＝ Drooping gain  / 100

F-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If frequency 1  ＜｜frequency after acceleration｜≦frequency 2 

　　　　　 Drooping gain  　

Gain2＝　　　　　　　　 ×

　　　　　 100　　　　

(

｜

freq. after acceleration

｜

－ freq.1  )

( freq.2  － freq.1  )

If  ≧ 

If｜frequency after acceleration｜≦ frequency 1 

　Gain2 ＝ 0

If｜frequency after acceleration｜＞ frequency 1 

　Gain2 ＝ Drooping gain  / 100

c) Drooping speed

Drooping speed = base frequency  ^Note×Gain1×Gain2

Note) For this calculation, assume the base frequency to be 100 Hz if it is higher than 100 [Hz].

6.15 Function for crane/hoist

 ：Light-load high-speed operation

 ：Light-load high-speed operation switching lower limit frequency

 ：Light-load high-speed operation load waiting time

 ：Light-load high-speed operation load detection time

 ：Light-load high-speed operation heavy load detection time

 ：Switching load torque current during forward run

 ：Heavy load torque during acceleration in forward direction

 ：Heavy load torque during fixed speed in forward direction

 ：Switching load torque current during reverse run

 ：Heavy load torque during acceleration in reverse direction

 ：Heavy load torque during fixed speed in reverse direction

 ：Automatic light-load high-speed operation frequency

 ：Light-load detection mode

6.16 Commercial power/inverter switching

 ：Output signal selection of commercial power/inverter switching

 ：Commercial power/inverter switching frequency

 ：Inverter side switching waiting time

 ：Commercial power side switching waiting time

 ：Commercial power switching frequency holding time

・Function

The function switches between the commercial power and the inverter operation without

stopping the motor in case of tripping or by sending a signal, and also to transmit switching

signals to an external sequence (MC, etc).

F-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: OFF

Output signal selection of

commercial power/inverter

switching

: Automatic switching in case of trip

: Commercial power switching frequency setting

enabled





: Both ( + )

Commercial power/inverter

switching frequency

Inverter side switching

waiting time

Commercial power side

switching waiting time

Commercial power switching

frequency holding time

～ [Hz]











Model

dependent

[Model dependent]～ [s]

～ [s]

～ [s]





(*1)The trips which is followed by automatic switching are trips other than , , 

and .

[Timing chart]

Commercial power switching

freq. holding time　

Detecting time

Commercial power/inverter

switching frequency 

Frequency Reference

Inverter side switching

waiting time



MC output for inverter operation

Commercial power/inv. Switching

output１(P24-OUT1)

Commercial power side switching

waiting time

　

MC output for commercial

power operation

Commercial power/inv.

switching output２(P24-OUT2)

Commercial power switching

signal (S3-CC)

ST (standby) signal

(ST-CC)

Commercial power switching signal S3-CC ON：Commercial power operation

Commercial power switching signal S3-CC OFF：Inverter operation

Note) If ST-CC is opened,switching cannot be operated normally.

Adjustment range

Title

Function

Setting value

Output signal selection of

commercial power/inverter switching

Commercial power/inverter switching

frequency

～

 or 

Power source frequency, etc.

Model dependent





～ [Hz]















[Model dependent]

Inverter side switching waiting time

～ [s]

Commercial power side switching

waiting time

Commercial power switching

frequency holding time

～ [s]

～ [s]

～



: (Commercial power

/inverter switching)

: (Commercial power

/inverter switching output #1)

: (Commercial power

/inverter switching output #2)

Input terminal selection #7 (S3)

Output terminal selection #1 (OUT1)

Output terminal selection #2 (OUT2)

～

Caution!

･ Before switching to the commercial power, make sure that, when the motor takes power directly from

the commercial power, it rotates in the forward direction as defined for operation by the inverter.

･ Do not set the Reverse-run prohibition parameter  at  or  that forward run may be

prohibited. These settings make it impossible to switch the inverter to the forward run position,

and thus to switch from the inverter to the commercial power.

F-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.17 PID control

 ：Signal selection of PID control

 ：Delay filter

 ：Proportional (P) gain

 ：Integral (I) gain

 ：PID deviation upper limit

 ：PID deviation lower limit

 ：Differential (D) gain

6.18 Speed feedback/positioning control

 ：Number of PG input pulses

 ：Number of PG input phases

 ：PG disconnection detection

 ：Electronic gear

 ：Position loop gain

 ：Positioning completion range

 ：Frequency limit at position control

 ：Current control proportional gain

 ：Current control integral gain

 ：Speed loop proportional gain

 ：Speed loop integral gain

 ：Motor counter data selection

 ：Speed loop parameter ratio

6.19 Preset speed operation mode

 ～  ：Preset speed operation modes

Refer to 5.14 for details.

F-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.20 Setting motor constants

 ：Auto-tuning

 ：Motor constant #5

 ：Slip frequency gain  ：Number of motor poles

 ：Motor constant #1  ：Rated capacity of motor

 ：Motor constant #2  ：Motor type

 ：Motor constant #3  ：Auto-tuning prohibition

 ：Motor constant #4

Warning

・Do not set the motor parameter #3(Exciting inductance: ) less than or equal to a half

of default value. If the motor parameter #3(Exciting inductance: ) was set at a

extremely small value, stall prevention function would work and output frequency would rise.

Mandatory

When using the vector control or the automatic torque boost, it is necessary to set (tuning) motor

constants. You can set motor constants by any of the following three methods.

After setting by one of three methods, drive the motor.

1) Using the automatic V/f mode setting () to make the setting of the motor control mode

selection () and the auto-tuning parameter () at a time

2) Setting the motor control mode () and the auto-tuning parameter () individually

3) Setting the motor control mode () and setting motor constants manually

<Note> If tuning error () occurs when the power is turned on, set the motor type  at  (others).

[Selection 1: Setting by the automatic V/f mode]

This is the simplest way of setting. With the automatic control parameter, you can set the

automatic torque boost, the sensorless vector control and the auto-tuning parameter at a time.

Automatic V/f mode ＝ (Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning)

Automatic V/f mode ＝ (Sensorless vector control + auto-tuning)

Automatic V/f mode ＝ (Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning)

Refer to 5.2 for details of this setting.

[Selection 2: Individually setting the vector control and the auto-tuning]

This is the method for individually setting the vector control and the auto-tuning. You need to

set the control mode with the motor control mode selection , before auto-tuning setting.

Set the auto-tuning ＝ (Automatic tuning execution)

[Parameter setting]

Adjustment range

Title

Function

Default setting

: Without auto-tuning (internal table)

: Motor constant initialization ( after execution)

: Automatic tuning execution ( after execution)

Auto-tuning





Here are the setting conditions for each type of motor.

Applicable motor

Auto-tuning

Type

motor poles

Capacity

Same capacity as the inverter

Different capacity from the inverter

Same capacity as the inverter

Different capacity from the inverter

Not required

Toshiba

standard motor

others

Required

Other motors

F-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Setting procedure]

Key operated LED display

Operation

The running frequency is displayed. (Make this setting when

the motor is out of operation.) (If the monitor display momde

setting parameter  is set at [Running frequency])



Press the Monitor key to call up the first basic parameter

(automatic acceleration/deceleration).

MON









Select the parameter (extended parameters of 

to ) by pressing △or▽ key.

▼

ENT

▲

Press the Enter key to activate the parameter .

Press the Enter key to display the parameter setting.

Change the parameter setting to  (Automatic tuning

execution) by pressing △ key.



Press the Enter key to save the change. Then,  and

the set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

⇔

☆Cautions in setting the auto-tuning parameter

① Connect the motor before auto-tuning. Do not proceed to auto-tuning before the motor comes

to a full stop. If the auto-tuning function is activated immediately after stopping motor, it

sometimes fails to work normally because of a residual voltage.

② A voltage is applied to the motor during auto-tuning, though it is too low to rotate the motor.

③ Usually, auto-tuning terminates in some dozens of seconds. If an error occurs, however, the

inverter trips (display ) and no motor constant is set.

④ The auto-tuning is incapable of tuning special motors, such as high-speed or a high slip

motors. When using such a motor, set motor constants manually as described in Section 3.

⑤ If auto-tuning causes the inverter to trip easily because of an over-voltage  or an over-

current , change the setting of the load inertia moment parameter . Refer to the

Step 2 for the adjustment of .

⑥ When the inverter is used for a crane/hoist, equip it with a protective device (mechanical

brake, etc.) with a sufficient capacity. Failure to do so might cause the crane/hoist to loose

speed and fall because the motor cannot produce sufficiently large torque during auto-tuning.

⑦ When operating a motor in vector control mode, set the carrier frequency at 2.2 kHz

or over. Failure to do so might cause the vector control to be unstable.

⑧ If auto-tuning cannot be made successfully or an auto-tuning error () occurs, set

the motor constants manually as described in Selection 3 below.

★Notes about vector control: Refer to 5.10 9)

[Selection 3: Individually setting the vector control and the manual tuning]

If a tuning error  occurs during auto tuning or the sensorless vector control charact

eristic needs to be improved, you may set motor constants individually.

Adjustment range

Title

Function

Default setting

Number of motor poles

Rated capacity of motor

,,,,,,,

～[Model dependent] [kW]

: Toshiba standard motor #1 (*1)

: Toshiba VF motor







Model dependent

Motor type

: Toshiba V3 motor





: Toshiba standard motor #2 (*1)

: Other motors

(*1) Toshiba standard motor 1: World-energy series of totally-enclosed fan-cooled motors

Toshiba standard motor 2: World-energy 21 series of totally-enclosed fan-cooled motors

F-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 1: Setting the rating of the motor

Check the motor for use. (pole number, rating capacity, type)

Motor type: 

Number of motor poles: 

Adjustment range／

Adjustment range／,,,,,,,

: Toshiba standard motor #1

: Toshiba VF motor

: Toshiba V3 motor

: Toshiba standard motor #2

: Other motors

Rated capacity of motor: 

Adjustment range／～ [kW]

: Toshiba standard motor #1

: Toshiba VF motor

: Toshiba V3 motor

: Toshiba standard motor #2

Motor type: 

: Other motors

Other than 4P motor

Pole number: 

Is motor

capacity same with

4P motor

Yes

Inverter capacity?

Set  (Rated capacity)

Setting／～ [kW]

Set  (Rated capacity)

Set  (Motor type)

Setting／

Setting／～ [kW]

Setting／～

Set  (Motor type)

Set  (Auto-tuning)

Setting／

Setting／

End of tuning

Set  (Auto-tuning)

Setting／

Set  (Auto-tuning)

Setting／

In case desirable

property doesn't

appear.

Set  (Number of motor poles)

Setting／,,,,,,,

Tuning error ()

appeared

Give a Run command

→Panel displays ""

→Run (at least 30Hz)

Manual tuning

＜Caution＞

Set motor constant

parameters manually.

In case "" (Tuning error) is

displayed at the time of power

injection, set  at .

No trip

End of auto-tuning

⇒Refer to Step 2 in the

F-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Step 2: Setting motor constants

This section describes how to set motor constants. Select the items to be improved and change

the related motor constants.

①Slip frequency gain 

This parameter is to adjust the slippage of the motor.

Setting this parameter at a larger number can reduce the slippage of the motor. However,

setting it at an excessively large number may result in hunting, etc., and thus cause an

unstable operation.

③Motor constant #1  (Primary resistance) (Motor test reports may be useful.)

This parameter is to adjust the primary resistance of the motor.

Setting this parameter at a larger value can prevent the drop of the motor torque in low speed

ranges due to a voltage drop. However, setting it at an excessively large number may result in

large current in low speed range and appearance of overload trip, etc..

③Motor constant #2  (Secondary resistance)

This parameter is to adjust the secondary resistance of the motor.

The larger the set value, the more the slippage of the motor can be compensated.

④Motor constant #3  (Exciting inductance)

(A motor test record can be used for this setting.)

This parameter is to adjust the exciting inductance of the motor.

The larger the set value, the more the no-load current can be decreased.

⑤Motor constant #4  (Load inertia moment)

This parameter is to adjust the transient response of the motor.

Setting this parameter at a larger value can reduce overshooting on completion of

acceleration or deceleration. Set this parameter at a value, which matches to the effective

moment of inertial.

⑥Motor constant #5  (Leak inductance) (Motor test reports may be useful.)

This parameter is to adjust the leakage inductance of the motor.

The larger the set value, the larger torque the motor can be produced in high-speed ranges.

F-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Examples of setting auto-tuning

Here are setting examples for each of the selections 1, 2 and 3 described in 6.20.

a) Combination with a Toshiba standard motor (4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter)

Inverter

Motor

: VFA7 - 2037PL

: 3.7[kW], 4P, 60[Hz]

[Selection 1]

Set the automatic V/f mode setting parameter  at .

[Selection 2]

Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at  (Sensorless vector control).

[Selection 3]

Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at  (Sensorless vector control).

b) Combination with a Toshiba VF motor (4P motor with the same capacity as the inverter)

Inverter

Motor

: VFA7 - 2037PL

: 3.7[kW], 4P, 60[Hz]

[Selection 1]

Set the automatic V/f mode setting parameter  at .

[Selection 2]

1) Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at  (Sensorless vector control).

2) Set the auto-tuning  at .

[Selection 3]

1) Set the motor control mode selection parameter  at 3 (vector control).

2) Change the motor type  from  (Toshiba standard motor) to  (Toshiba VF motor).

(When using a Toshiba VF motor with a rated capacity smaller than that of the inverter,

properly change the setting of the motor rated capacity parameter .)

3) Set the auto-tuning  at .

c) Combination with a standard motor other than the above Toshiba motors

Inverter

Motor

: VFA7 - 2037PL

: 2.2[kW], 4P, 50[Hz]

[Selection 1]

Set the automatic V/f mode setting parameter  at .

[Selection 2]

1) Set the motor control mode selection  at  (Sensorless vector control).

2) Set the auto-tuning parameter  at .

[Selection 3]

1) Set the motor control mode selection  at  (Sensorless vector control).

2) Change the motor rated capacity parameter  from  to 

3) Set the motor type parameter  at  (default setting)

4) Set  at 

5) Set  at 

6) Set the motor pole number parameter  at 

7) Change the motor parameters (～, ), if needed.

F-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.21 Torque control

Refer to 5.11 for switch to Torque control

6.21.1 Torque reference

 ：Torque reference selection

 ：Torque reference mode selection

 ：VI/II reference point #1 rate

 ：VI/II reference point #2 rate

 ：RR reference point #1 rate

 ：RR reference point #2 rate

 ：RX reference point #1 rate

 ：RX reference point #2 rate

 ：BIN reference point #1 rate

 ：BIN reference point #2 rate

 ：VI/II reference point #1

 ：VI/II reference point #2

 ：RR reference point #1

 ：RR reference point #2

 ：RX reference point #1

 ：RX reference point #2

 ：BIN reference point #1

 ：BIN reference point #2

 ：Panel torque reference (Refer to 6.29.11 for details.)

・Function

Selecting a mode of torque command in torque control mode.

１）Current signal 4～20mAdc　⇒　II terminal

[Arbitrary setting]

[Default setting]

Motor torque [%]

 ＝100





 ＝0

4mA

20mA

 ＝20%

 ＝100%





・Torque produced: 0% at 4mAdc and 100%

★The relationship between the torque

command and the motor torque can be

changed. The  and  settings

0 and 100% correspond to currents of 0

and 20mAdc, respectively.

at 20mAdc.

２）Voltage signal 0～10Vdc　⇒　RR terminal

[Arbitrary setting]

[Default setting]

Motor torque [%]

 ＝100





 ＝0

10V

 ＝0%

 ＝100%





・Torque produced: 0% at 0Vdc and 100%

★The relationship between the torque

command and the motor torque can be

changed. The  and  settings

0 and 100% correspond to voltages of 0

and 10Vdc, respectively.

at 10Vdc.

F-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3) Voltage signal 0～±10Vdc　⇒　RX terminal

[Default setting]　　　　　　　　　　　　　

　[Arbitrary setting]

Motor torque [%]

 ＝+100





 ＝0

-10V

+10V





 ＝0%

 ＝100%

Torque reference

-100

・Motor torque: -100% at -10Vdc, 0% at 0Vdc and

★The relationship between the torque

command and the motor torque can be

changed. The  and  settings

0 and +/-20% correspond to voltages of

0 and +/-10Vdc, respectively.

+100% at +10Vdc.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: VI/II

: RR

: RX

: RX2(option)

Torque

: Panel input

reference

selection





: Binary / BCD input(option)

: Common serial communication option(FA30)

: Serial communication RS485(FA32)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA33)

Note1) Selecting 5 (Panel input) activates the control panel torque reference .

Note2) Use 2 phases input type sensor when torque control is operated by vector control

with a sensor.

Note3) For sensorless vector control, “forward power running ⇔ reverse regeneration”

and “forward regeneration ⇔ reverse power running“ cannot be operated.

Use vector control with a sensor (2 phases) for these uses.

6.21.2 Torque reference filter

 ：Torque reference filter

・Function

When a motor drives a load with large inertia or when the gain cannot be increased

because the machine is not rigid enough to allow it, the motor sometimes vibrates. In

such cases, this filter is used to reduce the vibration. The smaller the set value, the

larger effect the filter can exert. (The response of the motor decreases to reduce the

vibration.)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～,

(without filter)

Default setting



(without filter)

Torque reference filter



F-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.21.3 Speed limits in torque control mode

 ：Forward speed limit input selection

 ：Forward speed limit input level

 ：Reverse speed limit input selection

 ：Reverse speed limit input level

 ：Speed limit (torque=0) reference

 ：Speed limit (torque=0) value

 ：Speed limit (torque=0) band

 ：Speed limit (torque=0) recovery time

・Function

The function is to limit the rise in the output frequency of the inverter due to a drop

of the load torque during operation in torque control mode. These functions are usef

ul for protecting a machine.

Reference torque set by a potentiometer

Torque

command

Load

torque

Forward speed

limit level

Speed

Coast stop

Reverse speed

The speed varies according with the load torque.

limit level

■Setting with the control panel

Forward speed limit

input level 

Speed

Coast stop

Reverse speed limit

input level



The speed varies according with the load torque.

[Setting of forward speed limit level]

(Forward speed limit input selection)

(Forward speed limit input level)

[Setting of reverse speed limit level]

(Reverse speed limit input selection)

(Reverse speed limit input level)

:(Parameter )

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

:(Parameter )

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

F-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Setting by means of external signals

The speed limits can be changed arbitrarily by setting external signals.

[Selection of external signals]

, 

RR-CC ―― 0～10V　　　　　　　

RX-CC ―― 0～±10V　　　　　　

VI-CC ―― 0～10V　　　　　　　

voltage signals

current signals

II-CC ―― 4(0)～20mA　　　 

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Invalid

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

: RX(voltage input)

: RX2(voltage input)(optional)

:  enabled

Forward speed limit input

selection











～ [Hz]

Forward speed limit input level





: Disabled

: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

: RR (volume/voltage input)

: RX(voltage input)

: RX2 (voltage input)(optional)

:  enabled

Reverse speed limit input

selection

～ [Hz]

Reverse speed limit input level



[Speed limit with the center value specified by a reference]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

:Invalid, :VI/II, :RR, :RX,

:RX2(optional), : 

～ [Hz]

Speed limit (torque=0) reference





Speed limit (torque=0) value

Speed limit (torque=0) band









～ [Hz]

～

Speed limit (torque=0) recovery time



Maximum-speed limit

①：Speed limit center reference value

Speed limit

②：Speed limit range

Speed ref.

6.21.4 Torque bias and load sharing gain

 ：Selection of synchronized torque bias input

 ：Selection of tension torque bias input

 ：Load sharing gain input selection

1) Selection of synchronized torque bias input

Synchronized torque bias

＋

Speed control

Torque control

＋

F-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Parameter]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Invalid

: VI/II

: RR

: RX

Selection of synchronized : RX2 (optional)





: Panel input ( is enabled)

torque bias input

: Binary / BCD input (optional)

: Common serial communication option(FA30)

: Serial communication RS485(FA32)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA33)

Panel torque revised bias

input

～ [%]





Reverse

For a crane/hoist, an elevator

application, as lifted up and down at

controlled speeds, its direction of

rotation is frequently reversed. In such

cases, the load can be started

Forward

smoothly, by adding load torque into

the torque reference equivalent to the

additional torque, when starting

Tension torque bias

as additional torque

acceleration after releasing the brake.

Additional torque

(fixed direction)

[Selection of external signals]



RR-CC ―― 0～10V

(0～250%)







RX-CC ―― 0～±10V

(-250～250%)

(0～250%)

voltage signals

current signals

VI-CC ―― 0～10V

II-CC

―― 4(0)～20mA (0～250%)

2) Selection of tension torque bias input and load sharing gain input

Load sharing gain

＋

Torque reference

Internal torque ref.

＋

Tension torque bias

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Invalid

: VI/II

: RR

: RX

: RX2 (optional)

Selection of





: Panel input ( is enabled)

: Binary / BCD input (optional)

: Common serial communication option(FA30)

: Serial communication RS485(FA32)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA33)

tension torque bias input

 Panel tension torque bias ～ [%]

: Invalid

: VI/II

: RR

: RX

: RX2 (optional)

: Panel input ( is enabled)

: Binary / BCD input (optional)

Load sharing gain input

selection





: Common serial communication option(FA30)

: Serial communication RS485(FA32)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA33)

 Panel load sharing gain

～ [%]



F-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

, 

RR-CC ―― 0～10V

RX-CC ―― 0～±10V

VI-CC ―― 0～10V

(0～250%)



voltage signals

(-250～250%)

(0～250%)





current signals

II-CC

―― 4(0)～20mA (0～250%)

6.22 Torque limit

 ：Selection of power running torque limit #1

 ：Power running torque limit #1

 ：Selection of regenerative torque limit #1

 ：Regenerative torque limit #1

 ：Power running torque limit #2

 ：Regenerative torque limit #2

 ：Power running torque limit #3

 ：Regenerative torque limit #3

 ：Power running torque limit #4

 ：Regenerative torque limit #4

 ：Torque limit mode (polarity)

・Function

The function is to decrease or increase the output frequency according to the load

ing condition when the motor torque reaches the limit level.

Setting a torque limit parameter at 250.0 means "Invalid".

Note) Decreases of the output frequency are not limited by (Lower limit frequency), and

decrease up to (Stop frequency)+0.1Hz.

■Setting

(1) Power running /regenerative torque limit

First, you need to set the polarity of each torque limit. Set  at .

Title

Function

Torque limit

mode (polarity)

Adjustment range

: Power running/regenerative torque limit

: Positive/negative torque limit

Setting value





a）limiting the torque with internal parameters (or on communication mode)

＋250% torque





Power running

Regenerative

Reverse

Forward

Regenerative

Power running





－250% torque

Torque limits can be set with the parameters  and .

[Setting of power running torque]

(Selection of power running torque limit #1) :Set at (  )

(Power running torque limit #1

)

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

[Setting of regenerative torque]

(Selection of regenerative torque limit #1

(Regenerative torque limit #1

)

:Set at (  )

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

)

F-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting



: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

～[%], : Invalid

: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

Selection of power running

torque limit #1









Power running torque limit #1





Selection of regenerative

torque limit #1

～[%], : Invalid

Regenerative torque limit #1



With these parameters, you can set 4 patterns of positive torque limits and 4 patterns of

negative torque limits. Refer to 7.2 for the setting for switching from the terminal board.

Power running torque limit #1－　　　Regenerative torque limit #1－

Power running torque limit #2－　　　Regenerative torque limit #2－

Power running torque limit #3－　　　Regenerative torque limit #3－

Power running torque limit #4－　　　Regenerative torque limit #4－

Note) If the value set with  (stall prevention level) is smaller than the torque limit, then the value set

with  acts as the torque limit.

b) Limiting the torque with external signals

＋250% torque

Power running

Regenerative

Reverse

Forward

Regenerative

Power running

－250% torque

The torque limits can be changed arbitrarily by means of external signals.

[External signals]

, 

RR-CC ――0～10V

RX-CC ――0～±10V

VI-CC ――0～10V







Voltage signals

Current signals

II-CC

――4(0)～20mA

F-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RX-CC

RR-CC，VI-CC

Motor torque [%]

100

-10V

10V

+10V

II-CC

Motor torque [%]

-100

100

4mA

20mA

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

Selection of power running

torque limit #1







Selection of regenerative

torque limit #1



The torque limit function is active in vector control mode. In V/f constant control mode, square

reduction control mode, and V/f 5-point setting mode, the torque limit function plays the same

role as the stall preventive function (6.25.2).

In torque control mode, the values set with these parameters limit torque command values.

(2) Positive/negative torque limits

First, you need to set the polarity of each torque limit. Set  at .

Title

Function

Torque limit

mode (polarity)

Adjustment range

Setting value

: Power running/regenerative torque limit

: Positive/negative torque limit





a) Limiting the torque with parameters

Positive

 : Power running torque limit #1

Regenerative Power running

Reverse

Forward

Power running Regenerative

 : Regenerative torque limit #1

Negative

F-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Torque limits can be set with the parameters  and .

[Positive torque limit]

(Selection of power running torque limit #1) :Set at (  )

(Power running torque limit #1

)

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

[Negative torque limit]

(Selection of regenerative torque limit #1

)

:Set at (  )

(Regenerative torque limit #1)

:Set a desirable torque limit level.

■Parameter setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting



: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

～[%], : Invalid

: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume/ voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

Selection of power running

torque limit #1









Power running torque limit #1





Selection of regenerative

torque limit #1

～[%], : invalid

Regenerative torque limit #1



With these parameters, you can set 4 patterns of positive torque limits and 4 patterns of

negative torque limits. Refer to 7.2 for the setting for switching from the terminal board.

Power running torque limit #1－　　　Regenerative torque limit #1－

Power running torque limit #2－　　　Regenerative torque limit #2－

Power running torque limit #3－　　　Regenerative torque limit #3－

Power running torque limit #4－　　　Regenerative torque limit #4－

Note) If the value set with  (stall prevention level) is smaller than the torque limit, then

the value set with  acts as the torque limit.

b) Limiting the torque with external signals

Positive

Regenerative Power running

Reverse

Forward

Power running Regenerative

Negative

The torque limits can be changed arbitrarily by means of external signals.

F-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Selection of external signals]

Voltage signals

, 

RR-CC ――0～10V

RX-CC ――0～±10V

VI-CC ――0～10V







Current signals

RX-CC

II-CC

――4(0)～20mA

RR-CC，VI-CC

Motor torque [%]

100

Motor torque [%]

100

-10V

10V

+10V

II-CC

Motor torque [%]

-100

100

4mA

20mA

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

Selection of power running

torque limit #1





: VI(voltage) / II(current)

: RR(volume / voltage)

: RX(voltage)

: RX2(voltage)(optional)

: 

Selection of regenerative

torque limit #1





The torque limit function is active in vector control mode. In V/f constant control mode, square

reduction control mode, and V/f 5-point setting mode, the torque limit function plays the same

role as the stall preventive function (6.25.2).

In torque control mode, the values set with these parameters limit torque command values.

F-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.23 Secondary acceleration/deceleration

6.23.1 Acceleration and deceleration patterns

 ：Acceleration/deceleration pattern #1

 ：S-pattern lower limit adjustment amount

 ：S-pattern upper limit adjustment amount

・Function

These parameters are used to select an acceleration pattern and a deceleration pattern.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

:Linear,:S-pattern #1,

:S-pattern #2

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #1





S-pattern lower limit adjustment

amount

S-pattern upper limit adjustment

amount

～ [%]

[Hz]







１）Linear acceleration and deceleration

Typical pattern of acceleration and

deceleration. This pattern is used in

most cases.

Max. freq. 

０

[s]

 



[Hz]

2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration #1

This pattern is used in cases where

a motor needs to be speeded up to

or slowed down from a high-speed

range of over 60 Hz in a short time

or where there is a need to absorb

shocks at the start of acceleration

and deceleration. This pattern of

acceleration and deceleration is

Max. freq. 

Setting freq.

[s]

 × 

 × 



suitable for the operation of

transportation and lifting equipment.

Effective acceleration time

[Hz]

3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration #2

In this pattern, the motor speeds up

slowly in weak-field areas where it

produces relatively small torque.

This pattern of acceleration and

deceleration is suitable for the

Max. freq. 

Setting freq.

Base freq.

operation of high-speed spindles, etc.

０

[s]



Effective acceleration time

F-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.23.2 Switching of acceleration/deceleration #1, 2, 3 and 4

 ：Acceleration time #2

 ：Deceleration time #2

 ：Acc/dec #1,2,3,4 selection

 ：Acceleration time #4

 ：Deceleration time #4

 ：Acc/dec switching frequency #3

 ：Acc/dec switching frequency #1  ：Acc/dec pattern #2

 ：Acceleration time #3

 ：Acc/dec pattern #3

 ：Deceleration time #3

 ：Acc/dec pattern #4

 ：Acc/dec switching frequency #2

・Function

With these parameters, you can set 4 acceleration and deceleration times. Acceleration

and deceleration times can be selected or switched by any of the following 3 method:

1) Selection with parameters

2) Switching by means of frequencies

3) Switching with terminals

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Model dependent

()～ [s]

: Acc/dec #1, : Acc/dec #2,

: Acc/dec #3, : Acc/dec #4

()～ [s]

Acceleration time #2

Deceleration time #2

Acc/dec time #1, 2, 3, 4

selection

Acceleration time #3

Deceleration time #3

Acceleration time #4









Model dependent









()～ [s]

Deceleration time #4

１) Selection with parameters

Output frequency [Hz]



０

＝





time [s]

＝









＝





＝

The acceleration/deceleration time selection parameter has been set at 1 by default. The setting

of  can be changed from  to ,  or . (The setting of  is valid when  is

set at 1.)

F-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) Switching by frequencies - Automatically switching acc/dec times at certain frequencies

Title

Function

Adjustment range Default setting

～ [Hz]

Acceleration/deceleration switching frequency #1

Acceleration/deceleration switching frequency #2

Acceleration/deceleration switching frequency #3









Note) Regardless of the sequence of input of frequencies, acc/dec times are switched from #1 to #2 at the

lowest frequency, from #2 to #3 at the middle frequency and from #3 to #4 at the highest frequency.

(For example, if the frequency set with  is higher than that set with , the acc/dec time #1

is selected in the frequency range below the -set frequency, while the acc/dec time #2 is

selected in the frequency range of the -set frequency to the -set frequency.)

Output freq. [Hz]

Setting freq.







time [s]

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑧

①

　①Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑤Deceleration at the gradient of 

　②Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑥Deceleration at the gradient of 

　③Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑦Deceleration at the gradient of 

　④Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑧Deceleration at the gradient of 

3) Switching with terminals - Switching acc/dec times by means of external terminals

Output frequency [Hz]

time [s]

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

⑦

⑧

①

Acc/dec switching #1

Acc/dec switching #2

　①Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑤Deceleration at the gradient of 

　②Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑥Deceleration at the gradient of 

　③Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑦Deceleration at the gradient of 

　④Acceleration at the gradient of  ⑧Deceleration at the gradient of 

F-52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Parameter setting

a) Operation mode: Terminal board operation

Set the operation command mode selection  at .

b) Switching terminals: S3 and S4(Other terminals also can be settled for this purpose.)

S3：Acceleration/deceleration switching #1

S4：Acceleration/deceleration switching #2

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～

Default setting

Input terminal selection #7 (S3)

Input terminal selection #8 (S4)

(Acc/dec switching #1)

(Acc/dec switching #2)





～

■Acceleration/deceleration patterns

Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected individually for each of the acceleration/

deceleration times #1, 2, 3 and 4.

1) Linear acceleration/deceleration

2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration #1

3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration #2

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Acceleration/deceleration

pattern #1

: Linear, : S-pattern #1,

: S-pattern #2





Acceleration/deceleration

pattern #2

Acceleration/deceleration

pattern #3

Acceleration/deceleration

pattern #4

: Linear, : S-pattern #1,

: S-pattern #2

: Linear, : S-pattern #1,

: S-pattern #2

: Linear, : S-pattern #1,

: S-pattern #2









★Refer to 6.23.1 for an explanation of the acceleration/deceleration patterns.

★The settings of the S-pattern lower limit adjustment amount  and the S-pattern upper

limit adjustment amount  are reflected in every acceleration/deceleration pattern.

6.23.3 Minimum acceleration/deceleration times

 ：Acceleration/deceleration lower limit

・Function

This parameter sets the minimum acceleration and deceleration times.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Acceleration/deceleration time lower limit ～ [s]





Note) To set the minimum acceleration or deceleration time to less than 0.1 second, set

(Decimal place number of acc/dec time) at (0.01 second) in advance so that

the time can be displayed in units of 0.01 second.

Refer to 6.29.4 for the parameter (Decimal place number of acc/dec time).

F-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.24 Pattern run

 ：Pattern run selection

 ：Pattern run mode

 ,  ,  ,  ：Cycle number of pattern group #1 to #4

 ～  ：Pattern group #1 selection #1～#8

 ～  ：Pattern group #2 selection #1～#8

 ～  ：Pattern group #3 selection #1～#8

 ～  ：Pattern group #4 selection #1～#8

 ～  ：Preset-speed #1～#15 operation continuation mode

 ～  ：Preset-speed #1 to #15 operation time

・Function

These parameters enable you to form up to 60 patterns of automatic operation by variously

combining operation frequencies, operation times and acceleration/deceleration times.

1) Start-up by control panel operation(＝) : up to 15 patterns

2) Start-up by terminal board operation(＝): up to 60 patterns (15 types x 4 patterns)

　Note) When control is exercised by the operation panel, pattern group #1 is always selected. If you

want to operate in a pattern other than pattern group #1, select pattern group #1, #2, #3 or #4 ,

using input terminal selection parameters (～).

[Parameter setting]

Default

setting

Title





Function

Adjustment range

: Disabled, : Enabled

Pattern run

selection



: Patterned operation canceled during stop

: Patterned operation continued during stop

Pattern run mode





Cycle number of

pattern group #1

Pattern group #1





～ selection #1～#8

～, : ∞

: Skip,  to 

1～, : ∞

: Skip,  to 

1～, : ∞

: Skip,  to 

1～, : ∞

: Skip,  to 

～



Cycle number of

pattern group #2

Pattern group #2





～ selection #1～#8

～,



Cycle number of

pattern group #3

Pattern group #3





～





～ selection #1～#8

Cycle number of

pattern group #4

Pattern group #4





～ selection #1～#8

～,



: Operation time in second after start of operation

: Operation time in minute after start of operation

: Operation time in second after attainment of frequency

: Operation time in minute after attainment of frequency

: Infinite (continued until stop command is entered)

: Continue until next step command

Preset-speed

#1～#15

operation

continuation



～



mode

Preset-speed



～ [s]/[min]

(The unit depends on )

#1～#15



～

operation time

＊Forward/reverse, Acc/Dec time #1/#2, V/f control mode #1/#2 can be set with ～

(Preset-speed operation frequency #1 to #15 control modes). Refer to 5.14 for details.

Note) When the function of auto-restart is active, the time spent for speed search is added to the operation

time set for pattern operation. Consequently, the effective operation time sometimes becomes

shorter than the settled operation time.

F-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

＜Basic operating＞

Step Setting

Parameter

Set the pattern run selection parameter at

 (Enabled).

＝ (Disabled),

 (Enabled)

Change all frequencies required to preset-

speed frequencies.

～(Preset-speed #1 to #7)

～(Preset-speed #8 to #15)

(Preset-speed operation mode)

～(Preset-speed #1 to #15 control

mode)

Set the required operation time at each of

the set operation frequencies.

～(Preset-speed #1 to #15

operation continuation mode)

～(Preset-speed #1 to #15

operation time)

Set the sequence of each speed

This sequence following three methods.

①Select a run/stop operation from the

pattern run mode

＝(Patterned operation canceled during stop

※Pattern run is reset by stop/switching

operation before operating restarts.

)

　　 (Patterned operation continued during stop

※Pattern run is started by stop/switching

operation. The system stops temporarily on

completion of every routine, then proceeds to

the next routine.

)

②Select a pattern group, and then set the

(Cycle number of pattern group #1)

sequence of each speed

～(Pattern group #1 selection #1 to #8

(Cycle number of pattern group #2)

～(Pattern group #2 selection #1 to #8

(Cycle number of pattern group #3)

～(Pattern group #3 selection #1 to #8

(Cycle number of pattern group #4)

～(Pattern group #4 selection #1 to #8

～

)

③According to the required parameter

group, select pattern group #1, #2, #3 or

#4 from input terminal selection  to

. If you set ～ at  at

item 3 above, select step trigger signals

from ～. Selecting pattern

run continuation signals makes it possible

to select a start/stop method.

＝ , (Pattern group #1)

, (Pattern group #2)

, (Pattern group #3)

, (Pattern group #4)

, (Pattern run continuation signal)

, (Pattern run trigger signal)

Monitor displayed during pattern run

During pattern operation, the following run information is displayed before the normal display.

Condition

Display



Meaning

(A): Number or the pattern group

Pattern group and pattern

(A)(B) (B): Number of the pattern

Means that the current pattern operation is to

be repeated (ex. 123 times).

Frequency reference with preset-speed #1

data.

Number of repetitions

Preset operation speed









Current pattern is finished in 1234 seconds.

Operation time is set for infinity or the system

is waiting for the next step command.

Remaining time of the

current pattern operation

■Pattern run switching output (output terminal function : 36, 37)

If the pattern run switching output function is selected (activated), a signal is put out on

completion of all the predetermined patterns of operation. When there is no operation

command left to be entered or the pattern operation selection signal changes, the output

terminals are turned off(in case of a-contact).

Terminal

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

(pattern run switching output: a-contact）

Output terminal

selection #1

～

OUT1



(pattern run switching output: b-contact）

Note) To put out the signals to the terminal OUT2, select the parameter 

F-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

～(Preset-speed #1 to #15 operation continuation mode)

= (Infinite(continued until stop command is entered))

Output frequency [Hz]

Setting frequency

 ＝

 ＝

[s]

OFF

F-CC

～(Preset-speed #1 to #15 operation continuation mode)

=  (Continue until next step command)

Output frequency [Hz]

Setting frequency

[s]

OFF

Step trigger signal

★Set the input terminal selection ～ at  (or ): pattern run trigger signal.

Notes)

・

Pattern operation groups should be selected by terminal input.

・

When the operation command mode selection is set for panel operation, pattern group #1 is always

selected.(If you need a pattern other than pattern group #1, set input terminal selection (

～

) at  to , and operate with the terminal input.)

・

If no signal is put out from any pattern run signal (all terminals are turned off), or after the

pattern run is completed, the system returns to the normal operation mode

・

When two or more pattern group numbers are entered simultaneously, the pattern group operations

are performed in ascending order and automatically switched to one another. In this case, it may

take about 0.06 seconds to search for each pattern.

･ 10 milliseconds after a pattern operation group selection #1, 2, 3 or 4 is activated, turn on the

operation signal (F-CC). Within 10 [ms] or less, a signal for ordinary operation may be put out.

　①　：select pattern group #1

Pattern run operation

　②　：select pattern group #2

　③　：select pattern group #3

　④　：select pattern group #4

①

③

①

②

③

④

Pattern group #1(S1-CC)

Pattern group #2(S2-CC)

Pattern group #3(S3-CC)

Pattern group #4(S4-CC)

Parameter setting>

=(Pattern group #1)

=(Pattern group #2)

=(Pattern group #3)

=(Pattern group #4)

F-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.25 Protection functions

6.25.1 Motor over road protection－level adjust / motor types

 ：Motor over road protection level #1

 ：Overload reduction start-up frequency

＊Refer to 5.13 for details.

6.25.2 Setting of current stall

 ：Stall prevention level

Warning

・Do not set the stall prevention level() at a extremely small value.

If the stall prevention level() was set at a value that is near the motor's no

load current or less, stall prevention function would work and output frequency would

rise. In ordinary usage, do not set the stall prevention level at 30% or less.

Mandatory

・Function

If the output current exceeds that set with , the stall protective function is a

ctivated to reduce the output frequency.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Stall prevention level

Adjustment range

Default setting

～ [%], : Disabled





[Display during the alarm ]

When  is displayed (when the output current is on the point of exceeding ), the ou

tput frequency displayed changes and a "" is displayed on the left side of the frequency.



　　　　Example of display　

Note) In V/f constant control mode, the torque limits #1, #2, #3 and #4 can be used as a stall prevention.

You can make various settings by combining these functions with the V/f1, 2, 3 and 4 functions.

6.25.3 Inverter trip holding

 ：Selection of inverter trip holding

・Function

The function is to hold inverter's trip records. If this function is active, trip records

are retained and can be displayed even after the inverter is reset.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Cleared if power is turned off

: Hold even if power is turned off

 Selection of inverter trip holding



★

The last 4 trip records can be held and displayed in status monitor mode.

Trip data (current, voltage, etc. at the time of a trip) can be displayed in status monit

or mode when the inverter trips, but is cleared if the power is turned off.

★

Ready for

normal operation

Panel (terminal) reset

Reset holding FL

Inverter trip

Turn on power again

Fault display

FL not active

Trip again

Fault display

FL active

Power source reset

If the cause of tripping or that of another failure

is not yet removed.

F-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.25.4 Emergency stop

 ：Emergency stop

 ：Emergency DC injection braking control time

・Function

Emergency stop mode of can be selected. At emergency stop, a trip message ("") is displayed.

Note) When setting  at  or (Emergency DC injection braking stop), you need to set also the

parameters (DC injection braking current) and (Emergency DC injection braking

control time).

1) Emergency stop by terminal operation

Emergency stop can be performed with the a or b-contact. Assign the emergency stop function

to a terminal as described below, and select a stop mode.

Input

a-contact

b-contact

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Coast stop

: Deceleration stop

: Emergency DC injection braking stop

: Coast stop without FL output

: Deceleration stop without FL output

: Emergency DC injection braking

without FL output

 Emergency stop



Emergency DC injection braking

control time



～ [s]



 DC injection braking current ～ [%]



(Example of assignment) Assigning the emergency stop function to the terminal S4

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

Input terminal selection #8　(S4) ～

(emergency stop)



Note 1) An emergency stop can be carried out from the terminal even in panel operation mode. In this case,

however, holding down the Stop key for more than 5 seconds causes the inverter trip (

)

even when  is set at ,  or .

Note 2) If DC injection braking is not needed for normal stops, though  is set at  or  (emergency

DC injection braking), then set the DC braking time  at  [s].

2) Emergency stop by panel operation

Emergency stop can be performed with the control panel, in other operation command mode.

Press twice the STOP key on the control panel.

① Press the STOP key ―――――“” starts blinking.

② Press the STOP key again ―― Emergency stop

　　　 Then, "" is displayed, and also a fault detection signal (FL) is put out at

 =,  or , while the FL is not active if  is set at 3, 4 or 5.

6.25.5 Overload reduction start-up frequency

 ：Overload reduction start-up frequency

Refer to 5.13 for details.

6.25.6 Motor's 150%-overload time limit

 ：Motor 150%-overload time limit

Refer to 5.13 for details.

F-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.25.7 Action at low currents

 ：Low-current trip

 ：Low-current detection level

 ：Low-current detection time

・Function

If the current is lower than  level and passes for a time longer than , the

inverter trips. When  is set at (tripping disabled), it is necessary to set, with

, the time elapsed before the inverter trips after the detection of a small current.

＝：Disabled・・・・・not trip(FL is not active)

　　　　　　　　Low-current alarm can be output by output terminal selection.

＝：Enabled・・・・・The inverter trips if low-current passes during operation for

the time set with  or over.(FL is active)

Title

Function

Low-current trip

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Disabled, : Enabled

～ [%]









Low-current detection level

Low-current detection time

～ [s]

6.25.8 Detection of output phase failure

 ：Detection of output short-circuit during start-up

 ：Adjustment of detection pulse for output short-circuit during start-up

・Function

The function is to detect short circuits with inverter's output terminals.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Standard

: Only one time at power injection or at

Detection of output short-

circuit during start-up





first start after reset

Adjustment of detection pulse

for output short-circuit during

start-up



～ [μs]



　・・・　: Standard―――detecting at starting

： A check is made once at the first start of operation after the power is turned on or

the inverter is reset.

　・・・　Set the pulse length for the detection of short circuits.

Note) Shorten the pulse length if the motor trips in error (OCL) at start-up, especially a high-speed motor.

6.25.9 Over-torque trip

 ：Over-torque trip

 ：Over-torque detection level during power running

 ：Over-torque detection level during regeneration

 ：Over-torque detection time

・Function

If a torque current exceeding the current set with ,  is detected, the inverter

trips and the trip message “” is displayed.

F-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

＝(Disabled)・・・・does not trip (FL is not active).

＝(Enabled)・・・・The inverter trips if a torque larger than (during power

running) or (during regeneration) passes for a time

longer than the time set with .

Function

Title

Adjustment range Default setting

: Disabled



Over-torque trip



: Enabled

～ [%]

～ [s]

Over-torque detection level during power running

Over-torque detection level during regeneration

Over-torque detection time











6.25.10 Cooling fan control mode selection

 ：Cooling fan control mode

・Function

With this parameter, you can set the condition of cooling fan so that it operates only when

the inverter requires cooling, and thus it can be used for a longer period of.

＝：Automatic control of cooling fan, enabled. Operates only when the inverter is in

operation.

＝：Automatic control of cooling fan, disabled. The cooling fan always operates

when the inverter is energized.

　　☆The cooling fan automatically operates whenever the ambient temperature is

high, even when the inverter is out of operation.

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Automatic

: Always ON

Default setting

Cooling fan control mode





6.25.11 Cumulative operation time alarm

 ：Cumulative operation time alarm setting

・Function

This parameter is to make a setting so that the inverter puts out a signal when it

s cumulative operation time has reached the time set with this parameter.

＊Panel display of  corresponds to 10 hours. If  is displayed, the cumulative operation time

is 3855 hours.

Function

Title

Adjustment range

Default setting

～

Cumulative operation time

alarm setting





[×100h]

■Output terminal setting

Ex.) Assigning the cumulative operation time alarm function to the terminal OUT2

Function

Title

Adjustment range

～

Setting value

Output terminal selection#2 (OUT2)





F-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.25.12 Over-voltage stall protection level

 ：Over-voltage stall protection level(high response)

 ：Over-voltage stall protection level

　　　　＊Refer to 6.13.5 for details.

6.25.13 Under-voltage trip

 ：Under-voltage trip mode

 ：Under-voltage detection time

・Function

This parameter is to select the action when detecting an under-voltage. (Invalid, while the

inverter stops.) If  is set at (Enabled), it is necessary to set, with , the time

elapsed before the inverter trips after the detection of an under-voltage.

＝：Disabled・・・・Inverter stops, but does not trip.(FL is not active)

＝：Enabled・・・・The inverter trips if an under-voltage passes for the time

set with  or over. (FL is active)

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Disabled, : Enabled

～ [s]

Default setting

 Under-voltage trip mode

 Under-voltage detection time





6.25.14 UV stall level

 ：Under-voltage stall level

・Function

This parameter is used to set the operation level of the regenerative power

ride-through control and the deceleration stop. (Refer to 6.13.2)

Function

Title

Adjustment range

～ [%]

Default setting

Under-voltage stall level





6.25.15 System-supporting sequence (B-timer)

 ：System-supporting sequence (B-timer)

・Function

This parameter is used to set the waiting time for answer from system(Input terminal function

setting: System-supporting sequence (BA:,) ). After start of operation, if no answer

is received in set time(), the inverter trips().

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

～ [s]

Default setting

 System-supporting sequence (B-timer)



F-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.26 Special analog input

 ：Acceleration/deceleration base frequency adjustment

 ：Upper-limit frequency adjustment

 ：Acceleration time adjustment

 ：Deceleration time adjustment

 ：Manual torque boost adjustment

・Function

The function is to make it possible to change the fixed settings of some paramete

rs by means of external analog signals.

1) Acceleration/deceleration base frequency adjustment

If this parameter is so set, The signal from the terminal VI, II or RR can be used as data for the

adjustment of acceleration/deceleration time reference frequencies. This function is useful for

performing proportional operation. Frequency adjustment range: 30 to 400 Hz.

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

: VI/II

Default setting

Acceleration/deceleration base

frequency adjustment





: RR

2) Upper-limit frequency adjustment

The signal from VI, II or RR can be used as the upper limit frequency.

Adjustment range: 0～(The frequency cannot be set above the upper-limit frequency ().)

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

Default setting

Upper-limit frequency adjustment

: VI/II

: RR





3) Acceleration time adjustment

Using reference input from VI, II or RR, acceleration time set with the parameter 

(or acceleration time #2, #3 or #4) can be multiplied the by factors of 1.0 to 10.0 .

10% of reference input act as multiply factor of 1.0 .

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

Default setting

Acceleration time adjustment

: VI/II





: RR

4) Deceleration time adjustment

Using reference input from VI, II or RR, deceleration time set with the parameter 

(or deceleration time #2, #3 or #4) can be multiplied the by factors of 1.0 to 10.0 .

10% of reference input act as multiply factor of 1.0 .

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

Default setting

Deceleration time adjustment

: VI/II

: RR





5) Manual torque boost adjustment

Using reference input from VI, II or RR, manual torque boost set with the parameter 

(or ,  or ) can be multiplied the by factors of 0.0 to 2.5 .

Function

Title

Adjustment range

: Invalid

Default setting

Manual torque boost adjustment

: VI/II

: RR





F-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.27 Over-ride

 ：Over-ride addition input selection

 ：Over-ride multiplication input selection

・Function

These parameters are used to adjust reference frequencies by means of external

Function

Title

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Disabled

: VI(voltage input) / II(current input)

: RR(volume / voltage input)

: RX(voltage input)

Over-ride

: RX2(voltage input)(optional)

addition input : Operating panel input





selection

[Hz]

: Binary/BCD input(optional)

: Common serial communication option(FA01)

: Serial communication RS485(FA05)

: Communication add-on cassette option(FA07)

: Up/down frequency

: Pulse input #1(optional)

: Disabled

: VI(voltage input) / II(current input)

: RR(volume / voltage input)

: RX(voltage input)

Over-ride

multiplication

input

selection

[%]





: RX2(voltage input)(optional)

: 

The override functions calculate output frequency by the following expression:

 [%]

　Output frequency ×（1＋　　　　　　　　　　　　）＋  [Hz]

100

1) Additive over-ride

In this mode, an externally input over-ride frequency is added to reference frequency.

[Ex1: RR(reference), VI(over-ride frequency)]

[Ex2: RX(reference), VI(over-ride frequency)]

Output frequency [Hz]

Over-ridden frequency

Over-ridden

frequency

Forward



RR input

(reference)

( )

RR input

Over-ride

(VI input)

(reference)

( )

Over-ride

(VI input)

10V

Reverse

F-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ex1:

＝(VI input), ＝(disabled)

Output frequency = Reference + Over-ride (VI input [Hz])

Ex2:

＝(VI input), ＝(disabled)

Output frequency = Reference + Over-ride(VI input [Hz])

2) Multiplicative over-ride

In this mode, each output frequency is multiplied by an externally override frequency.

[Ex1: RR(reference), VI(over-ride frequency)]　 [Ex2: RX(reference), VI(over-ride frequency)]

Output frequency[Hz]

Over-ridden frequency

Output frequency [Hz]



Over-ridden frequency



Forward

((^Rre^Rfeⁱrⁿe^pn^uc^te)

)

10V

RR input

(reference)

( )

10V

Reverse

Ex1:



RR input(

VI input(

Note) Setting of RR input: Refer to 7.3.1, Setting of VI input: Refer to 7.3.2



(Disabled), 







(VI input), 

  

  



(RR input), 

 



=, =



)

=

)

Output frequency = Reference × {1 + Over-ride(VI input [%] / 100)}

Ex2:



RX input(

VI input(

Note) Setting of RX input: Refer to 7.3.1, Setting of VI input: Refer to 7.3.2



(Disabled), 







(VI input), 

  

  



(RX input), 

 



=, =



)

=

)

Output frequency = Reference × {1 + Over-ride(VI input [%] / 100)}

Ex3:

Title

Function

Panel over-ride multiplication

gain

Adjustment range

～ [%]

Default setting





Output frequency = Reference × {1 + Over-ride( [%] / 100)}

F-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.28 Meter output

6.28.1 Setting of meter outputs

 ：AM terminal meter selection

 ：AM terminal meter adjustment

Refer to 5.4 for details.

6.28.2 Setting of optional meter outputs

 ：Optional analog terminal #1 meter selection

 ：Optional analog terminal #1 meter adjustment

 ：Optional analog terminal #2 meter selection

 ：Optional analog terminal #2 meter adjustment

 ：Optional analog terminal #1 meter offset

 ：Optional analog terminal #2 meter offset

 ：Optional analog terminal #2 sign selection

6.28.3 Pulse output to meters

・Function

These parameters are used

to set the pulse output

function and the number of

pulses output from the output

terminal FP.

 ：FP terminal meter selection

 ：FP terminal meter adjustment

The function set with  is output from FP terminal.

Set a desired number of output pulses as  with

reference to the following table. Refer to 5.4 about adjustment level.

Ex.)Output Running frequency(0～80Hz) at 0～10kHz

Setting: =, =, =

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Running frequency

1: Frequency command

2: Current

3: DC voltage

Adjustment level Default setting

(a)

(b)

(a)

(b)

(a)

(c)

4: Output voltage

5: After-compensation frequency

6: Speed feedback (real-time value)

7: Speed feedback (1 second filter)

8: Torque

9: Torque reference

10: Internal torque reference (*1)

11: Torque current

12: Exciting current

13: PID feedback value

14: Motor overload factor (OL2 data)

15: Inverter overload factor (OL1 data)

16: PBr overload factor (PBrOL data)

17: PBr load factor (pulse duty)

18: Input power

FP terminal meter

selection





(c)

(e)

(b)

(d)

(c)

－

19: Output power

20: Peak output current

21: Peak DC voltage

22: Motor counter dummy PG

23: Position pulse

24: PR input

25: VI/II input

26: RX input

27: RX2 input

28: FM output

29: AM output

30: Fixed output for meters

31: Analog output for communication

32:Acc/dec torque removal

33:Current (with filter)

(c)

(b)

FP terminal meter

adjustment

～ [kHz]





Note) ON pulse width is fixed at a value that depends on the setting of .(about 50~70%)

The data of current, torque, etc. are limited by 200 %.

F-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.29 Control panel parameters

6.29.1 Prohibiting the change of parameter settings

 ：Prohibition of parameter setting

・Function

This parameter is used to make a setting to prohibit or allow the change of parameter settings.

■Setting method

　：Allowed･･････No parameters are write-protected. (Default setting)

　：Prohibited････All parameters except for  are write-protected.

［Parameter setting］

Title

Function

Adjustment range

：Allowed

：Prohibited

Default setting

Prohibition of parameter setting





■Canceling method

 only is designed so that its setting can be changed anytime even when it is set at .

■To prohibit all operation, including key operation, use the parameter (Panel operation

prohibition).

6.29.2 Changing the units of display

 ：Current / voltage display mode

・Function

This parameter is used to change the units of display of current and voltage.

Display in % <=> Display in A (ampere) or V (volt)

Current 100% = Inverter’s rated current

200V-class voltage 100% = 200Vac

400V-class voltage 100% = 400Vac

■Example of setting

When the VFA7-2037PL (rated current: 16.6A) is operated under the rated 100% load :

1) Display in [%]　　　　　　　　　　　　　　 2) Display in [A] or [V]

Output current









　 : 100%

　 : 16.6A

DC voltage

Input voltage

　 : 100%

　 : 200V

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: [%]

: [A] or [V]

Current / voltage display

mode





※With , you can convert the units pertaining to the following parameters:

・Display in [A]: Current monitor

　　　Motor overload protection level #1,#2,#3,#4 , , , 

　　　DC injection braking current

　　　Stall prevention level

・Display in [V]: Voltage monitor

　　　V/f 5-point setting





, , , , 

（Note） Base frequency voltage is always displayed in voltage unit.

F-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.29.3 Display the motor speed and the load speed

 ：Frequency free unit magnification

・Function

This parameter is used to convert the monitored or parameter-set frequency into the

rotating speed of the motor or the speed of the load.

■Value displayed

The LED displays the value obtained by multiplying the monitored or parameter-set frequency by

the value set with .

Displayed value＝Monitored frequency or frequency set with a parameter× Value set with 

Note) If the display value is more than ,4digit from the left and  are displayed

alternately. (Ex. alternate display “⇔” for the value .)

■Examples of setting

1) Display of the rotating speed of the motor

To switch from the operation frequency (default setting: 60 Hz) to the rotating speed of the 4P motor

(1800 min^-1)



 = (OFF)



 = 

(× = )

2) Display of the speed of the load

To switch from the operation frequency (default setting: 60 Hz) to the speed of the load (6 m/min-1.)



 = (OFF)



 = 

(× = )

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: OFF, ～

Default setting

Frequency free unit magnification





Note: This parameter is to display the value obtained by multiplying the output frequency of the

inverter by an integer. Therefore, the value calculated from the output frequency is always

displayed regardless of fluctuations of the rotating speed of the motor due to fluctuations of

the load.

6.29.4 Column number below decimal point of Frequency, Acc/dec time

 ：Decimal place number of frequency

 ：Decimal place number of Acceleration/deceleration time

・Function

These parameters are used to change the number of decimal places of the monitored or

parameter-set frequency, acceleration time or deceleration time displayed.

■Example of setting

Adjustment

range

Default

setting

Value displayed after

change (example)

Title

Function

: 1 [Hz]

: 0.1 [Hz]

: 0.01 [Hz]







Decimal place number of

frequency





F-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjustment

range

Default

setting

Value displayed after

change (example)

Title

Function

: 1 [s]

: 0.1 [s]

: 0.01 [s]

Decimal place number of

Acceleration/deceleration

time











6.29.5 Changing items displayed in status monitor mode

 ：Monitor display mode setting

 ：Status monitor #1 display mode

 ：Status monitor #2 display mode

 ：Status monitor #3 display mode

 ：Status monitor #4 display mode

These parameters are used to select the item to be displayed when the power is turned on and

also to change items displayed in status monitor mode. Refer to 8.1 for details.

6.29.6 Switching basic parameters

 ：Selection of panel V/f1, 2, 3 or 4

・Function

This parameter is used to switch V/f characteristics during operation or to drive

four motors with a single inverter.

This parameter is valid only when the inverter is in panel operation mode.

[Parameter setting]

V/f1 is selected default setting.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

1: V/f1, 2: V/f2,

3: V/f3, 4: V/f4

Default setting

Selection of panel

V/f1,2,3 or 4





[Parameters which can be switched with ]

(V/f1)

(V/f2)

Base frequency #1

Base frequency voltage #1

Manual torque boost



Base frequency #2

Base frequency voltage #2

Manual torque boost #2













Motor overload protection level #1



Motor overload protection level #2

(V/f3)

Base frequency #3

Base frequency voltage #3

Manual torque boost #3

Motor overload protection level #3

(V/f4)

Base frequency #4

Base frequency voltage #4

Manual torque boost #4

Motor overload protection level #4

















　　　　 : Parameter groups selected by default

■Switching by means of terminals

The V/f1, 2, 3 and 4 can also be switched by switching on and off terminals.

⇒Refer to 6.4.1 for details.

F-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.29.7 Selecting a control panel stop pattern

 ：Panel stop pattern

・Function

This parameter is used to select the mode in which the machine is stopped by pressing the STOP

key on the control panel when the operation is started by pressing the RUN key.

1) Slowdown stop

The motor stops in the deceleration time set with the parameter (,  or

).

2) Free-run stop

The output of the inverter is cut off. As a result, the motor coasts to a stop. Depending on the

load, the motor can keeps rotating for a while before coming to a complete stop.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: Deceleration stop

: Coast stop

Default setting

 Panel stop pattern



6.29.8 Resetting the inverter from the control panel

 : Panel reset function

・Function

This parameter is used to reset the inverter by control panel operation when it trip

s because of a failure, a fault, etc.

■Resetting method

1) Press the Stop key and make sure that  is displayed.

2) Press the Stop key again to reset the inverter.

Note) If the inverter trips because of trouble indicated with the message ～, , ,  or ,

it may take a bit of time for the inverter to be reset.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Panel reset function

: Disabled, : Enabled





6.29.9 Selecting a torque limit in control panel operation mode

 ：Panel torque limit

・Function

With this parameter, you can select a torque limit when torque control is exercised by the

control panel.

This parameter is valid only when the inverter is in control panel operation mode.

Control panel operation: The mode of operation obtained by setting the torque command

selection parameter  at (Panel input).

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

, , , 

Default setting

Panel torque limit





＊Refer to 6.22 for details of torque limit setting.

F-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.29.10 Canceling PID control in panel operation mode

 ：Panel PID control OFF

・Function

This parameter is to switch from PID control to open-loop control (normal control

mode) when PID control is exercised by the control panel.

Note) This parameter is valid only when the inverter is in panel operation mode.

　　：PID control enabled

　　PID control is exercised if  is not set at .

　　：PID control disabled

　 Open-loop control (normal control mode) is exercised instead of PID control.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: ON

: OFF

Panel PID control OFF





Note) When  is set at , open-loop control is exercised even if this parameter is

set at  (PID control enabled).

6.29.11 Setting a torque command in panel operation mode

 ：Panel torque reference

・Function

This parameter is to set a torque command when torque control is exercised by the

operation panel. This parameter is valid only when the inverter is in control panel

operation mode.

Panel operation: Torque command selection  is set at (Panel input).

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

～ [%]

Default setting

Panel torque reference





＊Refer to 3.3.3 for details.

6.29.12 Drooping control in panel operation mode

 ：Panel synchronized torque bias

 ：Panel tension torque bias

 ：Panel load sharing gain

6.29.13 Override in panel operation mode

 ：Panel over-ride multiplication gain

＊Refer to 6.27 for details.

F-70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.29.14 Restricting or prohibiting key operation

 ：Panel operation prohibition

・Function

This parameter can prohibit the operation of control panel keys to avoid operation errors.

Note 1) The setting of this parameter take effects as soon as it is saved.

Note 2) Once saved, the setting of this parameter cannot be overridden unless the

power is turned off or the inverter is reset after trip.

■Setting

Every key operation, enabled・・・・・ (Default setting)

Every key operation, prohibited・・・・

Ex.) to enable monitor display operation and Panel operation(start/stop):

　　　Monitor display operation enabled ...＋

　　　Panel operation(start/stop) enabled ...＋

　　　　　(＋) ＋ (＋) ＝

　　Therefore, the number you should key in to enable these functions is .

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

: Every key operation, inhibited

+: panel frequency setting enabled

+: Parameter Load enabled

Panel operation

prohibition

+: Monitor display operation enabled

+: Panel operation(start/stop) enabled

(+: No function is assigned)





+: Emergency stop operation enabled

: normal mode(Every key operation enabled)

Note) The LED displays "" immediately after  is set at , but it returns to normal

standard mode after the inverter is reset or is locked to trip monitor mode if the inverter trips.

To prohibit the read or write of parameter, refer to 6.29.1.

■Canceling methods

1) Temporary cancellation

Every key operation is enabled temporarily, until the power is turned off. (Turning off the power

disables every key operation again.)

In standard monitor display mode or trip monitor mode,

▲

press the

key twice while holding down the

key

ENT

2) Permanent cancellation

[Canceling method in cases that parameters are not read/write-protected]

 is overridden permanently. Changing its setting causes the previous setting to be

overridden automatically in a mode where parameters are not read/write-protected.

[Canceling in cases that parameters are read/write-protected]

In standard monitor display mode or trip monitor mode,

▲

press the

key twice while holding down the

key

ENT

and then change the setting of  to .

Note) "" is displayed when  is called. Press the

▲

and

▼

keys to make

the "" blink, then press the Enter key to save the setting.

F-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.30 Communication function (RS485/common serial)

 ：Communication rate (common serial)

 ：Parity (common serial/RS485)

 ：Inverter number (common)

 ：Communication time-out (common serial/RS485)

 ：Communication time-out action (common serial/RS485)

 ：Communication waiting time (common serial)

 ：Inter-drive communication (common serial)

 ：Frequency point selection

 ：Point #1 setting

 ：Point #1 frequency

 ：Point #2 setting

 ：Point #2 frequency

 ：Communication rate (RS485)

 ：RS485 wiring system

 ：RS485 communication waiting time

 ：Inter-drive communications (RS485)

・Function

These parameters set up a data communications network by connecting inverters to one

another and to a host control system, and also establish a data communications link

between a computer and each inverter.

＜Computer link＞

The function is to enable data communications between a host control system (computer)

and each inverter.

　　① Monitoring of inverter status (output frequency, current, voltage, etc.)

　　② Command to each inverter (start command, stop command, etc.)

　　③ Load, modify, and save of inverter's parameter setting

＜Inter-drive communication＞

Designed to enables an inverter (master) to send data selected with parameters to the

other inverters (slaves) on the network. With this function, you can establish a network

to perform simplified synchronous or proportional operation (point frequency setting).

☆Timer function .…Designed to detect broken communications cables. With this function,

you can set the inverter in such a manner that it can trip ("" is

displayed) or an alarm goes off. ("" is displayed on the panel) if it

receives no data within the predetermined time.

☆Broadcast communication ... Designed to send data to more than one inverter at a time.

☆Inter-drive communication ...The master inverter transmit the data that was chosen with

the parameter to all the slave inverters on the same network.

Using this function, the network that performs synchronized

operation and proportion operation (point frequency setting) in

simple way can be constituted.

6.30.1 Common serial optional device

With RS232C unit (optional), and RS485 unit(optional), connect inverters to a higher-order

control system (host computer) to establish a data communications network between them.

Also, you can establish a data communications link between a computer and each

inverter(RS485).

☆the common serial options available:

　･ RS232C communications converter units (model: RS2001Z)

Communication cable (model: CAB0011 (1 m), CAB0013 (3 m), CAB0015 (5 m))

　･ RS485 communication converter unit (model: RS4002Z)

Communication cable (model: CAB0011 (1 m), CAB0013 (3 m), CAB0015 (5 m))

(Note) Distance between Inverter and a common serial option should not be more than 5 m apart.

F-72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Setting of operation command (common serial)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

(Terminal

block enabled)

Setting

Operation command

mode selection

(Common serial

communication)

～



Note) To use inter-drive communication (),  can't be set at  for master and slave

inverter.

■Setting for speed reference (common serial)

Title

Function

Speed setting mode

selection

Adjustment range

Default setting

Setting

(Common serial

communication)

～

(RR)



Note) To use inter-drive communication (),  can't be set at  for master inverter.

■Communication parameters (common serial options)

　With these parameters, you can set or change the data transmission speed, the parity,

inverter numbers and the communication error trip timer with the control panel or

Communication.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: 1200 [bps]

Default setting

Communication rate(common

serial)

: 2400 [bps]

: 4800 [bps]





: 9600 [bps]

: No parity, : Even parity,

: Odd parity

～

 Parity(common serial/RS485)





Inverter number(common)

Communication time-out

(common serial/RS485)





: OFF, ～ [s]

RS485

Common serial



















No action

Alarm

Trip

No action

Alarm

Trip

No action

Alarm

No action

Alarm

Communication time-out action

(common serial/RS485)※





Trip

Communication waiting time

(common serial)

: Normal communications,

～ [s]

: Normal communications

(slave operation)

: Master (frequency reference)

: Master (output frequency)

: Master (torque reference)

: Master (output torque)

: Invalid









Inter-drive communication

(common serial)

: Common serial

: RS485

Frequency point selection





: Communication add-on cassette

option

Point #1 setting

Point #1 frequency

Point #2 setting

Point #2 frequency

～ [%]













～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]





　※：No action: No action is taken even if a timeout occurs.

　　 Alarm:

An alarm goes off if a timeout occurs. The message "" blinks at the left end of the

control panel.

　　 Tripping:

The inverter trips if a timeout occurs. The message "" blinks on the control panel.

　Note) Changes to the parameters , ,  do not take effect until the power is turned off

and then on again. When inter-drive communication is used, the parameter is set at

0.02 or more.

F-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6.30.2 Using the RS485 port fitted as standard

With the standard serial RS485, you can connect each inverter to a higher-order control system

(host computer) to set up a data communications network between inverters. Also, you can

establish a data communications link between a computer and each inverter.

Serial RS485 connectors should be used to connect inverters to one another.

■Data transfer specification

Item

Specification

Interface

RS485

Transmission path

specification

Transmission distance

Number of

connectable units

Synchronization mode

Half-duplex transmission [2/4-wire, bus architecture (A terminator needs

to be attached at each end of the system.)]

Up to 500 m (overall length of the cable)

Up to 32 units (including a host computer)

Up to 32

Asynchronous transfer

Default setting: 9600 bps (parameter setting)

Selectable from among1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bps

ASCII code ... JIS X 0201 8-bit (ASCII)

Binary code ... Binary code, 8-bit fixed

Data transfer rate

Transmission character

Stop-bit length

Error detecting system

Received by inverter: 1 bit, sent from inverter: 2 bits

Parity: even/ odd/ non (parameter setting), check sum

Error correction function Not provided

Response monitoring

Transmission code

Transmission waiting

time setting

Not provided

Sending: 11 bit, Reception: 12 bit(with parity)

Possible

Action the inverter takes when an timeout occurs: tripping/alarm/no action

Others

→When alarm is selected, "" blinks at the left end of the control panel.

　When tripping is selected, "" is displayed on the control panel.

■An example of the connection of inverters linked to a computer

　＜Selective communications＞

　When an operation frequency reference is isued by the host computer to the inverter No.

　　　　　：Wiring

　　　　　：Data　　（Host→Inverter）

Host computer

　　　　　：Return data（Inverter→Host）

〜〜

☆

ＩＮＶ

Ｎｏ.００ IG

Ｎｏ.０１ IG

Ｎｏ.０２ IG

Ｎｏ.０３

Ｎｏ.２９ IG

Ｎｏ.３０

　　(IG)Ignore: Inverters take no action if their numbers do not agree with the number specified in the

command( they ignore data received and get ready to receive the next data.)

☆：Use a terminal board, etc., to divide each cable into branches.

　　①The host computer transmits data to inverters.

　　②Each inverter receives data from the host computer and checks the number specified by the

computer against its number.

　　③Only the inverter with the number that agrees with that specified by the computer decodes the

command and takes action according to it.

　　④On completion of the action, the inverter returns the results of the action taken to the host computer,

with the inverter number added to this information.

⑤

In this case, the inverter No. 3 only operates according to the operation frequency command

given by the host computer to it across the network.

F-74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　＜Broadcast communications＞

　　When the host computer to inverters broadcasts an operation frequency reference.

　　　　　：Wiring

Host computer

　　　　　：Data　（Host→Inverter）

〜〜

☆

ＩＮＶ

Ｎｏ.００

Ｎｏ.０１

Ｎｏ.０２

Ｎｏ.０３

Ｎｏ.２９

Ｎｏ.３０

☆：Use a terminal board, etc., to divide each cable into branches.

　　①The host computer transmits data to inverters.

　　②Each inverter receives data from the host computer and checks the number specified by the

computer against its number.

　　③If an asterisk (＊) is marked in place of an inverter number, all inverters judge the data to be common

to them (broadcast message), decode the command and take action.

　　④To avoid collision between data sets, data from the inverter with an a zero instead of an asterisk only

is sent back to the host computer.

　　⑤In this case, all inverters operate, following the operation frequency command given by the host

computer across the network.

Note) Data can also be broadcast to a specific group of inverters (group broadcast communication

s) by putting a number common to each inverter in the group.(This function is usable only in

ASCII mode.)

　　 (Ex.) If "＊1" is designated, data is broadcast to all inverters bearing the numbers 01, 11, 21,

31, ... 91, and data from the inverter bearing 01 only is sent back to the host.

■Inter-drive communications

When inverters (slaves) operate at the same operating frequency as the master inverter to which

they are connected (No frequency point is set.)

　　　　　：Wiring

Master inverter

　　　　　：Data　（Master→slave）

〜〜

☆

ＩＮＶ

Ｎｏ.００

Ｎｏ.０１

Ｎｏ.０２

Ｎｏ.０３

Ｎｏ.２９

Ｎｏ.３０

☆：Use a terminal board, etc., to divide each cable into branches.

　　①The master inverter transmits frequency command data to its slave inverters.

　　②The slave inverters calculate a frequency reference from the data received and save the frequency

calculated.

　　③As a result, all slave inverters operate at the same frequency as the master inverter.

(Note) The master inverter always sends frequency command data to its slave inverters, and all slave

inverters are always waiting for frequency command data from the master inverter.

F-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Setting of operation command (RS485)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Setting

Operation command

mode selection

～

(Terminal block enabled) (RS485)



Note) To use inter-drive communication (),  can't be set at  for master and slave

inverter.

■Setting of speed reference (RS485)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

(RR)

Setting

Speed setting mode

selection

～

(RS485)



Note) To use inter-drive communication (),  can't be set at  for master inverter.

■Communication parameters (standard RS485)

These parameters are used to set or change the data transmission speed, the parity, inverter

numbers and the communication error trip timer with the control panel and or a linked control.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: No parity, : Even parity,

: Odd parity

Default setting

 Parity(common serial/RS485)





 Inverter number

～

Communication time-out

(common serial/RS485)



: OFF, ～ [s]

RS485

Common serial



No action

Alarm

Trip

No action

Alarm

No action

Alarm





Communication time-out action







(common serial/RS485)※



Alarm



Trip

Alarm



No action

Alarm

Trip





Trip

: invalid

: Common serial

 Frequency point selection

: RS485



: Communications add-on cassette

option

 Point #1 setting

 Point #1 frequency

 Point #2 setting

 Point #2 frequency

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]









: 1200 [bps]

: 2400 [bps]

: 4800 [bps]

: 9600 [bps]

 Communication rate (RS485)



: 19200 [bps]

: 38400 [bps]

: 2-line system, 1: 4-line system

 RS485 communication system



RS485 communication waiting

time



: Norm, ～ [s]



0: Normal communications

(slave operation)

Inter-drive communication

(RS485)

1: Master (frequency reference)

2: Master (output frequency)

3: Master (torque reference)

4: Master (output torque)





　※：No action: No action is taken even if a timeout occurs.

　　 Alarm:

An alarm goes off if a timeout occurs. The message "" blinks at the left end of the

control panel.

　　 Tripping:

The inverter trips if a timeout occurs. The message "" blinks on the control panel.

　Note) Changes to the parameters , , ,  do not take effect until the power

is turned off and then on again. When inter-drive communication is used, the parameter 

is set at 0.02 or more.

F-76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. OPERATION WITH EXTERNAL SIGNAL

7. 1. External Operation

The inverter can be freely controlled externally.

Parameters must be differently set depending on the operation method. Make sure of the

operation method before setting parameters, and set parameters properly to the operation　mode

according to the procedure mentioned below.

［Procedure for setting parameters］

Check of external signal conditions

Operation signal:

Control panel

Operation speed command:

Control panel

Terminal board

Operation speed command:

Control panel

Terminal board

Operation Speed command:

Terminal board

Operation speed command:

Terminal board

Refer to 5.3, Example 1).

Refer to 5.3, Example 3).

Refer to 5.3, Example 2).

Refer to 5.3, Example 4).

In case of control panel operation

command input

In case of run/stop with external input

＝: Terminal block enabled

＝: Operating panel

enabled



: Common serial communication option enabled

: Serial communication RS-485 enabled

: Communication add-on cassette option

＊

Sink logic and source logic (logic of input/output terminal)

are switchable to each other. For details, refer to the

section 2.3.2.

In case of control panel operation

command input

In case of run/stop with external input

＝: VI(voltage input) / II(current input)

: RR(volume/voltage input)

＝: Operation panel

input

: RX(voltage input)

: RX2(voltage input) (optional)

: Binary/BCD input (optional)

: Common serial communication option

: Serial communication RS-485

: Communication add-on cassette option

: Up-down frequency

: Pulse input 1 (optional)

G-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 2 Applied operation with input and output signals

(operation by the terminal board)

7. 2. 1 Functions of input terminals (in case of sink logic)

Signals that are supplied to control input terminals from the programmable controller, etc. are

used to operate or set up the inverter.

Since function of each contact input terminal is selectable from 136 functions, this inverter

makes it possible to design a system flexibly.

[Control terminal board]

RES S1

RX ＩＩ

ST CC

A M

FP O U T2

V Ｉ PP FM O U T1

FLB

　　　　 ■Setting of contact input terminal function

Adjustment

Terminal

Title

Function

Default setting

range

 (No assignment

function)

－

Always active function selection



Input terminal selection #1 (F)

Input terminal selection #2 (R)

Input terminal selection #3 (ST)

 (Forward rotation)

 (Reverse rotation)

 (Standby)

















～

RES

(Refer to

page G-4.)

Input terminal selection #4 (RES)

Input terminal selection #5 (S1)

Input terminal selection #6 (S2)

Input terminal selection #7 (S3)

Input terminal selection #8 (S4)

Input terminal selection #9～#16

 (Reset)

 (Preset speed #1)

 (Preset speed #2)

 (Preset speed #3)

 (Preset speed #4)

－

Option ～

Note:When  (Always active function selection) is selected, selected function is generally activated regardless of

positive or negative logic.

Note:～ is for use of expansion TB option unit.

　　　　　　■Connection method

1) In case of positive logic (a-contact) input

Inverter

a-contact switch

Input

terminal

★This function is activated when the input terminal

and CC (common) are short-circuit, and it is used

for forward rotation, reverse rotation, preset

speed operation, etc.

2) In case of negative logic (b-contact) input

Inverter

b-contact switch

Input

terminal

★This function is activated when the input terminal

and CC (common) are open-circuit, and it is used

for standby signal, reset signal, etc.

G-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3) In case of connection with transistor output

Programmable controller

Inverter

Input

terminal

★The inverter can be controlled by connecting the

input terminal with output (contactless switch) of a

programmable controller. This input is used for

forward rotation, reverse rotation, preset speed

control, etc. Use a transistor that operates on

24VDC,5mA power.

　　＊Regarding interface between inverter and programmable controller In the case programmable controller of open

collector output is used to control the inverter, if the programmable controller is turned off as the power supply to

the inverter is on, such a wrong signal as shown in the following figure flows into the inverter because of

difference in potential of control power. Be sure to provide the system with an interlock so that the programmable

controller cannot be turned off while the inverter is turned on.

Programmable controller

Inverter

＋２４Ｖ

External +24 V

power supply

Ｐ２４

Internal +24 V power

supply (inverter)

Fuse blowout

detector circuit

ＣＯＭ

Fuse

■Example of use - Push-type operation stop

Operation: Press the START button.

Stop: Press the STOP button.

Switch between forward and reverse

rotation:

START

STOP

F/R switch

Short circuit between S2 and CC.

[Parameter setting]

Symbol of

terminal

Adjustment

Setting value

range

Title

Function



Input terminal selection #1(F)

Input terminal selection #5(S1)







～

(PUSH-type run command)



(PUSH-type stop command)



(Refer to

page G-4)

Input terminal selection #6(S2)

(Forward/reverse selection)

G-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Table of contact input terminal function settings

Parameter setting

Function

Positive Negative

logic

No assignment function

F: Forward operation command

R: Reverse operation command

ST: Standby

Reservation area(*3)

Binary data write

RES: Reset

S1: Preset-speed #1

S2: Preset-speed #2

S3: Preset-speed #3

S4: Preset-speed #4

Jog run

Up/down frequency (up) (*1)

Up/down frequency (down) (*1)

Up/down frequency (clear)

Emergency stop

DC injection breaking

Acceleration/deceleration

switching #1(*2)

Acceleration/deceleration

switching #2(*2)

PUSH-type run command

PUSH-type stop command

V/f switching #1(*2)

V/f switching #2(*2)

Torque limit switching #1(*2)

100

102

101

103

Forward/reverse selection

Run/stop command

Commercial power/INV switching

Frequency reference priority

switching

Torque limit switching #2(*2)

104

105

PID control OFF selection

Pattern group #1

Pattern group #2

106

108

110

107

109

111

VI/II terminal priority

Command terminal board priority

Parameter editing enabling

Control switching (torque,

position)

Pattern group #3

112

113

Pattern group #4

Pattern run continuation signal

Pattern run trigger signal

114

116

118

115

117

119

Deviation counter clear

Position control forward limit LS

Position control reverse limit LS

Light load high-speed operation

enabling

Forced Jog forward operation

120

121

Forced Jog reverse operation

Reservation area(*3)

122

124

123

125

Reservation area(*3)

Preliminary excitation

System consistent sequence

(BC: Braking command)

System-supporting sequence

(B: Brake release)

System-supporting sequence

(BA: Brake answer)

System-supporting sequence

(BT: Brake test)

Reservation area(*3)

126

128

130

127

129

131

132

134

133

135

Reservation area(*3)

(*1): Valid when (Speed setting mode selection) is set at (Up-down frequency).

The frequency setting range is between 0.0 to (Upper limit frequency).

In this case, acceleration time is (Acceleration time #2), and deceleration time is

(Deceleration time #2).

(*2): To switch acceleration/deceleration pattern, V/f pattern, torque limit #1～#4, give the

following signals to switching functions. (in case of positive logic)

switching #1

OFF

switching #2

OFF

Acc/dec, V/f, torque limit #1

Acc/dec, V/f, torque limit #2

Acc/dec, V/f, torque limit #3

Acc/dec, V/f, torque limit #4

OFF

(*3): Reservation area. Do not set at these functions.

■Sink logic/source logic

Switching between sink logic and source logic (input/output terminal logic) is possible.

For details, refer to the section 2.3.2.

G-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 2. 2 Functions of output terminals (in case of sink logic)

These functions are used to output various signals from the inverter to external equipment.

The functions from 0 through 119 can be utilized by setting parameters for the OUT1, OUT2, FL

(FLA, FLB, FLC) of the control terminal board.

■Control terminal board

RES S1

RX ＩＩ

ST CC

A M

FP O U T2

P24

V Ｉ PP FM O U T1

FLB

■How to use

Function of OUT1・・To be set by parameter 

Function of OUT2・・To be set by parameter 

Functions of FLA, FLB, FLC・・To be set by parameter 

FLA

FLB

FLC

P24

OUT1

OUT2

■Setting of output terminal functions

Symbol of

terminal

Adjustment

range

Title

Function

Default setting



OUT1

 Output terminal selection #1(OUT1) ～

(Low speed signal)



OUT2

 Output terminal selection #2(OUT2) ～ (Acceleration/decelera

tion completion)



(Failure FL)

 Output terminal selection #3(FL)

～

～



Option

Output terminal selection #4～#7

～

－

G-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　　　■Output terminal function(open collector, relay outputs) settings and detection levels

＜Technical terms＞

Alarm:･･････････････Alarm output beyond a certain setting value

Pre-alarm: ･･････････Alarm output of the state where the inverter may carry out a trip by

continuation

Serious failure: ･･････Output signal in a serious failure of the protection function of the inverter.

(Arm over-current(, , ), Load side over-current(), Short-

circuiting(, ), Phase failure(, ), etc.)

Light failure:･････････Output signal in a slight failure of the protection function of the inverter.

(Over-load(, ), Over-voltage(, , ), Over-current(,

, , , , ), etc.)

Emergency stop: ････Output signal when the inverter comes into emergency stop.

Stopping manner is set with (emergency stop).

Table of output terminal functions and detection levels

Parameter setting

Function

Operation output specifications (in case of positive logic)

Positive Negative

logic

"ON": The running frequency is higher than the setting of 

(Lower limit frequency).

"OFF": The running frequency is equal to or lower than the setting

of .

Lower limit frequency

()

"ON": The running frequency is equal to or higher than the setting

of (Upper limit frequency).

Upper limit frequency

()

"OFF": The running frequency is lower than the setting of .

"ON": The running frequency is equal to or higher than the setting

of (low-speed signal output frequency).

"OFF": The running frequency is lower than the setting of .

"ON": The difference between the frequency command and the

running frequency is within the setting of .

"OFF": In acceleration or deceleration.

Low speed signal

Acceleration/deceleration

completion

"ON": The running frequency is in the range of ±.

Specified speed arrival "OFF": The running frequency is out of the range of

±.

"ON": Inverter is tripped.

"OFF": Inverter trip is cancelled.

"ON": Inverter is tripped (except EF and OCL).

"OFF": Inverter trip is cancelled (reset).

11 Failure FL (all trip)

Failure FL (except for

 and )

"ON": Inverter output current is over the (Stall prevention

level) set value.

15 Over-current pre-alarm

"OFF": Inverter output current is under the  set value.

"ON": A certain rate of inverter overload() detection time is over.

"OFF": The detection time is within a certain limit.

"ON": A certain rate of motor overload() detection time is over.

"OFF": The detection time is within a certain limit.

"ON": The temperature of the cooling fin is 85℃ or higher inside

the inverter.

Inverter overload

pre-alarm

Motor overload

pre-alarm

21 Overheat pre-alarm

"OFF": The temperature drops to 80℃ or lower after overheat

pre-alarm was on.

"ON": In over-voltage control operation or PB operation.

(200V class: 370 VDC approx., 400V class: 740 VDC approx.)

"ON": The main circuit voltage is lower than the main circuit under-

voltage detection () level.

(200V class: 200 VDC approx., 400V class: 380 VDC approx.)

"ON":  is set at  and the state that inverter output current is

 set value or larger continued more than  set

value.

"ON": The state that torque current component is ()

set value or larger continued more than  set value.

"ON": A certain rate of braking resister overload trip()

detection time is over.

"OFF": The detection time is within a certain limit.

"ON": In emergency stop operation ("" is indicated).

"OFF": No emergency stop operation is performed.

"ON": In retry operation ("" is indicated).

"OFF": No retry operation is performed.

23 Over-voltage pre-alarm

Main circuit

25 under-voltage ()

detected

27 Low current detected

29 Over-torque detected

Braking resistor overload

() pre-alarm

33 In emergency stop

35 In course of retry

Pattern run switching

output

"ON": In normal operation or pattern operation has finished.

"OFF": In pattern operation.

G-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter setting

Positive Negative

Function

Operation output specifications (in case of positive logic)

logic

39 PID deviation limit

"ON": PID deviation is in  or  set value.

"ON": Running frequency is output or DC injection breaking ()

is performed.

"ON": Serious failure(refer to technical terms on the previous page)

is detected.

41 Run/stop

43 Serious failure

"OFF": Inverter has recovered from serious failure. (Serious failure

has been reset)

"ON": Light failure (refer to technical terms on the previous page) is

detected.

"OFF": Inverter has recovered from light failure. (Light failure has

been reset)

45 Light failure

Commercial/INV

switching output #1

(for inverter operation

Refer to 6.16.

output)

Commercial/INV

switching output #2

(for commercial

operation output)

"ON": Cooling fan is in operation.

"OFF": Cooling fan is off operation.

"ON": In jog run.

51 Cooling fan ON/OFF

53 In Jog run

"OFF": In normal operation.

Panel operation/terminal

55 board operation

switching

"ON": In operation by terminal board.

"OFF": In operation by control panel.

Cumulative operation

time alarm

"ON": Cumulative operation time is beyond the  set value.

"OFF": Cumulative operation time is less than the  set value.

Abnormal communication

59 alarm #1

"ON": Communication error caused by scanning has occurred.

"OFF": Communication error is cancelled (reset).

(caused by scanning)

"OFF": In forward operation.

"ON": In reverse operation.

Forward/reverse

switching

(The last status is held while operation is suspended.)

"ON": In operable status or operation can be started with frequency

command input as an operation switching answer-back.

"OFF": In inoperable status.

"ON": In operable status or operation can be started with ST and

RUN signals and frequency command input

"OFF": In inoperable status.

"ON": Control circuit under-voltage is detected ().

(detection level; 200V class: approx. 145 VAC or lower,

400V class: approx. 290 VAC or lower)

63 Ready for operation #1

65 Ready for operation #2

Poor control power supply

() pre-alarm

System consistent

69 sequence

Output the braking signal according to the brake sequence.

(BR: Brake release)

"ON": More than one of alarm, pre-alarm, under-voltage, low

current over-torque, poor control power supply, PID deviation

limit, abnormal frequency setting or torque limit have occurred

or detected.

71 In (pre-)alarm status

"OFF": All the alarms above are cancelled.

Forward speed limit

"ON": Forward operation speed is  set value or over.

"OFF": Forward operation speed is less than  set value.

"ON": Reverse operation speed is  set value or over.

"OFF": Reverse operation speed is less than  set value.

"ON" and "OFF" are alternately output at intervals of 1 second.

(torque control)

Reverse speed limit

(torque control)

77 Inverter healthy output

Abnormal communication

alarm #2 (caused by

RS485 logic or

"ON": Communication error caused by RS485 logic or message

transmission has occurred.

"OFF": Communication error is cancelled (reset).

message transmission)

81 Error code output #1

83 Error code output #2

85 Error code output #3

87 Error code output #4

89 Error code output #5

91 Error code output #6

Output the failure code in 6bits.

G-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter setting

Positive Negative

Function

Operation output specifications (in case of positive logic)

logic

93 Designated data output #1

95 Designated data output #2

97 Designated data output #3

99 Designated data output #4 Output of the designated data in 7 bits.

101 Designated data output #5

103 Designated data output #6

100

102

104

105 Designated data output #7

"ON": Load is equal to ～(Heavy load torque) set

106

107 Light load signal

values or less.

108

110

112

109 Heavy load signal

111 Positive torque limit

113 Negative torque limit

"ON": Load is larger than ～ set value.

"ON": Positive torque is over the positive torque limit level.

"ON": Negative torque is over the negative torque limit level.

Output for external rush

suppression relay

117 Over travel

114

115

"ON": External rush suppression relay is actuated.

"ON": Over running

116

118

119 Completion of positioning "ON": Positioning has been completed.

Note 1: "ON" in positive logic:

Open collector output transistor or relay is turned on.

"OFF" in positive logic: Open collector output transistor or relay is turned off.

"ON" in negative logic: Open collector output transistor or relay is turned off.

"OFF" in negative logic: Open collector output transistor or relay is turned on.

Note 2: Alarm output check conditions are as follows.

1) Under-voltage detected: To be checked always.

2) Low current detected:

3) Over-torque detected:

To be checked during operation command.

To be checked always.

■Sink logic/source logic

Sink logic and source logic (input/output terminal logic) can be switched to each other.

Refer to the section 2.3.2

G-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 2. 3 Setup of input/output terminal operation time

・Function

The input/output terminal operation time setup function is used to extend response time if

there is something malfunctioning because of noise or chattering of input relay.

For each output terminal, delay time at turning on or off can be set individually.

■Setup of response time

Title

Function

Adjustment range Default value

～ [ms]

Input terminal #1 response time (F)

Input terminal #2 response time (R)

Input terminal #3 response time (ST)

Input terminal #4 response time (RES)

Input terminal #5～8 response time













～ [ms]



～ [ms]

Input terminal #9～16 response time

Output terminal #1 delay time (OUT1)

Output terminal #2 delay time (OUT2)

Output terminal #3 delay time (FL)

Output terminal #4 delay time

Output terminal #5 delay time

Output terminal #6 delay time

Output terminal #7 delay time

Output terminal #1 holding time (OUT1)

Output terminal #2 holding time (OUT2)

Output terminal #3 holding time (FL)

Output terminal #4 holding time

Output terminal #5 holding time

Output terminal #6 holding time

Output terminal #7 holding time



































　　　　：Setting when vector option unit or expansion TB option unit is used.

Note): The minimum setting unit is 1 ms, but that of response time is 2.5 ms. Input the value which omitted

below the decimal point of a multiple of 2.5.

7. 2. 4 Analog input filter

・Function

This function is effective to remove noise from the frequency setting circuit. If operation is unstable

because of noise, increase the time constant of the analog input filter.

■Response time setting

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default value

Analog input filter

(Disabled) to (maximum filter capacity)





G-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 3 Setup of external speed command (analog signal)

Function of analog input terminals can be selected from four functions (external volume, 0 to 10

VDC, 4 to 20 mA DC, -10 to +10 VDC). The selective function of analog input terminals helps

flexible design of a system.

[Control terminal board]

RES S1

RX ＩＩ

VＩ PP

FP OUT2

FM OUT1

P24

FLA

FLB FLC

　　　　 ■Setting of analog input terminal functions

Terminal

symbol

Default

value

Title

Function

Adjustment range

: 

: 

:  priority (*1)

:  priority (*2)

－

Reference priority selection

VI/II reference point #1





: / switching

(Input terminal function selection 104)

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]



























VI/II reference point #1 frequency

VI/II reference point #2

VI／II

VI/II reference point #2 frequency

VI/II reference point #1 rate

VI/II reference point #2 rate

Speed setting mode selection #2

fmod/f207 switching frequency

～ [%]





－

Same as  (～)

～ [Hz]

(disabled) to (max. filter

capacity)



All

Analog input filter





～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

RR reference point #1





























RR reference point #1 frequency

RR reference point #2









RR reference point #2 frequency

RR reference point #1 rate

RR reference point #2 rate

RX reference point #1





RX reference point #1 frequency

RX reference point #2









RX reference point #2 frequency

RX reference point #1 rate

RX reference point #2 rate



For details, refer to the instructions of

the option.

Option

RX2,BIN,pulse input point setup

～



Note: Input terminals of RX2, BIN and pulse input are at expansion TB option unit.

G-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 3. 1 Setup by analog input signals (RR terminal)

If a variable resistor (1-10 kΩ, 1/4 W) for setting up frequency is connected with the RR terminal,

the inverter can be run and stopped with external commands.

For bringing this function into practice, connect a potentiometer to the terminals of PP, RR and

CC so as to divide the reference voltage (10 VDC) at the terminal PP and to input 0 to 10 VDC of

divided voltage between the RR and CC terminals.

If analog voltage signal of 0 to 10 VDC is input between the terminals of RR and CC, frequency

can be set up without connection of a potentiometer.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default value

(Terminal)

(RR)

Setup value

(Terminal)

(RR)

 Operation command mode selection ～

 Speed setting mode selection

～

 FM terminal meter selection

～





FM terminal meter adjustment

－

 Reference priority selection

～

()

(Disabled) to

 (Max. filter capacity)

～ [%]

 Analog input filter



 RR reference point #1



 RR reference point #1 frequency

 RR reference point #2

～ [Hz]

～ [%]

















 RR reference point #2 frequency

 RR reference point #1 rate

 RR reference point #2 rate

～ [Hz]

～ [%]



■Run/stop setup

MCCB

CHARGE

To control switching between forward

rotation (F) and reverse rotation (R),

run and stop by external commands.

Motor

U/T1

ＶＦ－Ａ７

R/L1

Power

supply

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

■Setup of frequency setting signal and

running frequency characteristic

To set up frequency setting signal to be

input to the potentiometer (RR terminal)

and characteristic of running frequency.

Frequency characteristic is set up at

the two points of RR reference point #1

()/frequency(), RR

reference point #2()/frequency

().

RES

FLA

FLB

FLC

■Connection and calibration of

frequency meter

Connect a 1 mADC full-scale DC

current meter, 7.5 VDC full-scale DC

voltmeter or rectifier type AC voltmeter.

For calibration of the meter, refer to the

section 5.4.

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

P24

OUT1

OUT2

Frequency

meter

[Hz]



Point 2

Point 1

G/E

CC RX VI II RR PP



[%]





１～１０ｋΩ－１／４Ｗ

100%

10V)

(0V

～

Frequency setting signal

G-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 3. 2 Setup by analog input signals (VI/II terminal)

Connect current signal (4 to 20 mADC) to the terminal II or voltage signal (0 to 10 VDC) to the terminal VI

so that the inverter can be run and stopped with external commands.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default value Setup value

 Operation command mode selection ～

(Terminal)

(RR)



(Terminal)

(VI/II)



 Speed setting mode selection

 FM terminal meter selection

 FM terminal meter adjustment

 Reference priority selection

 VI/II reference point #1

～

～

－

～

()



()

※



～ [%]

 VI/II reference point #1 frequency

 VI/II reference point #2

～ [Hz]

～ [%]















 VI/II reference point #2 frequency

 VI/II reference point #1 rate

 VI/II reference point #2 rate

～ [Hz]

～ [%]



(Disabled) to

 (Max. filter capacity)

 Analog input filter



※: Set "" when current signal (4 to 20 mADC) is connected to the terminal II, or set ""

when voltage signal (0 to 10 VDC) is connected to the terminal VI.

■Run/stop setup

To control switching between forward

rotation (F) and reverse rotation (R),

run and stop by external commands.

■Setup of frequency setting signal and

running frequency characteristic

To set up frequency setting signal and

characteristic of running frequency that

are to be externally input to the terminal

VI or II.

Frequency characteristic is set up at

the two points of VI/II reference point #1

()/frequency(), VI/II

reference point #2() /frequency

().

MCCB

CHARGE

Motor

U/T1

ＶＦ－Ａ７

R/L1

Power

supply

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

RES

FLA

FLB

FLC

■Connection and calibration of

frequency meter

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

P24

Connect a 1 mAdc full-scale DC current

meter, 7.5 V dc full-scale DC voltmeter

or rectifier type AC voltmeter. For

calibration of the meter, refer to the

section 5.4.

OUT1

OUT2

Frequency

meter

[Hz]



Point 2

Point 1

G/E

CC RX VI II RR PP



＊０～１０Ｖｄ

＋

－

＋

－

[%]





100%

0% 20%

(0 ～

～

20mA)II terminal

10V )VI terminal

＊４～２０ｍＡｄｃ

～

Frequency setting signal

＊

The terminals VI and II cannot be used together at a time. Be sure to use either of them.

G-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. 3. 3 Setup by analog input signals (RX terminal)

Connect voltage signal (0 to ±10 VDC) to the terminal RX so that the inverter can be run and

stopped with external commands.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default value Setup value

 Operation command mode selection ～

(Terminal)

(RR)



(Terminal)

(RX)



 Speed setting mode selection

～

 FM terminal meter selection

～



FM terminal meter adjustment

－

 Reference priority selection

～

()

(Disabled) to

 Analog input filter



 (Max. filter capacity)

～ [%]

～ [Hz]

 RX reference point #1









 RX reference point #1 frequency

 RX reference point #2

～ [%]

～ [Hz]













 RX reference point #2 frequency

 RX reference point #1 rate

 RX reference point #2 rate

～ [%]



■Run/stop setup

MCCB

CHARGE

To run and stop the inverter by external

commands.

Motor

U/T1

ＶＦ－Ａ７

R/L1

Power

supply

■Setup of frequency setting signal and

running frequency characteristic

To set up frequency setting signal and

characteristic of running frequency that are

to be externally input to the terminal RX.

Frequency characteristic is set up at the

two points of RX reference point #1

()/frequency(), RX

reference point #2()/frequency

().

S/L2

T/L3

V/T2

W/T3

RES

FLA

FLB

■Connection and calibration of

frequency meter

Connect a 1 mAdc full-scale DC current

meter, 7.5 VDC full-scale DC voltmeter or

rectifier type AC voltmeter. For calibration

of the meter, refer to the section 5.4.

FLC

Run／Stop

P24

OUT1

Frequency

meter

OUT2

Running frequency [Hz]

Point 2



↑

Forward

rotation





G/E

[%]

CC RX VI II RR PP



Reverse

rotation

↓

Point 1

－１０～

＋１０Ｖｄｃ

－１００％　　　　０％　　　　１００％

（－１０V ～　０Ｖ～＋１０Ｖ）

*：Regardless of open/closed circuit between

Frequency setting signal

R and CC terminals, run and stop operation is controllable.

Switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation is controllable by the terminals

F/R and RX if reverse rotation disabling selection F311 is properly set up.

Refer to 6.13.7, for details

G-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Monitoring operation status

8. 1 Status monitor mode

Status of the inverter can be monitored.

To monitor the inverter when it is normally running,

Press the

key twice and the current status is indicated on the LED display.

MON

Setup procedure to monitor the inverter status. (EX. Operation at 60 Hz)

Key operated LED display

Com.No. Details of indication

Description

Running frequency indication (in operation)

Standard monitor

mode

―

 (In the case monitor display mode setting

 is set at [running frequency])

Indication of "Automatic acceleration

 /deceleration()" that is the first basic

parameter

＊1

Parameter setup

FE01

mode

MON

Status monitor

FE01 mode (rotating

direction)

Indication of rotating direction



(: forward, : reverse)

Frequency

command

Indication of frequency command value.



―

▲

＊2

＊3

＊4

＊5

(In case of =)

Indication of inverter output current (load

current)(In case of =)

―

Load indication

DC voltage



Indication of inverter DC voltage (Default

setting unit: [%]) (In case of =)



Indication of inverter output voltage (Default

setting unit: [%]) (In case of =)

Output voltage



Indication of ON/OFF status of control input

 terminals (F, R, RES, ST, S1, S2, S3, S4) in

bits

Input terminal

information #1

▲

FE06

FE50 Input terminal

FE51 information #2

Input terminal

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional control

input terminals (B8,B9,B10,B11) in bits

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional control

input terminals (B11,B12,B13,B14) in bits

Indication of ON/OFF status of control output

terminals (OUT1,OUT2,FL) in bits

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional control

output terminals (R1,R2,OUT3,OUT4) in bits

▲





information #3

Output terminal

information #1



FE07 Output terminal

FE52 information #2



FE53

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional control

 output terminals (ALM0,ALM1,ALM2,ALM3) in

bits

Output terminal

information #3

▲

Sink/source

FE48

Indication of sink or source status

(: source, : sink)



▲

switching status

Type of connected

option

FE47

 Indication of connected options

FE54  last set data

FE55  last set data

FE08 CPU version

 Indication of  value set last

 Indication of  value set last

 Indication of version of the CPU

Flush memory

FE43

 Indication of version of the flush memory

 Indication of version of the control EEPROM

 Indication of version of the drive EEPROM

version

Control EEPROM

version

FE09

Drive EEPROM

version

FE44

(Continued on the following page)

H-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Continued from the preceding page)

Key operated LED display

Com.No. Details of indication

FE10 Past trip #1

Description

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #1

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #2

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #3

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #4

Indication of total (accumulated) operation

hours(Indication of 0.1 represents 10 hours.)

⇔

⇔

▲

FE11 Past trip #2

FE12 Past trip #3

FE13 Past trip #4

⇔

⇔



Cumulative

FE14

operation time

Standard monitor

mode

MON

（

 Running frequency indication(in operation)

Note 1）

Note 1: When

key is pressed, indication changes in the status monitor mode.

▲

▼

Note 2: Contents of status indications of *1, *2, *3, *4 and *5 can be selected from 30 kinds of information.

Unit of current and voltage indications can be changed from % to A (amperage) and V (voltage)

and vice versa respectively.

Note 3: Indicated input voltage is DC voltage just after input voltage is rectified multiplied by 1/√2.

Note 4: Past trip is in order of 1(last)→2→3→4(oldest)

Note 5: Cumulative operation time indicates a total of actually running hours.

■Information on input terminals

Information on  input terminals and  input terminals are for the optional add-on cassette.

Input terminal #1（F）

Input terminal #2（R）

Input terminal #3（ST）

:F111

:F112

:F113

:1 When there is signal input

Input terminal #4（RES） :F114

:3 When there is no signal input

Input terminal #5（S1）

Input terminal #6（S2）

Input terminal #7（S3）

Input terminal #8（S4）

:F115

:F116

:F117

:F118

:4 (Blank in the upper half)

　　　　　　

Input terminal #9 （B8）

:F119

:F120

:8 When there is signal input

Input terminal #10（B9）

Input terminal #11（B10） :F121

:10 When there is no signal input

:11 (Blank in the upper half)

input terminal #12（B11） :F122

　　　　　　　　

Input terminal #13（B12） :F123

Input terminal #14（B13） :F124

Input terminal #15（B14） :F125

Input terminal #16（B15） :F126

:12 When there is signal input

:13

:14 When there is no signal input

:15 (Blank in the upper half)

Input terminal #9 to #16: Expansion TB option unit

Note) When  is set at a number of  to  expansion TB option input terminal information (,)

indicate information of lower 8 bit terminal (B0～B7).

H-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Information on output terminals

　Information on  output terminals and  output terminals are for the optional add-on cassette.

Output terminal #1（OUT1）:F130

:1 When there is signal output

Output terminal #2（OUT2）:F131

Output terminal #3（FL）

:F132

:3 When there is no signal output

（blank in the upper half）

　　　　　

Output terminal #4（R1） :F133

Output terminal #5（R2） :F134

Output terminal #6（OUT3）:F135

Output terminal #7（OUT4）:F136

:4 When there is signal output

:6 When there is no signal output

:7 （blank in the upper half）

Output terminal #4,5 : Expansion TB option unit

Output terminal #6,7 : Vector option unit

　　　　　

Error code output #0（ALM0）

Error code output #1（ALM1）

Error code output #2（ALM2）

Error code output #3（ALM3）

:8 When there is signal input

:10 When there is no signal input

:11 （blank in the upper half）

Error code output #0,1,2,3 : Vector option unit

■Type of connected option



：Expansion TB option unit

：Vector option unit

：Expansion TB option unit & Vector option unit(＋)

：F10M option unit

：S20 option unit

Note1) Connection of add-on cassette options are reflected in this display.

Note2) Connection of PG feedback boards are not in this display.

■Total (accumulated) operation hours

For indication of total operation hours, running hours are counted up when the output frequency

monitor reads a frequency other than 0.0 Hz. 10 hours is indicated as 0.1 (unit of indication). Total

hours is indicated in the range from "" to "" that represent 10 hours and 9999 hours

respectively.

H-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. 2 Changing status monitor function

■Changing indication of status with power on

The standard monitor mode (*1) indicates running frequency (with default setting) such as

"" when power is on or "" when power is off, however, such the standard indication

can be changed into arbitrary indication as shown on page H-5. When the standard monitor

indication is changed for an option, each indication appears lacking in the initial letter (, ,

etc.).

・Standard monitor mode　⇒　Standard monitor indication selection（）

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

～(Refer to the next page.)

Monitor display mode setting





■Changing contents of status monitor indication

Regarding contents of status monitor indications appearing in the left column of the table on

page H-1, those marked with *2 to *5 can be changed for others. Select a desirable monitor

function from among optional monitor functions appearing on page H-5.

*2 Frequency command ⇒ Changeable by status monitor #1 display mode ().

*3 Load current

*4 Input voltage

*5 Output voltage

⇒ Changeable by status monitor #2 display mode ().

⇒ Changeable by status monitor #3 display mode ().

⇒ Changeable by status monitor #4 display mode ().

Title

Function

Status monitor #1 display mode

Adjustment range

～

Default setting





(Refer to the next page.)

～(ditto)

Status monitor #2 display mode

Status monitor #3 display mode

Status monitor #4 display mode













～(ditto)

　※If  to  are set at "" (Running frequency) the running frequency is not held

in trip status.

H-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　［Setup values of monitor indication parameters(～)］

Com. Setup

Unit(Com-

munication)

Function

Indication Unit(Panel)

No.

value

Depends



Running frequency　　　

Frequency command

Current

FD00

FE02

FE03

0.01[Hz]

0.01[%]

on 

ditto

1[%] or



ditto





FE04

FE05

DC voltage

Output voltage

0.01[%]





ditto

Depends

on 

ditto

FE015

After-compensation frequency

0.01[Hz]



FE16

FE17

FE18

FE19

FE56

FE20

FE21

Speed feedback (real-time value)

Speed feedback (1 second filter)

Torque

0.01[Hz]

0.01[%]



ditto

1[%]





Torque reference

10 Internal torque reference (*1)

11 Torque current

12 Exciting current

Depends

on 

1[%]

FE22

13 PID feedback value

0.01[Hz]



FE23

FE24

FE25

FE28

FE29

FE30

14 Motor overload factor (OL2 data)

15 Inverter overload factor (OL1 data)

16 PBr overload factor (PBrOL data)

17 PBr load factor (pulse duty)

18 Input power

0.01[%]

0.01[kW]









1[%]

0.1[kW]

1[%] or



ditto

1/100 count

1[%]

19 Output power

FE31

20 Peak output current

0.01[%]



FE32

FE33

FE34

FE35

FE36

GE37

FE38

FE39

FE40

21 Peak DC voltage

22 Motor counter dummy PG

23 Position pulse

24 PR input

25 VI/II input

26 RX input

27 RX2 input

28 FM output

29 AM output

0.01[%]

1 count

0.01[%]









1[%]

H-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. 3 Indication in trip status

When the inverter trips, details of the trip status are indicated. In the status monitor mode, the

status when the inverter trips is held.

■Details of indications of trip status

Trip indication

,

,

,

Details

Com. code Error code

Over-current during acceleration

Over-current during deceleration

Over-current during constant speed

Trip caused by short-circuit in the loaded

side on starting

1,37

2,38

3,39

25,29

26,30

27,31



U-phase arm over-current

V-phase arm over-current

W-phase arm over-current

Input phase failure













Output phase failure

Over-voltage during acceleration

Over-voltage during deceleration

Over-voltage during constant speed

Inverter overload

Motor overload

Dynamic braking resistor trip by overload

Overheat

Emergency stop

EEPROM error (write error)

Initial read error

Main RAM error

Main ROM error

CPU error

Communication abnormal interruption

Gate array fault

Output current detector error

Option error







































Flush memory fault

Trip of low current operation status

Trip by insufficient voltage (main circuit

power supply)

Trip by insufficient voltage (control circuit

power supply)





Trip by over-torque





Trip by short-circuit



Auto-tuning error

Inverter type error

Sink/source switching error

Sequence error

Disconnection of encoder

Abnormal speed

Extreme potential deviation

Key error

VI/II input error



















(*1)

No error

Note: Past trip indications (that have been saved in the memory or that appeared in the past)

can be read out. (Refer to "Status monitor mode, 8.1".)

(*1)This is not a trip indication, but it appears when no error record is found in monitoring the

past trip indications.

H-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Examples of reading out trip data

Com,No. Contents of indication Key operated LED display

Description

Status monitor mode (Blinking for trip

indication) Motor is in free-run status.

Indication of "Automatic

FC90 Trip information



Parameter setup

mode

MON

－

 acceleration/deceleration ()" that is

the first basic parameters.

Indication of running frequency when trip

occurred.

FE00 Running frequency

FE01 Running direction



Indication of direction of rotation when

 trip occurred.

▲

(: Forward rotation, : Reverse rotation)

Indication of frequency command value

when trip occurred.

－

frequency command

Current



▲

＊2

＊3

＊4

＊5

Indication of inverter output current (load



current) when trip occurred.

Indication of inverter DC voltage when

trip occurred.

DC voltage



Indication of inverter output voltage

when trip occurred.

Output voltage



Indication of ON/OFF status of control input

 terminals (F, R, RES, ST, S1, S2, S3, S4)

when trip occurred.

Input terminal

information #1

▲

FE06

FE50

FE51

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional

 control input terminals (B8, B9, B10, B11)

when trip occurred.

Input terminal

information #2

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional

 control input terminals (B12, B13, B14,

B15) when trip occurred.

Input terminal

information #3

Indication of ON/OFF status of control

 output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, FL) when

trip occurred.

Output terminal

information #1

FE07

FE52

FE53

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional

 control output terminals (R1, R2, OUT3,

OUT4) when trip occurred.

Output terminal

information #2

Indication of ON/OFF status of optional

 control output terminals (ALM0, ALM1,

ALM2, ALM3) when trip occurred.

Output terminal

information #3

Sink/source

switching status

Type of

Indication of sink or source status



FE48

FE47

FE54

FE55

▲

(: Sink, : Source)

Indication of connected add-on cassette

options



connected option

 last set data

 Indication of  value set last

 Indication of  value set last

 Indication of version of the CPU

 Indication of version of the flush memory

 last set data

FE08 CPU version

Flush memory

FE43

version

Control EEPROM

version

Main circuit

EEPROM version

Indication of version of the control

EEPROM

FE09



FE44

 Indication of version of the drive EEPROM

（Continued on the following page）

H-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

（Continued from the preceding page）

Com,No. Contents of indication Key operated LED display

Description

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #1

▲

⇔

⇔

FE10 Past trip #1

FE11 Past trip #2

FE12 Past trip #3

FE13 Past trip #4

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #2

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #3

⇔

⇔

(Alternately blinking at intervals of 0.5

second) Past trip #4

Indication of total (accumulated)

operation hours(Indication of 0.1

represents 10 hours.)

Status monitor mode(Blinking for trip

indication)

Cumulative operation

time

▲





FE14

Standard monitor

mode

MON

―

Reverts to the first trip indication.

×2

Note 1: Failures that occur during initialization of the CPU on turning on the power or after resetting the

inverter are not held by the failure trip holding function, and status monitor indications appear for

such the failure.

Note 2: Contents of status indications of *2, *3, *4 and *5 can be selected from 30 kinds of information.

Contents of indications that are set up at  to (status monitor #1 to #4 display

mode) are displayed.

Unit of current and voltage indications can be changed from % to A (amperage) or V (voltage)

and vice versa respectively with (Current/voltage display mode).

8. 4 Indication of alarm, pre-alarm, etc...

When the inverter alarm, pre-alarm, etc. occurred, the contents are displayed. (Some are

not displayed.) Listed below ones can be monitored via communication(FC91). Refer to

12.1 for the other alarms.

Bit

Contents of indication

Over-current pre-alarm

Panel indication



Inverter overload pre-alarm

Motor overload pre-alarm



Overheat pre-alarm



Over-voltage pre-alarm



Main circuit under-voltage () detected

Poor control power supply () pre-alarm

Low current detected





(no indication)

Over-torque detected

Braking resistor overload () pre-alarm

Cumulative operation time alarm

Abnormal communication alarm #1

(caused by scanning)

Abnormal communication alarm #2

(caused by RS485 logic or message transmission)

Reservation area



――

Reservation area

Note) For each bit, "0" indicates normal condition and "1" indicates appearance of

alarm, etc..

H-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. Selection of peripheral devices

　　　　Danger

・When using the inverter without the front cover, be sure to place the inverter unit inside a

cabinet. If they are used outside the cabinet, it may cause electric shock.

Mandatory

・Be sure to ground every unit. If not, it may cause electric shock or fire on the occasion of

failure, short-circuit or electric leak.

Be grounded

9. 1 Selection of wiring equipment

Wire size AWG（cross-section [mm²]）

Voltage Applicable

Inverter model

DC reactor

(optional)

Braking resistor

(optional)

class

motor [kW]

Main circuit(*1)

Earth cable

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

VFA7-2004PL

VFA7-2007PL

VFA7-2015PL

VFA7-2022PL

VFA7-2037PL

VFA7-2055PL

VFA7-2075PL

VFA7-2110P

VFA7-2150P

VFA7-2185P

VFA7-2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1

VFA7-2550P1

VFA7-2750P1

VFA7-2900P1

VFA7-4007PL

VFA7-4015PL

VFA7-4022PL

VFA7-4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL

VFA7-4110PL

VFA7-4150PL

VFA7-4185P

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300P

VFA7-4370P1

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

VFA7-4750P1

VFA7-4110KP1

VFA7-4132KP1

VFA7-4160KP1

14(2)

14(2) (*5)

10(5.5)

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

8(8)

6(14)

4(22)

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

6(14)

200V

class

4(22)

2(38)

8(8)

2(38)

4(22)

2(38)

6(14)

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

300(150)

4(22)

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

300

(150)

2(38) or

6×2(14×2)

400(200)

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

14(2) (*5)

14(2)

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

8(8)

14(2)

10(5.5)

6(14)

12(3.5)

10(5.5)

8(8)

10(5.5)

8(8)

6(14)

4(22)

6(14)

4(22)

6(14)

400V

class

2(38)

4(22)

2(38)

2/0(60)

4/0(100)

300(150)

400(200)

2(38)

90/110

132

160

4/0(100)

2/0(60)

4(22)

300(150)

300×2

4/0(100)

2/0(60) or

4×2(22×2)

4/0(100) or

2/0×2(60×2)

220

VFA7-4220KP1

(150×2)

400×2

300×2

(150×2)

300

(150)

280

VFA7-4280KP1

(200×2)

(*1): Indicates wire sizes of input terminals R, S, T and output terminals U, V, W. Wiring distance is supposed to

be 30 m at maximum.

(*2): The recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. 600V class,HIV cable) with continuous maximum

permissible temperature of 75°C.

(*3): For the control circuit, use shielded wires whose size (cross-section) is 0.75 mm²or more. The size (cross-

section) of wires supplying control power is 2.0 mm²or more.

(*4): For the earth cable, use wires larger than the specified ones in size (cross-section). (UL standard)

(*5): Recommended wire size for external braking resistor. Refer to 6.13.4 for use of external braking resistor.

(*6): Do not connect more than two wires to a terminal block (except for terminal blocks of 2900, 4160K to 4280K

and PA terminals of models that have only one PA terminal). If wiring with more than two wires is needed,

set a external relay terminal.

I-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Selection of wiring equipment

Molded case circuit breaker(MCCB)

Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)

Magnetic contactor (MC)

(*2), (*3), (*4)

Overload relay

(THR)

(*4)

with reactor

MCCB

without reactor

MCCB

without reactor

with reactor

Inverter

model

Regulated

amperage Type

Rated

current

[A]

Rated

current

[A]

Type

form

(*1)

Rated

current

[A]

Type

form

(*1)

type form

[ELCB type form]

(*1)

type form

[ELCB type form]

(*1)

(reference)

form

current

[A]

0.4

VFA7-2004PL

2.3

3.6

6.8

9.3

LR3D076

LR3D086

LR3D126

LR3D146

LR3D216

0.75 VFA7-2007PL

LC1D096

NJ30E

[NJV30E]

NJ30E

[NJV30E]

1.5

2.2

3.7

VFA7-2015PL

VFA7-2022PL

VFA7-2037PL

LC1D126

LC1D256

LC1D126

LC1D186

NJ50EB

[NJV50EB]

NJ100FB

5.5

VFA7-2055PL

LC1D326

LC1D256

LR3D226

LR3D326

T65J

NJ50EB

[NJV50EB]

7.5

VFA7-2075PL

VFA7-2110P

VFA7-2150P

100

125

150

175

225

250

350

400

LC1D386

LC1D656

LC1D806

LC1D956

LC1D386

LC1D506

LC1D656

LC1D806

LC1D956

110

138

162

[NJV100FB]

NJ100FB

[NJV100FB]

100

125

175

200

250

350

400

18.5 VFA7-2185P

T100J

NJ225FB

[NJV225FB]

VFA7-2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1

VFA7-2550P1

VFA7-2750P1

115 LC1D1156 95

150 LC1D1506 150

185 LC1F185 150

225 LC1F225 185 LC1F185

330 LC1F330 225 LC1F225

NJ225FB

[NJV225FB]

T115J

LC1D1506

T150J

T185J

NJ400F

[NJV400F]

NJ400F

[NJV400F]

198 LR9F53J

252

330

LC1F330

LR9F73J

NJ600F

[NJV600F]

VFA7-2900P1

500

330

314

0.75 VFA7-4007PL

1.6

3.6

5.0

6.8

LR3D076

LR3D086

LR3D106

LR3D126

LR3D166

LR3D216

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

VFA7-4015PL

VFA7-4022PL

VFA7-4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL

LC1D096

NJ30E

[NJV30E]

NJ30E

[NJV30E]

LC1D126

LC1D186

LC1D256

LC1D186

LC1D256

NJ50EB

[NJV50EB]

VFA7-4110PL

LC1D326

LR3D226

NJ50EB

[NJV50EB]

VFA7-4150PL

100

125

175

LC1D386

LC1D506

LC1D656

LC1D806

LC1D956

LC1D386

LC1D406

LC1D506

LC1D656

LR3D326

LR3D356

NJ100FB

[NJV100FB]

18.5 VFA7-4185P

NJ100FB

[NJV100FB]

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300P

VFA7-4370P1

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

100

125

150

175

200

T65J

T100J

T115J

NJ225FB

[NJV225FB]

LC1D806

115 LC1D1156 80

150 LC1D1506 115 LC1D1156 100

NJ225FB

NJ400F

[NJV400F]

[NJV225FB]

VFA7-4750P1

300

225

185 LC1F185 150 LC1D1506 138

T150J

T185J

225

300

350

400

185 LC1F185

225 LC1F225

265 LC1F265

330 LC1F330

155

VFA7-4110KP1

110

132

160

198 LR9F53J

252

268

NJ400F

[NJV400F]

VFA7-4132KP1

VFA7-4160KP1

NJ600F

[NJV600F]

NJ800F

LR9F73J

220

VFA7-4220KP1

600

400 LC1F400

500 LC1F500

396

460

280

VFA7-4280KP1

700

[NJV800F]

(*1):

Type forms of Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd. products.

(*2):

Attach surge killers to the magnetic contactor and exciting coil of the relay.

Surge killer for Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd. magnetic contactor.

200 V class: SS-2 (Manufacture: Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd.)

(For C11J to C65J, surge absorbing units are served optionally.)

400 V class: For the operation circuit and control circuit, regulate the voltage at 200 V or lower with a

voltage regulator.

(*3):

(*4):

In the case the magnetic contactor (MC) with 2a-type auxiliary contacts is used for the control circuit,

raise the reliability of the contact by using 2a-type contacts in parallel connection.

Be sure to connect DC reactor (optional) to 200V-75kW or more or 400V-110kW or more inverter.

(Not necessary for DC power input.)

I-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Among the wiring equipment shown in the above table, the magnetic contactors (MC) and overload relays

(THR) are new models of the TeSys series. When using old models of the Mighty J series, refer to the

following comparison table that shows consistency between models of the two series.

Magnetic contactor (MC)

Overload relay(THR)

Mighty J series TeSys series

LR3D076

Mighty J series

TeSys series

C11J

C13J

C20J

LC1D096

T13J

T20J

T35J

T65J

～LR3D166

LR3D216

LR3D226

LR3D326

LR3D356

LC1D126

LC1D186

C25J

C35J

LC1D256

LC1D326

LC1D386

C50J

～LC1D506

LC1D656

LC1D806

LC1D956

C65J

C80J

C100J

9. 2. Installation of electromagnetic contactor

When the inverter is used without electromagnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit, use the

MCCB (with voltage tripping device) to make the primary circuit open when the inverter

protection circuit is in operation.

When the damping resistor/damping resistance unit is used, install the electromagnetic

contactor (MC) or fuseless circuit breaker with power tripping device in the temporary power

supply circuit of the inverter so that the power circuit becomes open by operation of the error

detection relay (EL) built in the inverter or externally installed overload relay.

■Electromagnetic contactor in the primary circuit

If an electromagnetic contactor is installed in the power supply circuit of the inverter, it prevents

the inverter from power failure, tripping of overload relay (Th-Ry), cutout of the inverter

protection circuit after its operation, and double starting.

If the FL contact of the error detection relay built in the VF-A7 is connected with the operation

circuit of the primary electromagnetic contactor (MC), the MC is tripped when the inverter

protection circuit is actuated.

ＶＦ－Ａ７

ＭＣＣＢ

ＭＣ

Moter

Ｒ

Ｓ

Ｔ

Ｕ

Ｖ

Ｗ

Power

supply

ＩＭ

ＳＴ

Ｆ

Operation preparation

Forward

Reverse

Ｒ

ＣＣ

Example of electromagnetic contactor connection in primary circuit

I-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note on wiring

・If alternate operation to run and stop the inverter is frequently repeated, don't turn it on/off with

the primary electromagnetic contactor. Run and stop the inverter with the control terminals F

and CC (forward) and R and CC (reverse).

・Attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the electromagnetic contactor (MC)

■Electromagnetic contactor in the secondary circuit

The secondary electromagnetic contactor can be installed for switching the control motor and

power supply when the inverter is suspended.

Note on wiring

・To prevent the commercial power supply from impressing the inverter’s output terminals, be

sure to interlock the secondary electromagnetic contactor with the power supply.

・In the case the electromagnetic contactor (MC) is installed between the inverter and motor,

don't turn on/off the electromagnetic contactor on/off while the inverter is running. If the

electromagnetic contactor is turned on/off during operation, it may cause a failure of the

inverter because rush current flows to it.

9. 3. Installation of overload relay

１）The inverter VF-A7 has a built-in electronic thermal overload protection function inside. In

the following cases, however, install an overload relay proper to the electronic thermal

operation level adjustment and motor used between the inverter and motor.

・In the case a motor that is different in rated current from Toshiba standard motor is used.

・In the case a motor whose output is lower than the specified Toshiba motor of the

standard specifications is independently operated, or two or more units of such the

motors are operated together at a time.

２）When the low torque motor "Toshiba VF motor" is operated, properly adjust the electronic

thermal protection characteristic of the inverter VF-A7 for the VF motor.

３）It is recommended to use a motor with motor winding flush type thermal relay in order to

secure motor protection when it runs at low speed.

I-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. 4 Application and functions of options

　Separate type options shown below are prepared for the inverter VF-A7

②DC reactor

(DCL)

③High attention radio

noise filter

⑤Zero-phase reactor

ferrite core type

radio noise filter

⑥EMI filter for CE

compliance

⑦Braking resistor

⑧Motor noise

reduction filter

Magnetic

conductor

(MC)

motor

Power supply

VF-A7

N.F.

Molded case

circuit breaker

(MCCB)

⑤Zero-phase

reactor

ferrite core

type radio

noise filter

①Input AC reactor

(ACL)

⑨Motor end surge

voltage suppression

filter (for 400V

models only)

④Simple radio

noise filter

⑩Control power

converter unit

　　　　　　　Sorts of separate-type options

No.

Option name

Function, purpose.

To be used for improvement of input power-factor of the inverter power source, for reducing

higher harmonic or suppressing external surge. The input reactor can be installed when the

power capacity is 500 kVA or more and it is 10 times or more as high as the inverter capacity

or there are some source distorted wave generation such as a thyristor, etc. and a high

capacity inverter connected with the same distribution system.

Input AC reactor

(ACL)

①

Effect

Type of reactor Power-factor

improvement

Harmonic suppression

200 V, 3.7 kW or less Other combination

External surge

suppression

Input AC reactor Effective

DC reactor Very effective

Effective

Very effective Not effective

Effective

The DC reactor is superior to the input AC reactor in power-factor improvement. For the

inverter system that is required to be high reliable, it is recommended to use the input AC

reactor that effectually suppresses external surge together with the DC reactor.

②

③

DC reactor(DCL)

High attenuation

radio noise filter

(LC filter) NF type,

(manufactured by

Soshin Electric

Co., Ltd.)

･

Effectual to prevent audio equipment used near the inverter from radio interference.

Install this filter in the inverter’s input side.

･

Excellent attenuation characteristic for wide frequency band from AM radio band nearly to

10 MHz.

･

To be used when electric appliances that are easily affected by noise are installed in the

periphery of the inverter

Simple radio noise

filter (capacitive

filter)

(Manufactured by

Malcon Electronics

Co., Ltd.)

Zero-phase reactor

(Inductive filter)

(Ferrite core type,

manufactured by

Soshin Electric

Co., Ltd.)

･

Effectual to prevent audio equipment used near the inverter from radio interference.

Install this filter in the inverter’s input side.

Attenuation characteristic for a certain frequency band. Effectual for noise reduction of

specific AM radio broadcastings (weak radio wave in mountain area).

Leak current increases because of the condenser type. If ELCB is installed in the power

supply side, avoid using multiple units.

Effectual to prevent audio equipment used near the inverter from radio interference.

Effectual to reduce noise in the input and output sides of the inverter.

Excellent attenuation characteristic for several decibels in wide frequency band from AM

radio band nearly to 10 MHz.

･

④

⑤

･

If EMI filter is installed in proper connection, the inverter has consistency with EMC

commands. However, installation of EMI filter is not required for the inverters of 200 V, 0.4-

7.5 kW or 400 V, 0.75-15 kW models, because those models have built-in noise filters as

standard specifications.

To be used to shorten deceleration time for the reason of frequently operated quick

deceleration and suspension or high inertia load. This increases consumption of

regenerative energy in dynamic braking.

EMI filter for CE

compliance

⑥

⑦

Braking resistor

Resistor and protective thermal relay are built in.

I-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Option name

Function, purpose.

Motor noise reduction

filter (for large capacity

model only)

Can be used to suppress the magnetic noise from motor.

⑧

In a system in which 400 V class general motor is driven by a voltage PWM type inverter

using a high-speed switching device (IGBT, etc.), surge voltage depending on cable constant

may cause deterioration in insulation of motor winding. Take measures against surge voltage

such as use of insulation-reinforced motor, installation of AC reactor, surge voltage

suppression filter, sine wave filter and so on in the inverter’s output side.

Note) Set the carrier frequency to 2.2kHz when sine wave filter is used.

Motor end surge

voltage suppression

filter

⑨

(for 400 V models only)

For inverters of 22 kW or less models, it is needless to input control power to the terminal

(RO, SO) because those models are internally supplied with control voltage from the main

circuit power supply.

To use the main circuit power supply and control power supply separately for inverters of 22

kW or less models, use an optional control power supply unit. (Inverters of 30 kW or more

models have a built-in control power supply circuit respectively.)

■

Installation of optional control power supply unit (for 22 kW or less models)

For installing an optional control power supply unit, remove the jumper connector

(CN21) inside the inverter and connect the connector of the option to it.

Install the optional control power supply unit nearby the inverter.

＜Outward appearance of option unit＞

Name plate

(Caution label)

Window for LED and

hole for cooling

If this unit is charged

LED inside this

window lights.

Connector (6 pole)

Connect to the

inverter.

Control power converter

unit

⑩

Cable (70 cm)

＜

Outside dimensions of optional control power supply unit＞

Unit: mm

　　　　　　　　　(Model: CPS0011) *Common use for 200 V and 400 V models

I-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Option name

Function, purpose.

This unit collectively reads, copies and writes setup parameters. Therefore, multiple inverters

can be set up the same by use of this unit. Storage capacity of one parameter writer is for

three inverters. (When using this unit, set as follows: F805 [common serial transmission

waiting time] = 0.00 [default setting].)

(Note)

　　　　　　＜Outline drawings with dimensions

＞

Use a parameter writer

manufactured in January, 1997 or

after. For using a parameter writer

manufactured in December, 1996 or

before, connect it to the inverter with

cable after turning on the inverter.

⑪

Parameter writer

Ｋ９９０２１５

Manufactured:Year Month

　　　　　　　　　　　(Model: PWU001Z)

Extension operation control panel unit with LED indicator, RUN/STOP key, UP/DOWN key, Monitor key and Enter key.

(When using this unit, set as follows: F805 [common serial transmission waiting time] = 0.00 [default setting].)

(Note)

Use an extension operation control panel

unit manufactured in January, 1997 or

after. Units manufactured in December,

1996 or before cannot be used. Date of

manufacture can be know by the lot

number appearing on the name plate.

⑫

Extension control panel

Ｋ９９０２１５

Manufactured:Year Month

　　　　　　　　　　　(Model: RKP001Z)

If this unit is used to connect the inverter and a personal computer and so on with each other, data communication can

be performed between the two besides easy adjustment of parameters, saving and writing data. This unit serves as not

only an RS-232C interface but a communication unit that can be connected with two inverters together.

■

Monitor function　■Parameter setup function　■Command function　■Added function

RS-232C

⑬

communication

converter unit

　　　　　　　　　　　　(Model: RS2001Z)

I-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

No.

Option name

Function, purpose.

If this unit is used to connect the inverter and a personal computer and so on with each other, data communication can

be performed between the two besides easy adjustment of parameters, saving and writing data.

RS-232C

⑭

communication

converter cable

RJ45 connector

D-Sub 9pin connector

　　　　　　　　　　　　(Model: RS20035)

More than one inverter can be controlled with a personal computer and so on if this unit is

used for connection between inverters and personal computer.

･

Computer link:Since this unit makes it possible to connect inverters with higher-class

computer, FA computer, etc., a data communication network can be

constructed among multiple inverters.

･

Communication among inverters: For the purpose of proportional operation of multiple

inverters, a frequency data communication network can

be constructed among multiple inverters.

２５

１００

RS-485 communication

converter unit

１６.５

５

Ｒ２.５

⑮

(for communication with

multiple inverters)

Ｒ２.５

８.５

１

４

３０

　　　　　(Model: RS4001Z)

(Model: RS4002Z)

Connection cable for connecting parameter writer, extension control panel,

RS-232C communication units, and RS-485 communication units.

Cable types: CAB0011 (1 m), CAB0013 (3 m), CAB0015 (5 m).

⑯

⑰

Communication cable

Remote control panel

A frequency meter, frequency setup device, RUN/STOP (forward, reverse) switch

are built in this operation panel. (Model: CBVR-7B)

Applied control units of the AP series make various applied control possible if they

are used in combination with the inverter.

■

Proportional control panel (APP-2B)

Ratio setup panel (APH-7B)

Regulated power supply board (APV-2B)

Cushion starter panel (APC-2B)

Synchronizing control panel

(APS-2B1)

■

Process control panel with built-in PI

controller (APJ-2B)

■

TG follower panel (APF-7B)

Current detection panel (APD-2B)

Torque control panel (APL-2B)

FV converter (APR-2B)

⑱

Application control units

■

Synchronizing transmitter (DRR-2)

Remote control panel (APM-2B)

Loop controller (APU-2B)

･ Higher harmonic suppressor unit improves input power-factor by suppressing

harmonic current.

Harmonic suppression

converter

⑲

･ Power regenerator unit protects the inverter from load sprung from frequent rapid

deceleration and negative torque.

Power regeneration

converter

For applicable models and particulars, inquire at our office.

Option ⑩～⑮ should be used under the condition of 9600 bps or less ().

I-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　Selection table of separate-type options

Radio noise reduction filter

Motor

noise

reduction

Motor end

Applicable

motor

Input AC

reactor

(ACL)

Voltage

class

Inverter

model

DC reactor

(DCL)

Braking resistor surge voltage

High

attenuation

type

Core

type

(*1)

Simple

type

(*2, 3, 4)

suppression

filter

[kW]

filter

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

VFA7-2004PL

VFA7-2007PL

VFA7-2015PL

VFA7-2022PL

VFA7-2037PL PFL-2018S DCL-2037

VFA7-2055PL PFL-2025S DCL-2055

DCL-2007

(*9)

PFL-2005S

－

PFL-2011S DCL-2022

－

PBR3-2055

PBR3-2075

PBR3-2110

VFA7-2075PL

PFL-2050S DCL-2110

VFA7-2110P

RC9129

－

NF-3050A-MJ

NF-3080A-MJ

NF-3100A-MJ

VFA7-2150P

200V

class

PBR3-2150

PBR3-2220

－

VFA7-2185P

VFA7-2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1 PFL-2200S DCL-2450 NF-3200A-MJ

VFA7-2550P1 PFL-2300S DCL-2550 NF-3250A-MJ

PFL-2100S DCL-2220

PFL-2150S DCL-2370 NF-3150A-MJ

RCL-M2

PBR-222W002

NRL-2220

NRL-2300

NF-3200A-MJ

2 (parallel)

NF-3250A-MJ

2 (parallel)

RC9129

(*5)

VFA7-2750P1 PFL-2400S DCL-2750

DGP600W-B1

[DGP600W-C1]

VFA7-2900P1 PFL-2600S DCL-2900

NRL-2400

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

VFA7-4007PL

VFA7-4015PL

VFA7-4022PL

VFA7-4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL PFL-4025S DCL-4110

VFA7-4110PL

VFA7-4150PL

DCL-2007

(*7) (*9)

DCL-2022

(*7)

MSF-4015Z

MSF-4037Z

MSF-4075Z

MSF-4150Z

MSF-4220Z

MSF-4370Z

MSF-4550Z

PFL-4012S

－

PBR3-4055

PBR3-4075

PBR3-4110

RC9129

－

PBR3-4150

PBR3-4220

VFA7-4185P

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300P

PFL-4050S DCL-4220 NF-3040C-MJ

NF-3050C-MJ

NF-3060C-MJ

400V

class

VFA7-4370P1 PFL-4100S DCL-4450 NF-3080C-MJ

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

VFA7-4750P1

NF-3100C-MJ

PBR-417W008

PFL-4150S DCL-4750 NF-3150C-MJ

MSF-4750Z NRL-4155

NRL-4230

90/110 VFA7-4110KP1 PFL-4300S DCL-4110K NF-3250C-MJ

NF-3200C-MJ

RCL-M4

DGP600W-B2

[DGP600W-C2]

132

160

220

280

VFA7-4132KP1

NRL-4300

2 (parallel)

NF-3200C-MJ

2 (parallel)

NF-3250C-MJ

2 (parallel)

NF-3250C-MJ

3 (parallel)

PFL-4400S DCL-4160K

RC9129

(*5)

VFA7-4160KP1

NRL-4350

(*6)

DGP600W-B3

[DGP600W-C3]

DGP600W-B4

[DGP600W-C4]

VFA7-4220KP1 PFL-4600S DCL-4220K

VFA7-4280KP1 PFL-4800S DCL-4280K

NRL-4600

NRL-4550

(*1): This filter needs to be wound 4 turns or more around with the input side power line. This filter can

be used for the output side in the same manner. For the wire whose size is 22 mm²or more, install

at least 4 filters in series. Round type (Model: RC5078) is also available.

(*2): PBR3-□□□□ indicates braking resistor.

(*3): Model in square brackets is fitted with top cover.

(*4): To use 200 V-75 kW or more or 400 V-110 kW or more inverter with an external braking resistor

(DGP600 series), installation of a dynamic braking drive circuit inside the inverter is required.

(*5): There is a case that this filter is unusable depending on the type or size of the cable to be used.

(*6): About this filter for inverter models of 90 kW or more, consult with our office

(*7): These reactors are usable for each of 200V class and 400V class.

(*8): Be sure to connect DC reactor to 200V-75kW or more or 400V-110kW or more inverter. (Not

necessary for DC input.)

(*9): When connecting DCL-2007 to VFA7-2004PL, 2007PL, 4007PL and 4015PL, the terminal of

DCL-2007 is processed so that the screw size of inverter’s main circuit terminal may be suited.

I-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. 5 Optional add-on cassettes

The following add-on cassette options are prepared for the inverter VF-A7.

※It can be applied to after CPU version “V300”.

■Table of optional add-on cassettes

Table of optional add-on cassettes

Option name

Function, purpose

Model

Remarks (*1)

This option compatible to sensor

vector control is usable for speed

control and position control by the

PG feedback function.

①Vector option

VEC001Z

unit

②Expansion TB

This option provides extended

terminal functions for use.

This option provides TOSLINE-

S20 for use.

ETB001Z

TLS001Z

TLF001Z

option unit

③S20 option unit

④F10M option

This option provides TOSLINE-

F10 for use

unit

SBP001Z For 75(132) kW or less(*3)

SBP002Z For 90(160) kW or more(*3)

Attachment for fitting add-on

cassette option to the inverter.

⑤Attachment

(*1):

(*2):

One can use two of Group A together with one of the Group B at a time. (Maximally 3 options)

To use 37 kW or more models in any of conditions described below, refer to 9.7 and execute the

preparation before attachment.

i ) install the vector option unit

ii) install the S20 option unit or the F10M option unit and execute PG feedback control

Inside ( ) indicates case of 400V class models.

(*3):

■Functions of optional add-on cassettes

①Vector option unit

Function

Description

･Consistent with line driver output encoder (Disconnection detection function is

also provided)

PG feedback

･Consistent with complementary/open-collector encoder (Pulse train speed

command)

･Max. pulse freq. 60kHz(2-phase), 120kHz(single-phase), Duty: 50±10%

5 V, 6 V, 12 V, 15 V DC, 160 mA or less

Detection of voltage drop in PG power supply line

Power supply for encoder

Voltage drop detection

Open-collector output/sink output (30 V DC, 50 mA or less)

Approximately 1 second after the main circuit power is turned on, this terminal is

connected with COM. In an error status, circuit between this terminal and COM is

open regardless of main circuit power supply.

Open-collector output/sink output (30 V DC, 50 mA or less)

When current exceeds the limiting range, this terminal is connected with COM.

With occurrence of an error, the cause of trip is output in 4-bit binary system. Error

is detected according to the open/closed status of the circuit between the open-

collector of each terminal and COM.

Standby signal output

OC pre-alarm

Alarm output (Error code 0, 1,

2, 3)

P24 power supply

+24 V DC power supply (200 mA or less) for driving external relay, etc.

Open-collector outputs of phase-A positioning pulse, phase-B positioning pulse,

phase-Z positioning pulse originating from the encoder built in the motor. (30 V DC,

50 mA or less)

PG feedback output

Outputs phase-A positioning pulse, phase-B positioning pulse, phase-Z positioning

pulse originating from the line drive output encoder built in the motor.

PG line driver output

±10 V analog command power Power supply for ±10 V analog voltage command. (Internal impedance: 500 Ω,

supply

for 1 kΩ resistor)

±10 V analog command input

±10 V programmable voltage command is input to this terminal.

Pulse train positioning commands for forward rotation and reverse rotation are

input to this terminal. This terminal is enabled only when it is set in the position

control mode or switched for position control.

Pulse train position control

command input

Encoder supply voltage check

To check encoder supply voltage.

I-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

②Expansion TB option unit

Function

Description

16-bit binary input

(12-bit binary)

Contact 4-digit BCD code input (3-digit

･Sink input

ON : 5 V DC or less (5 mA type)

OFF : 11 V DC or more, or 0.5 mA or less

･Source input

input

BCD code)

ON : 11 V DC, 2.5 mA or more (maximum 30 V DC)

OFF : 5 V DC or less, or 1.4 mA or less

･Current: 4 to 20 mA DC output (source output)

Maximum connectable resistance: 750 Ω

･Voltage: ±10 V DC output

Multifunction programmable

input (high-order 8 bits)

Multifunction programmable analog output

(current/voltage output switchable)

･1a, 1b contact output (double circuit)

Contact rating : 250 V AC, 2 A (cos φ = 1)

250 V AC, 1 A (cos φ = 0.4)

Multifunction programmable relay contact

output

30 V DC, 1 A

75 kW or less model (200V class)

Installation of optional add-on cassettes to 132 kW or less model (400V class)

■

To install optional add-on cassette(s), use the attachment and set the options on the right side

of the inverter. To attach the option(s), secure an enough space in the right side of the inverter.

・To install a cassette:

・To install two cassettes:

・To install three cassettes:

L = 48.5 mm or more

L = 73.5 mm or more

L = 98.5 mm or more

・No matter for cassettes number, L1 = 33.0 mm or more

Flexible connecting

board

＊

Optional add-

on cassettes

Optional add-

on cassettes

ア

タ

ッ

チ

hmメンenトt＊

＊: In a set with SBP001Z.

90 kW or more model (200V class)

Installation of optional add-on cassettes to 160 kW or more model (400V class)

■

To install optional add-on cassette(s), use the attachment and set the options on the right side

of the control panel. To attach the option(s), secure an enough space (L: 50 mm or more) in front

of the inverter.

Flexible connecting

board

＊

Option cover

＊

Optional add-

on cassettes

Option cover

＊

＊: In a set with SBP002Z.

I-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9. 6 Board options

Besides the optional add-on cassettes, such the board options as shown below are prepared for

the inverter VF-A7.

■Table of board options

Option name

Function, purpose

Model

Remarks

VEC002Z

(For complementary / open

collector type encoder)

Since this option is compatible to

vector option unit, it can be used

for speed control and torque

control by the PG feedback

function.

Cannot be

used together

with any

PG feedback

board

optional add-on

VEC003Z

(For line driver type encoder) cassettes.

■Functions of board options

Vector option unit

(optional add-on cassette)

PG feedback board

(board option)

Model

VEC001Z

VEC002Z

VEC003Z

Speed controlled operation

(150 % torque at zero speed, speed control range: 1:1000 [1000 ppr PG],

speed accuracy: ±0.02 % [50 Hz, basic digital input])

Torque controlled operation

Vector control with sensor

(torque control accuracy: ±10 % [torque control range: -100 to +100 %])

Position control command operation Available(pulse command)

Line driver system

Unavailable

(equivalent to 26LS31)

Complementary system

Open collector system

Line driver system

(equivalent to 26LS31)

PG system

Complementary system

Open collector system

60 kHz(2-phase), 120 kHz(single phase)

Maximum frequency of input pulse Maximum frequency is restricted depending on kind of encoder and wiring distance.

Pulse duty: 50±10 %

Length of PG wiring

Power supply for PG

100 m (complementary system)

5 V, 6 V, 12 V, 15 V

(switchable), 160 mAdc

100 m (complementary system)

30 m

12 V (fixed), 160 mAdc

5 V (fixed), 160 mAdc

Voltage drop compensation

for PG power supply

Sensor disconnection

detection/in running (in rotation)

Sensor disconnection

detection/in suspension

Available

Unavailable

Available

Unavailable

Available

(line driver system only)

Unavailable

10 V analog command input

Available

Unavailable

Multifunction programmable output 2 circuits (sink/source switchable)

Alarm output

4 circuits (sink/source switchable)

Detachable terminal board

(Phoenix)

Fixed terminal board (Phoenix) Fixed terminal board (Phoenix)

(equivalent to VFS7E control

terminal board)

Terminal board

(equivalent to VFS7E control

terminal board)

+ connector for VFV3 sensor

Connector wiring

(connector for VFV3 sensor)

PG wiring

Screw terminal

Unavailable

Screw terminal

Unavailable

VFV3 motor

Connection with other add-

on cassette option

Remarks

Available

VFV3 motor/standard

motor with sensor

Standard motor with sensor

(applied motor, expected)

■Installation of board option

　For installing a board option, fit the bracket to the right side of the inverter and plug the

connector of the option board into the connector jack of the control board.

Connector

Board option

Bracket

I-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9.7 Before installing optional add-on cassette or board option

When using optional add-on cassette(s) or a board option with a model 37kW or more, prepare

for installing according to explanation below.

In any case, check that all the power sources are OFF before opening the front cover.

Note) Do not open the front cover, unless 10 minutes has passed after the

power sources turned off and charge lamp is not lit.

Option name

Model

Reference section

9.7.1 Case 1

Vector option unit

VEC001Z

VEC002Z

VEC003Z

TLS001Z

TLF001Z

PG feed back board

S20 option unit

F10M option unit

9.7.1 Case 2

9.7.1 Case 3

Other than models above

9.7.1 Case 1

　Warning

1. Please extract wire-C from the

connector on board-B.

Board-B

2. Remove board-A(attached to the

control board) and wire-C from the

control board.

3. For using again in the future, keep

board-A and wire-C which were

removed.

Board-A

Wire-C

Control board

4. Attach the option according to

the instruction manual of each option.

The image after option attachment becomes as follows.

(Left: In the case optional add-on cassette, Right: In the case board option)

Mandatory

5. Switch on power supply and change the setup of the parameter  into .

Terminal block

Flexible connecting board

Board option

Optional

Connector

Control board

add-on

cassette

Connector

Control board

Note) Fix the board option with installation

stay and support screw.

Note)

Board-A, board-B and wire-C aim at the function of the speed search #2

among the auto-restart modes described in 6.13.1.

At case 1 or case 2-A, speed search #1 is performed. So, board-A, board-B

and wire-C are not needed in these cases.

I-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9.7.2 Case 2

Case 2-A. When PG feedback function is used

　　　Prepare for installing according to 9.7.1, 1 to 5.

Case 2-B. When PG feedback function is mot used

　　　Preparation is not needed.

　　　Note1) Attach flexible connecting board to the board-A (not to the control board).

The image after option attachment becomes as follow.

Flexible connecting board

Connector

Board-A

Optional

add-on

cassette

Control board

Wire-C

　　　Note2) Do not change the position of the bit switch for PG input (default setting is

without PG input) in the option unit (TLS001Z or TLM001Z). If you set at

with PG input position, auto-restart function(refer to 6.13.1) dose not work

correctly and over-current, overload, over-voltage, etc. trips may occur.

9.7.3 Case 3

Preparation is not needed.

Note) Attach flexible connecting board set with attachment (SBP001Z or SBP002Z)

to board-A (not control board).

Refer to attachment image in case 2-B.

I-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

（Ａ７　Ｖｅｒ．３１５）

10. Table of parameters

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

　1. Basic parameters (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Minimum

setup unit

Default Write during

setting

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

running

Automatic

0: Manual acceleration/deceleration

1: Automatic acceleration/deceleration

0:－(0 is always displayed.)

1: Automatic torque boost + auto-tuning

2: Sensorless vector control (speed) + auto-tuning

3: Automatic energy-saving + auto-tuning

0: Terminal block enabled

0000

－

Disabled

●/－

－

●

5.1

5.2



acceleration/deceleration

Automatic V/f mode setting

0001

0003

－

Disabled

●/－



1: Operating panel enabled

Operation command mode

selection

2: Common serial communication option enabled

3: Serial communication RS485 enabled

4: Communication add-on cassette option enabled

1: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

2: RR (volume/voltage input)

3: RX (voltage input)

4: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

5: Operating panel input

6: Binary/BCD input(optional)

7: Common serial communication option(FA01)

8: Serial communication RS485(FA05)

9: Communication add-on cassette option(FA07)

10: Up-down frequency

－

●/●

－/●

●

5.3



Speed setting mode

selection

0004

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●



11: Pulse input #1 (optional)

FM terminal meter

selection

FM terminal meter

adjustment

0005

0006

0～33

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

5.4





－

●/●

－/●

●/●

－/●

●

0:－

1: 50Hz standard setting

2: 60Hz standard setting

3: Factory default setting

4: Trip clear

5: Clearing accumulating operation time

6: Initialization of type form information

7: Memorization of user-defined parameters

8: Reset of user-defined parameters

Standard setting mode

selection

0007

－

Disabled

5.5



Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

* Minimum setup unit is 0.1 in case of 16-bit access.　　　Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●:valid, －:invalid)

　1. Basic parameters (2/2)

Vector control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

Forward/reverse selection

(At panel control only)

Acceleration time #1

Deceleration time #1

Maximum frequency

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

Base frequency #1

0: Forward,

1: Reverse

0.1()～6000 [s]

30.0～400.0 [Hz]

0.0～ [Hz]

0.0～ [Hz]

25.0 ～400.0 [Hz]

0: Constant torque

1: Variable torque mode



0008

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

5.6







0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0.01/0.01* See J-28 Enabled

0.01/0.01

●/●

Disabled ●/●

－

●

－

●

―

－

―

●

5.1.2

5.7

5.8

0.0

●/●

－

－/●

－

●/●





Enabled



●/●

－/●

5.9

－／－－／－－／－

●／－－／－－／－

－／－－／－－／－

●／－ ●／－－／－

－／● －／● －／－

－／● －／－－／●

2: Automatic torque boost

3: Sensorless vector control (speed)

4: Automatic torque boost + automatic energy-saving

5: Sensorless vector control (speed) + automatic energy-saving

6: V/f 5-points setting

7:Sensorless vector control (speed/torque switching)

8: PG feedback vector control (speed/torque switching)

9: PG feedback vector control (speed/position switching)

Motor control mode

selection





0015

0016

－

Disabled

5.10

5.12

Manual torque boost

0～30%

0.1/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

－

Overload

protection

Setting

Type

Overload stall

protect

not protect

protect

not protect

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

not stall

stall

Standard

motor

Selection of electronic

thermal protection

characteristics



0017

－

Disabled ●/●

●/●

－/●

●

5.13

VF motor

(special

motor)





0018

0019

Preset-speed #1

Preset-speed #2

～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

～ [Hz]

●/●













～

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

Preset-speed #3

Preset-speed #4

Preset-speed #5

Preset-speed #6

Preset-speed #7

～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

5.14

Setting of extended parameters listed on the

following pages

－

Extended parameter

－

●/●

－/●

●

4.1.2

4.1.3





Automatic edit function

To search parameters different from default value

●/●

－/●

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　2. Extended parameters

[1] Frequency signal

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No.

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

communication) setting

running







0100

0101

0102

Low-speed signal output frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

Speed reach setting frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

Speed reach detection band 0.0～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

0.0

2.5

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.1.1

6.1.2

[2] Input signal selection

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running







0103

0105

0106

ST (standby) signal selection 0: Standard, 1: Always ON, 2: Interlock with F/R terminal

Priority selection (both F-CC, R-CC are ON) 0: Reverse, 1: Stop

Priority setting of input terminal 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

0: None

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.2.1

6.2.2

6.2.3

1: 12-bit binary input

2: 16-bit binary input

3: 3-digit BCD input

Binary/BCD signal selection

4: 4-digit BCD input



0107

0108

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

※

(Expansion TB option unit)

5: Reverse 12-bit binary input

6: Reverse 16-bit binary input

7: Reverse 3-digit BCD input

8: Reverse 4-digit BCD input



Up-down frequency

0～7

1/1

●/●

－/－

●

※

[3] Terminal function selection (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No.

communication) setting

running























0110

0111

0112

0113

0114

0115

0116

0117

0118

0119

0120

Always active function selection 0～135

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.3.1

7.2.1

Input terminal selection #1 (F)

Input terminal selection #2 (R)

Input terminal selection #3 (ST)

0～135

2(F)

4(R)

6(ST)

8(RES) Disabled

10(S1) Disabled

12(S2) Disabled

14(S3) Disabled

16(S4) Disabled

Input terminal selection #4 (RES) 0～135

Input terminal selection #5 (S1) 0～135

Input terminal selection #6 (S2) 0～135

Input terminal selection #7 (S3) 0～135

Input terminal selection #8 (S4) 0～135

Input terminal selection #9 (B8) 0～135

Disabled

Input terminal selection #10 (B9)

0～135

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[3] Terminal function selection (2/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running



























0121

0122

0123

0124

0125

0126

0130

0131

0132

0133

0134

0135

0136

Input terminal selection #11 (B10)

Input terminal selection #12 (B11)

Input terminal selection #13 (B12)

Input terminal selection #14 (B13)

Input terminal selection #15 (B14)

Input terminal selection #16 (B15)

Output terminal selection #1 (OUT1) 0～119

Output terminal selection #2 (OUT2) 0～119

Output terminal selection #3　(FL) 0～119

Output terminal selection #4 (R1)

Output terminal selection #5 (R2)

0～135

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

7.2.1

7.2.2

4(LOW) Disabled

6(RCH) Disabled

10(FL) Disabled

0～119

Disabled

Output terminal selection #6 (OUT3) 0～119

Output terminal selection #7 (OUT4) 0～119

[4] Terminal response time setup

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running









































0140

0141

0142

0143

0144

0145

0150

0151

0152

0153

0154

0155

0156

0160

0161

0162

0163

0164

0165

0166

Input terminal #1 response time(F)

Input terminal #2 response time(R)

Input terminal #3 response time(ST) 2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

Input terminal #4 response time(RES)

Input terminal #5-#8 response time

Input terminal #9-#16 response time 2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

Output terminal #1 delay time (OUT1)

Output terminal #2 delay time (OUT2)

Output terminal #3 delay time (FL)

Output terminal #4 delay time 2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

Output terminal #5 delay time

Output terminal #6 delay time

Output terminal #7 delay time

Output terminal #1 holding time (OUT1)

Output terminal #2 holding time (OUT2)

Output terminal #3 holding time (FL)

Output terminal #4 holding time 2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

Output terminal #5 holding time

Output terminal #6 holding time

2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

(*1)

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

7.2.3

2 to 200 [ms] (in steps of 2.5 [ms])

Output terminal #7 holding time

(*1) The minimum setting unit is 1 ms, but that of response time is 2.5 ms. Input the value which omitted below the decimal point of a multiple of 2.5.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[5] Basic parameters #2

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

25.0～400.0 [Hz]

0.0～600.0 [V]

0.0～30.0 [%]

Constant section

communication) setting

running





























0170

0171

0172

0173

0174

0175

0176

0177

0178

0179

0180

0181

0182

0183

Base frequency #2

Base frequency voltage #2

Manual torque boost #2

Motor overload protection level #2 10～100 [%]

Base frequency #3

Base frequency voltage #3

Manual torque boost #3

Motor overload protection level #3 10～100 [%]

Base frequency #4

Base frequency voltage #4

Manual torque boost #4

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.1

60.0

Enabled

See J-28 Enabled

0.1/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

－

●

6.4.1

※

－

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.1

100.0

60.0

Enabled

See J-28 Enabled

25.0～400.0 [Hz]

0.0～600.0 [V]

0.0～30.0 [%]

－

0.1/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

－

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.1

100

60.0

Enabled

See J-28 Enabled

25.0～400.0 [Hz]

0.0～600.0 [V]

0.0～30.0 [%]

－

0.1/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

－

Motor overload protection level #4 10～100 [%]

Motor switching mode selection 0: standard, 1: customized

V/f adjustment coefficient

1/0.01

100

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

0～255

1/1

※

[6] V/f 5-point setting

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





















0190

0191

0192

0193

0194

0195

0196

0197

0198

0199

V/f 5-point setting VF1 frequency 0～400 [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting VF1 voltage 0～100 [%]

V/f 5-point setting VF2 frequency 0～400 [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting VF2 voltage 0～100 [%]

V/f 5-point setting VF3 frequency 0～400 [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting VF3 voltage 0～100 [%]

V/f 5-point setting VF4 frequency 0～400 [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting VF4 voltage 0～100 [%]

V/f 5-point setting VF5 frequency 0～400 [Hz]

V/f 5-point setting VF5 voltage 0～100 [%]

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.0

Disabled

－

●

6.5

0.1/0.01

0.0

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[7] Speed/torque reference gain/bias setup (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

0: 

1: 



0200

Reference priority selection

VI/II reference point #1

VI/II reference point #1 frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

VI/II reference point #2 0～100 [%]

VI/II reference point #2 frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

2:  priority (*1)

3:  priority (*2)

4: / switching

0～100 [%]

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.6.1























































0201

0202

0203

0204

0205

0206

0207

0208

0209

0210

0211

0212

0213

0214

0215

0216

0217

0218

0219

0220

0221

0222

0223

0224

0225

0226

0227

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

20.0

0. 0

100

80.0

100

1.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

－

●

－

●

－

●

7.3.2

6.21.1

6.61

6.6.1

7.2.4

7.3.1

6.21.1

7.3.3

6.21.1

※

VI/II reference point #1 rate

VI/II reference point #2 rate

-250～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

●/●

－

1/0.01

－

Speed setting mode selection #2 Same as  (1 to 11)

  switching frequency 0.1～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

－

Analog input filter

RR reference point #1

0(Disabled) to 3(Max. filter capacity)

0～100 [%]

●/●

－

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

RR reference point #1 frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

RR reference point #2 0～100 [%]

RR reference point #2 frequency 0.0～ [Hz]

RR reference point #1 rate

RR reference point #2 rate

RX reference point #1

RX reference point #1 frequency -～ [Hz] (*3)

RX reference point #2 -100～100 [%]

RX reference point #2 frequency -～ [Hz] (*3)

RX reference point #1 rate

RX reference point #2 rate

RX2 reference point #1

RX2 reference point #1 frequency -～ [Hz] (*3)

RX2 reference point #2 -100～100 [%]

RX2 reference point #2 frequency -～ [Hz] (*3)

RX2 reference point #1 rate -250～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

RX2 reference point #2 rate -250～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

0.0

100

80.0

100

0.0

100

80.0

100

●/●

－

0～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

-100～100 [%]

●/●

－

●/●

－

0～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

-100～100 [%]

●/●

－

0.0

100

80.0

※

●/●

－

※

●/●

100

※

(*1): When setup frequency(signal set up by ) is  or more, signal set up by  is accepted, When setup frequency is lower than , the inverter runs under the signal of .

(*2): When setup frequency(signal set up by ) is  or more, signal set up by  is accepted, When setup frequency is lower than , the inverter runs under the signal of .

(*3): Adjustment range is -327.68～327.67 [Hz] in case of 16-bit access.

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[7] Speed/torque reference gain/bias setup (2/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





















0228

0229

0230

0231

0232

0233

0234

0235

0236

0237

BIN reference point #1

-100～100 [%]

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

Enabled

●/●

－

●

※

BIN reference point #1 frequency -～ [Hz] (*1)

BIN reference point #2 -100～100 [%]

BIN reference point #2 frequency -～ [Hz] (*1)

BIN reference point #1 rate

BIN reference point #2 rate

Pulse reference point #1

Pulse reference point #1 frequency -～ [Hz] (*1)

Pulse reference point #2

Pulse reference point #2 frequency -～ [Hz] (*1)

0.0

100

80.0

100

0.0

100

80.0

●/●

－

-250～250 [%] (For torque control, etc.)

-100～100 [%]

●/●

－

-100～100 [%]

－

(*1): Adjustment range is -327.68～327.67 [Hz] in case of 16-bit access.

[8] Operation frequency

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running











0240

0241

0242

0243

0244

Start-up frequency

Run frequency

Run frequency hysteresis

Stop frequency

0.0～10.0 [Hz]

0.0～ [Hz]

0.0～30.0 [Hz]

0.0～5.0 [Hz]

0.01/0.01

0.1

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.7.1

6.7.2

6.7.1

6.7.3

0 Hz dead band frequency

[9] DC injection braking

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running













0250

0251

0252

0253

0254

0255

DC injection braking start frequency 0.0～120.0 [Hz]

DC injection braking current 0.0～100.0 [%]

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.01

－

0.0

50.0

1.0

Enabled

Disabled

●/●

－/●

－

●

6.8.1

6.8.2

6.8.3

DC injection braking time

0.0～10.0 [s]

Forward/reverse DC braking priority control 0: OFF, 1: ON

Motor shaft fixing control

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

－

Zero-speed stop mode selection 0: Standard(DC injection breaking), 1: 0Hz command

[10] Jogging operation

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





0260

Jog run frequency

Jog stop control

0.0～20.0 [Hz]

0: Deceleration stop

1: Coast stop

0.01/0.01

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.9

0261

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

2: DC injection braking stop

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[11] Jumper frequency

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running















0270

0271

0272

0273

0274

0275

0276

Jump frequency #1

Jump frequency band #1

Jump frequency #2

Jump frequency band #2

Jump frequency #3

Jump frequency band #3

0.0～ [Hz]

0.0～30.0 [Hz]

0.0～ [Hz]

0.0～30.0 [Hz]

0.0～ [Hz]

0.0～30.0 [Hz]

0.01/0.01

－

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.10

Object of jump frequency process 0: Process amount, 1: Output frequency

[12] Preset speed operation frequency (8- to 15-stage speed)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

















0287

0288

0289

0290

0291

0292

0293

0294

Preset-speed #8

～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

5.14

Preset-speed #9

Preset-speed #10

Preset-speed #11

Preset-speed #12

Preset-speed #13

Preset-speed #14

Preset-speed #15

[13] PWM carrier frequency

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

communication) setting running

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.5～15.0(8.0, 5.0) [kHz] (*1)

Constant section



0300

PWM carrier frequency

0.1/0.001 See J-28 Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.12

(*1)Upper limits differ by applicable motor capacity. For details, refer to 6.12.

Carrier frequency is automatically limited to less than 10kHz when operation frequency is more than 130Hz.

[14] Tripless intensification setup (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

communication) setting

running

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled(at power failure),

2: Enabled(at ST ON/OFF), 3: Enabled(1+2)





0301

0302

Auto-restart

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.13.1

6.13.2

Regenerative power ride-through

control / Deceleration stop

Retry selection

0: OFF, 1: ON, 2:ON(Deceleration stop)

Enabled

●/●

－/－





0303

0304

0: Disabled, 1 to 10 times

Dynamic braking mode selection 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled/overload detection enabled

－

●/●

－/●

●

6.13.3

6.13.4

See J-28 Enabled

0: Enabled, 1: Disabled,

2: Enabled (Forced quick deceleration)





0305

0306

Over-voltage stall protection

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.13.5

6.13.6

Base frequency voltage #1

(output voltage adjustment)

0.0～600.0 [V]

0.1/0.1

See J-28 Enabled

●/●

－/●

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[14] Tripless intensification setup (2/2)

Vector control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

communication) setting running

V/f

Reference

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

0: without voltage compensation (limitless output voltage)

1: with voltage compensation (limitless output voltage)

2: without voltage compensation (limited output voltage)

3: with voltage compensation (limited output voltage)

This parameter is changeable,

Disabled but significant setting value is

fixed to 1 in vector control.

Base frequency voltage

(Voltage compensation)



0307

－

１

●

6.13.6







0308

0309

0310

Dynamic braking resistance 1.0～1000 [Ω]

Dynamic braking resistor capacity 0.01～600.0 [kW]

Ride-through time / Deceleration time 0.0～320.0 [s]

0.1/0.1

See J-28 Disabled

●/●

－/－

－/●

－/－

●

6.13.4

6.13.2

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Disabled

0.1/0.01

2.0

Enabled

0: Permitted, 1: Reverse run prohibited,2: Forward run prohibited,

3: Direction designated by command permitted



0311

Reverse-run prohibition

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

6.13.7









0312

0313

0314

0315

Auto-restart adjustment #1

Auto-restart adjustment #2

Auto-restart mode

0.50～2.50

0～4

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

●/●

●/－

●/●

－/－

●/－

－/－

●

6.13.1

1/1

See J-28 Disabled

Disabled

Auto-restart adjustment #3

0～9

[15] Drooping control

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running















0320

0321

0322

0323

0324

0325

0326

Drooping gain

Speed at drooping gain 0%

Speed at drooping gain  0.0～320.0 [Hz] (Enabled if  = 7, 8 or 9)

Drooping insensitive torque band 0～100 [%] (Enabled if  = 7, 8 or 9)

Output filter for drooping

Load inertia (Acc/Dec torque) 0～1000

Load torque filter (Acc/Dec torque) 0.0～199.9, 200.0:without filter

0: Standard, 1: Acc/dec torque removal

0～100 [%] (Enabled if  = 7, 8 or 9)

0.0～320.0 [Hz] (Enabled if  = 7, 8 or 9)

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.1

0.1/0.1

Enabled

●/●

－

6.14

※

60.0

100.0

1.0

0.1～200.0 [rad/s] (Enabled if  = 7, 8 or 9)

200.0

※



0327

Drooping reference selection 2: Internal torque standard

3: Acc/dec torque removal (internal torque standard)

－

Enabled

●/●

－

※

[16] Functions for lift (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





















0330

0331

0332

0333

0334

0335

0336

0337

0338

0339

Light-load high-speed operation

Light-load high-speed operation switching lower limit frequency 30.0～ [Hz]

Light-load high-speed operation load waiting time

Light-load high-speed operation load detection time

Light-load high-speed operation heavy load detection time 0.0～10.0 [s]

Switching load torque current during forward run 0～250 [%]

Heavy load torque during acceleration in forward direction 0～250 [%]

Heavy load torque during fixed speed in forward direction 0～250 [%]

Switching load torque current during reverse run

Heavy load torque during acceleration in reverse direction 0～250 [%]

0～10

－

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.1

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－

●

※

40.0

1.0

5.0

150

100

0.0～10.0 [s]

0～250 [%]

150

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[16] Functions for lift (2/2)

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control







0340

0341

0342

Heavy load torque during fixed speed in reverse direction 0～250 [%]

100

80.0

Enabled

Disabled

●/●

－

●

※

Automatic light-load high-speed operation frequency

Light-load detection mode

30.0～ [Hz]

0～255

0.01/0.01

1/1

[17] Commercial/inverter switching function

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

communication) setting

running

Disabled

Enabled

Output signal selection of

commercial power/inverter

switching

0: OFF, 1: Automatic switching in case of trip

2: Commercial power switching frequency setting enabled

3: Both (1+2)



0354

－

●/●

－

●

6.16

Commercial power/inverter

switching frequency

Inverter side switching waiting time Model dependent～10.00 [s]

Commercial power side

switching waiting time







0355

0356

0357

0～ [Hz]

0.01/0.01

60.0

●/●

－

●

6.16

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

0.37～10.00 [s]

0.01/0.01

0.1/0.01

0.62

2.0

Enabled

Commercial power switching

frequency holding time



0358

0.1～10.0 [s]

●/●

－

●

6.16

[18] PID control

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running















0360

0361

0362

0363

0364

0365

0366

Signal selection of PID control 0: PID control disabled, 1: VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

3.3

Delay filter

0～255

Proportional (P) gain

Integral (I) gain

PID deviation upper limit

PID deviation lower limit

Differential (D) gain

0.01～100.0

0～50 [%]

0.00～2.55

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

0.1

[19] Speed feedback/positioning control

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





0367

Number of PG input pulses

1～9999

1: Single-phase input, 2: Two-phase input

1/1

500

Disabled

－/●

－

※

0368

Number of PG input phases 3: Single-phase input (Speed command),

4: Two-phase input (Speed command)

－

Disabled

－/●

－

※











0369

0370

0371

0372

0373

PG disconnection detection 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

－

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

1000

4.0

100

800

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

－/●

－

－/●

－

－/●

－

※

Electronic gear

100 to 4000 pulses/rotation

Position loop gain

0.0～100.0

Positioning completion range 1～4000

Frequency limit at position control 1～8000 [Hz/s], 8001: disabled

－

1/1

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[20] Vector control

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control













0374

0375

0376

0377

0378

0379

Current control proportional gain 1.0～1000

Current control integral gain 1.0～1250

Speed loop proportional gain 3.2～1000

0.1/0.1

－

209.1

Disabled

●/●

－/－

●/●

－

－/●

－

※

See J-28 Disabled

See J-28 Enabled

1.00

Speed loop integral gain

0.1～200. 0 [rad/s]

－

Motor counter data selection 0～5

Disabled

Speed loop parameter ratio

0.01～10.00 [s]

0.01/0.01

－

[21] Preset-speed operation mode

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Non-mode preset speed

1: Preset speed by mode

0: Forward run

Constant section

communication) setting

running

Preset-speed operation

mode



0380

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

5.14

+1: Reverse run

+2: Selection of acc/dec switching #1

+4: Selection of acc/dec switching #2

+8: Selection of V/f switching #1

+16: Selection of V/f switching #2

+32: Selection of torque limit switching #1

+64: Selection of torque limit switching #2



0381

Preset-speed #1 control mode

－

Disabled

●/●

●

5.14



































0382

0383

0384

0385

0386

0387

0388

0389

0390

0391

0392

0393

0394

0395

0396

0397

0398

Preset-speed #2 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #3 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #4 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #5 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #6 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #7 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #8 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #9 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #10 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #11control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #12 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #13 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #14 control mode Ditto

Preset-speed #15 control mode Ditto

－

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－

●

－

5.14

6.21.2

※

－

Torque reference filter #2

10.0～199.9, 200.0(No filters)

1/0.1

0.1/0.1

200.0

See J-28 Enabled

－/－

－

Speed loop proportional gain #2 3.2～1000

－/●

Speed loop integral gain #2

10.0～200. 0 [rad/s]

※

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

*：To be dealt as an index in case of 16-bit access.　　　Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●:valid，－:invalid）

[22] Motor constant

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

0:Without auto-tuning (internal table)

1:Motor constant initialization (0 after execution)

2:Automatic tuning execution (0 after execution)

0.00～2.55



0400

Auto-tuning

Slip frequency gain

－

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－/●

－

6.20

















0401

0402

0403

0404

0405

0410

0411

0412

0.01/0.01

0.01/0.01* See J-28 Disabled

0.1/0.1

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Disabled

1/1 Disabled

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Disabled

0.60

●/－

●/●

－

－/●

－

6.20

Motor constant #1 (primary resistance) 0.00～100000 [ｍΩ] (*1)

Motor constant #2 (secondary resistance) 0.00～100000 [ｍΩ] (*1)

Motor constant #3 (exciting inductance) 0.0～6500 [mH]

Motor constant #4 (load inertia moment) 0.0～100.0

●/●

See J-28 Disabled

1.0 Enabled

Motor constant #5 (leak inductance) 0.00～650. 0 [mH]

Number of motor poles

Rated capacity of motor

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16

0.10～[Model Dependent]

0: Toshiba standard motor #1

1: Toshiba VF motor

2: Toshiba V3 motor

3: Toshiba standard motor #2

4: Other motors

0: Prohibited 1: Valid for sensorless vector

2: Valid for vector with PG



0413

Motor type

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

－

V/f

6.20



0414

Auto-tuning prohibition

●/●

－/●

[23] Torque control

Vector control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

communication) setting

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Constant section

cation No

running

1: VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2(optional), 5: Panel input,

6: Binary/BCD input(optional), 7: Common serial

communication option, 8: Serial communication RS485,

9: Communication add-on cassette option



0420

Torque reference selection

Torque reference filter

－

Enabled

－

●/●

－

6.21.1



























0421

0422

0423

0424

0425

0426

0427

0428

0429

0430

0431

0432

0433

10.0～199.9, 200.0(without filter)

0.1/0.1

－

200.0

80.0

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

●/●

－

－/－

－

－/●

－

6.21.2

6.21.4

6.21.3

3.3.2

6.21.3

Selection of synchronized torque bias input 0: Invalid, 1 to 9 (Same as )

Selection of tension torque bias input 0: Invalid, 1 to 9 (Same as )

Load sharing gain input selection 0: Invalid, 1 to 9 (Same as )

Forward speed limit input selection 0: Invalid, 1: VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2(optional), 5: 

Forward speed limit input level 0.0～ [Hz]

Reverse speed limit input selection 0: Invalid, 1: VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2(optional), 5: 

Reverse speed limit input level 0.0～ [Hz]

Torque reference mode selection 0: Fixed direction, 1:F/R permitted

●/●

－

－/●

－

0.01/0.01

－

0.01/0.01

－

Speed limit (torque

＝

0) reference 0: Invalid, 1: VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2(optional), 5: 

Speed limit(torque＝0) level 0.0～ [Hz]

Speed limit(torque＝0) band 0.0～ [Hz]

－

0.01/0.01

0.0

0.20

－

Speed limit(torque

＝

0) recovery time 0.00～2.50

When adjustment value is 10Ω(10000mΩ) or more, 1000(in case of 10000mΩ) and  blink alternately.

When adjustment value is 100Ω(10000mΩ), 1000 and  blink alternately.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[24] Torque limit

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





















0440

0441

0442

0443

0444

0445

0446

0447

0448

0449

Selection of power running torque limit #1 1 :VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2, 5: 

Power running torque limit #1 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Selection of regenerative torque limit #1 1 :VI/II, 2: RR, 3: RX, 4: RX2, 5: 

Regenerative torque limit #1 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Power running torque limit #2 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Regenerative torque limit #2 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Power running torque limit #3 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Regenerative torque limit #3 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Power running torque limit #4 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

Regenerative torque limit #4 0～249.9 [%], 250: Invalid

－

0.1/0.01

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.22

250.0

0.1/0.01

250.0

0: Power-running/regenerative torque limit

1: Positive/negative torque limit

0: Standard, 1: without speed cooperation









0450

0451

0452

0453

Torque limit mode (polarity)

－

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

6.22

※

Torque limit mode

Continuous stall trip detection

time during power running

●／●

－

0.0～1.0 [s]

0.1/0.01

－

0.0

－

Stall prevention during regeneration 0: Stall, 1: Stall is prevented

－

[25] Speed/torque reference gain/bias setup #2(1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

communication) setting

running

Enabled

●／－

●／●

－

―

●





0454

Current differential gain

High-speed magnetic field

control gain

0.00～327.6

0.01/0.01

123.0

16.38

－

●／●

―／●

0455

1.64～327.6

High-speed magnetic field

rate-of-change limitation

gain

●／●

―／●

●



0456

1.64～327.6

0.01/0.01

163.8

Enabled

－

●／●

●／―

●／●

●／―

―／●

―

●

―



















0470

0471

0472

0473

0474

0475

0476

0477

0480

VI/II reference bias

VI/II reference gain

RR reference bias

RR reference gain

RX reference bias

RX reference gain

RX2 reference bias

RX2 reference gain

0～255

1/1

156

100

164

―

Enabled

－

―

Exciting strengthening coefficient 0～255

0: Enabled, 1: Applied by  setting,

Over-excitation cooperation 2: Enabled (over current limited),

3: Applied by  setting (over current limited)

●／―

●／●

●／―

●／●

―

－





0481

0482

－

Enabled

－

Modulation rate control

―／●

80.0～300.0 [%]

0.1/0.01

90.0

margin (current control)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[25] Speed/torque reference gain/bias setup #2(2/2)

* Minimum setup unit is 0.1 in case of 16-bit access.　　　Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●:valid, －:invalid)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control

Modulation rate control

margin (voltage control)

Modulation rate control

margin (V/f control)

Stall cooperation gain at field

weakening zone

●／―

―

－

●







0483

80.0～300.0 [%]

0.1/0.01

1/1

105.0

128

Enabled

－

0484

0485

80.0～300.0 [%]

Enabled

●／●

―／●

0～255

●／●

―／●

―





0486

0487

Exciting starting rate

Compensation coefficient for iron loss 0～255

1.64～327.6

0.01/0.01

1/1

163.8

Enabled

－

Voltage compensation

coefficient for dead time

Dead time compensation

●／●

―／●

●



0488

0.00～327.6

0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

0.01/0.01 See J-28 Enabled

－

●／●

―／●

●





0489

0490

－

0.01/0.001

0.00

Enabled

－

Dead time compensation (bias time) -32.7～32.7

Current / voltage control

switching frequency

●／―

―



0491

10.0～60.0 [Hz]

0.1/0.01

40.0

Enabled

－

[26] Secondary acceleration/deceleration

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

communication) setting running

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No









0500

0501

0502

0503

Acceleration time #2

Deceleration time #2

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #1 0: Linear, 1: S-pattern #1, 2: S-pattern #2

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #2 0: Linear, 1: S-pattern #1, 2: S-pattern #2

1: Acceleration/deceleration #1

0.1()～6000 [s]

0.01/0.01* See J-28 Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.23.2

6.23.1

6.23.2

－

Enabled

Acceleration/deceleration

#1,2,3,4 selection

2: Acceleration/deceleration #2

3: Acceleration/deceleration #3

4: Acceleration/deceleration #4



0504

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.23.2

























0505

0506

0507

0508

0510

0511

0512

0513

0514

0515

0516

0517

Acc/dec switching frequency #1 0.0～ [Hz]

S-pattern lower-limit adjustment amount 0～50 [%]

S-pattern upper-limit adjustment amount 0～50 [%]

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01*

0.01/0.01* See J-28 Enabled

－

0.01/0.01

0.01/0.01* See J-28 Enabled

－

0.01/0.01

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.23.2

6.23.1

Acc/dec time lower limit

Acceleration time #3

Deceleration time #3

0.01～10.00 [s]

0.1()～6000 [s]

0.10

6.23.3

6.23.2

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #3 0: Linear, 1: S-pattern #1, 2: S-pattern #2

Acc/dec switching frequency #2 0.0～ [Hz]

0.0

Enabled

Acceleration time #4

Deceleration time #4

0.1()～6000 [s]

Acceleration/deceleration pattern #4 0: Linear, 1: S-pattern #1, 2: S-pattern #2

Acc/dec switching frequency #3 0.0～ [Hz]

0.0

Enabled

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[27] Pattern run (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

0: Patterned operation canceled during stop

1: Patterned operation continued during stop

Constant section

communication) setting

running





0520

0521

Pattern run selection

Pattern run mode

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

6.24

●/●









































































0530

0531

0532

0533

0534

0535

0536

0537

0538

0540

0541

0542

0543

0544

0545

0546

0547

0548

0550

0551

0552

0553

0554

0555

0556

0557

0558

0560

0561

0562

0563

0564

0565

0566

0567

0568

Cycle number of pattern group #1 1～254, 255:∞

Pattern group #1 selection #1 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #2 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #3 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #4 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #5 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #6 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #7 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #1 selection #8 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Cycle number of pattern group #2 1～254, 255:∞

Pattern group #2 selection #1 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #2 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #3 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #4 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #5 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #6 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #7 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #2 selection #8 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Cycle number of pattern group #3 1～254, 255:∞

Pattern group #3 selection #1 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #2 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #3 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #4 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #5 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #6 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #7 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #3 selection #8 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Cycle number of pattern group #4 1～254, 255:∞

Pattern group #4 selection #1 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #2 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #3 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #4 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #5 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #6 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #7 0: Skip, 1 to 15

Pattern group #4 selection #8 0: Skip, 1 to 15

1/1

－

1/1

－

1/1

－

1/1

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

6.24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[27] Pattern run (2/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control

0: Operation time in second after start of operation

1: Operation time in minute after start of operation

2: Operation time in second after attainment of frequency

3: Operation time in minute after attainment of frequency

4: Infinite (continued until stop command is entered)

5: Continue until next step command

Preset-speed #1 operation

continuation mode



0570

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

6.24





























0571

0572

0573

0574

0575

0576

0577

0578

0579

0580

0581

0582

0583

0584

Preset-speed #2 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #3 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #4 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #5 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #6 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #7 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #8 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #9 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #10 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #11 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #12 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #13 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #14 operation continuation mode Ditto

Preset-speed #15 operation continuation mode Ditto

－

Disabled

●/●

－

●

6.24

1～8000 [s] / [min]

(The unit depends on )



0585

Preset-speed #1 operation time

1/1

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.24





























0586

0587

0588

0589

0590

0591

0592

0593

0594

0595

0596

0597

0598

0599

Preset-speed #2 operation time

Preset-speed #3 operation time

Preset-speed #4 operation time

Preset-speed #5 operation time

Preset-speed #6 operation time

Preset-speed #7 operation time

Preset-speed #8 operation time

Preset-speed #9 operation time

Preset-speed #10 operation time

Preset-speed #11 operation time

Preset-speed #12 operation time

Preset-speed #13 operation time

Preset-speed #14 operation time

Preset-speed #15 operation time

Ditto

1/1

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[28] Protection functions

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running





0600

0601

Motor overload protection level #1 10～100 [%]

1/0.01

100

150

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

5.13

6.25.2

Stall prevention level

0～199 [%], 200: Disabled

0: Cleared if power is turned off







0602

0603

0604

Selection of inverter trip holding

－

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.25.3

6.25.4

1: Held even if power is turned off

0: Coast stop 1: Deceleration stop

2: Emergency DC injection braking stop

3: Coast stop without FL output

4: Deceleration stop without FL output

5: Emergency DC injection braking without FL output

Emergency stop

－

Emergency DC injection

braking control time

0.0～10.0 [s]

0.1/0.01

0.1







0605

0606

0607

Output phase failure detection 0: Disabled, 1～5: Enabled

Overload reduction start-up frequency 0.0～30.0 [Hz]

Motor 150%-overload time limit 10～2400 [s]

－

0.01/0.01

1/1

6.0

600

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

※

5.13

Relay injection timing for

rush-current suppression



0608

0.3～2.5 [s]

0.1/0.01

0.3

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

※









0609

0610

0611

0612

Mode of rush-current suppression relay 0: Standard, 1: in relation to ST

－

1/0.01

1/1

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

※

Low current trip

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

6.25.7

Low current detection level

Low current detection time

Detection of output short-

circuit during start-up

0～100 [%]

0～255 [s]

0: Standard



0613

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.25.8

1: Only one time at power injection or at first start after reset

Adjustment of detection pulse for

output short-circuit during start-up

Over-torque trip

Over-torque detection level

during power running

Over-torque detection level

during regeneration







0614

0615

0616

1～100 [μs]

1/1

－

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.25.8

6.25.9

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

0～250 [%]

1/0.01

150

0～250 [%]



0617

1/0.01

150

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.25.9













0618

0620

0621

0622

0623

0624

Over-torque detection time

Cooling fan control mode

Cumulative operation time alarm setting

0.1～999.9 [×100h]

Abnormal speed detection filter 0.01～100.0 [s] (*1)

Over-speed detection frequency range 0: Disabled, 0.1～30.0 [Hz]

Speed drop detection frequency range 0: Disabled, 0.1～30.0 [Hz]

0.0～100.0 [s]

0: Automatic, 1: Always ON

0.1/0.01

－

0.1/0.1

0.01/0.01

0.5

175.0

10.00

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●/●

－/－

－/●

－/－

●

－/－

－

6.25.9

6.2510

6.25.11

※

0.0

Over-voltage stall protection

level (high response)



0625

50～250 [%]

1/0.01

135

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.13.5















0626

0627

0628

0629

0630

0631

0632

Over-voltage stall protection level 50～250 [%]

1/0.01

－

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.1/0.01

0.1/0.1

0.01/0.01

130

0.03

0.0

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

●/●

－

●

－

●

6.13.5

6.25.13

6.25.14

6.25.15

※

Under-voltage trip mode

Under-voltage detection time 0.00～10.00 [s]

Under-voltage stall level 50～100 [%]

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

●/●

－

－/●

System-supporting sequence(B-timer) 0.0: Invalid, 0.1～10.0 [s]

Position deviation limit

0.1～6553

※

Brake release inhibition time after run 0.00: Setting of  is valid, 0.01～2.50 [s]

0.00

●/●

The trip selection at the VI/II

0: Invalid, 1～100 [%]

low-level input



0633

1/1

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

※

(*1): Set a time longer than the acceleration/deceleration time.

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[29] Special analog input

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

cation No

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Invalid，1: VI/II，2: RR

Constant section

communication) setting

running

Acceleration/deceleration

base frequency adjustment



0650

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.26









0651

0652

0653

0654

Upper-limit frequency adjustment 0: Invalid，1: VI/II，2: RR

Acceleration time adjustment 0: Invalid，1: VI/II，2: RR

Deceleration time adjustment 0: Invalid，1: VI/II，2: RR

Manual torque boost adjustment 0: Invalid，1: VI/II，2: RR

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.26

[30] Over-ride

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

0: Disabled

1: VI (voltage input)/II (current input)

2: RR (volume/voltage input)

3: RX (voltage input)

4: RX2 (voltage input) (optional)

5: Operating panel input

6: Binary/BCD input

7: Common serial communication option(FA01)

8: Serial communication RS485(FA05)

9: Communication add-on cassette option(FA07)

10: Up-down frequency

Over-ride addition input

selection





0660

0661

－

Enabled

●/●

－

●

6.27

11: Pulse input #1 (optional)

Over-ride multiplication input selection 0: Disabled,1: VI/II,2: RR,3: RX,4: RX2,5: 

●/●

－

●

6.27

[31] Meter output (1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

2(output

current)



0670

AM terminal meter selection

AM terminal meter adjustment

Optional analog terminal #1 meter selection 0～32

Optional analog terminal #1 meter adjustment

Optional analog terminal #2 meter selection 0～32

Optional analog terminal #2 meter adjustment

FP terminal meter selection

FP terminal meter adjustment

0～32

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

5.4





















0671

0672

0673

0674

0675

0676

0677

0678

0679

0680

－

3.84

0.0

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

5.4

※

－

※

－

0～32

1.00～43.20

－

※

6.28.3

※

0.01/0.001

0.1/0.1

－

Optional analog terminal #1 meter offset -10.0～60.0

Optional analog terminal #2 meter offset -10.0～60.0

Optional analog terminal sign selection

※

0～3

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[31] Meter output (2/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control



～



0690

～

0697

AM/FM output parameter for adjustment

－

[32] Control panel parameters

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running











0700

0701

0702

0703

0704

Prohibition of parameter setting 0: Allowed，1: Prohibited

Current/voltage display mode 0: [%], 1: [A] or [V]

Frequency free unit magnification 0.00: OFF, 0.01～200.0

Decimal place number of frequency 0: 1 [Hz], 1: 0.1 [Hz], 2: 0.01 [Hz]

－

0.00

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.29.1

6.29.2

6.29.3

6.29.4

0.01/0.01

－

Decimal place number of acc/dec time

Prohibition of user parameter

0: 1[s], 1: 0.1[s], 2: 0.01[s]

0: Allowed

●／●

―／●

●



0709

－

Enabled

－

initialization at type form initialization 1: Prohibited

Monitor display mode setting 0～29

Status monitor #1 display mode 0～29

Status monitor #2 display mode 0～29

Status monitor #3 display mode 0～29































0710

0711

0712

0713

0714

0720

0721

0722

0723

0724

0725

0726

0727

0728

0729

－

100

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

●/●

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

－

●

8.1

6.29.6

6.29.7

6.29.8

6.29.9

6.29.10

6.29.11

6.21.4

6.29.13

－

Status monitor #4 display mode 0～29

Selection of panel V/f1, 2, 3 or 4 1: V/f #1, 2: V/f #2, 3: V/f #3, 4: V/f #4

－

Panel stop pattern

Panel reset function

Panel torque limit

0: Deceleration stop，1: Coast stop

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

1～4

－

●/●

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

Panel PID control OFF

Panel torque reference

0: ON, 1: OFF

0～250 [%]

1/0.01

●/●

－

Panel synchronized torque bias -250～250 [%]

●/●

－

－/●

－

Panel tension torque bias

Panel load sharing gain

-250～250 [%]

0～250 [%]

●/●

－

Panel over-ride multiplication gain -100～100 [%]

●/●

－

0: All key operations prohibited

+1: Panel frequency setting enabled

+2: Parameter reading/writing enabled

+4: Monitor display operation enabled

+8: Panel drive operation enabled

(+16: no function)



0730

Panel operation prohibition

－

Disabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.29.14

+32: Emergency stop operation enabled

63: Default mode (all key operation enabled)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

[33] Communication function(1/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control







0800

0801

0802

Communication rate (common serial) 0: 1200, 1: 2400, 2:4800, 3: 9600

Parity (common serial/RS485) 0: No parity, 1: Even parity, 2: Odd parity

Inverter number(common)(*1) 0～255

－

1/1

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.30

Communication time-out

(common serial/RS485)

Communication time-out action

(common serial /RS485)

Communication waiting time

0.00: Normal, 0.01～2.00 [s]

(common serial)

Inter-drive communication

(common serial)











0803

0804

0805

0806

0810

0: OFF, 1～100 [s]

1/1

－

Enabled

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

6.30

0～8

0.01/0.01

－

0.00

0: Normal, 1: Frequency reference, 2: Output frequency,

3: Torque reference, 4: Output torque

0: Invalid, 1: Common serial, 2: RS485,

3: Communication add-on cassette option

0～100 [%]

0.0～ [Hz]

0～100 [%]

Frequency point selection

－















0811

0812

0813

0814

0820

0821

0825

Point #1 setting

Point #1 frequency

Point #2 setting

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

1/0.01

0.01/0.01

－

0.01/0.01

0.0

100

80.0

Enabled

●/●

－

●/●

－

－/●

●

6.30

Point #2 frequency

0.0～ [Hz]

Communication rate (RS485) 0: 1200, 1: 2400, 2: 4800, 3: 9600, 4: 19200, 5: 38400

RS485 wiring system 0: 2-line system, 1: 4-line system

RS485 communication waiting time 0.00: Normal, 0.01～2.00 [s]

0.00

Inter-drive communication (RS-

485)

0: Normal, 1: Frequency reference, 2: Output frequency,

3: Torque reference, 4: Output torque



0826

－

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

6.30



































0830

0831

0832

0833

0834

0835

0836

0841

0842

0843

0844

0845

0846

0850

0851

0860

0861

Data type

0, 1

1/1

200

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

※

Input reference setting #1

Input reference setting #2

Input reference setting #3

Input reference setting #4

Input reference setting #5

Input reference setting #6

Monitor output setting #1

Monitor output setting #2

Monitor output setting #3

Monitor output setting #4

Monitor output setting #5

Monitor output setting #6

0～16

Mode at communication error 0～4

Communication error detection time 0～1000

Receiving address

Transmitting address

0～1023

(*1): To be only monitoring available when using S20 option.

(*2): Parameters , , , , and  can be reflected at resetting (power OFF → ON).

※(Reference section): Refer to the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor (●valid, －:invalid)

　[33] Communication function(2/2)

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

Communi

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running

control control control

Inter-drive communication(speed

reference) opposite station number

Inter-drive communication(speed

reference) opposite station address

Inter-drive communication(torque

reference) opposite station number

Inter-drive communication(torque

reference) opposite station address









0862

0～64

1/1

Enabled

●/●

－/●

●

※

0863

0～1023

0～64

Enabled ●/●

0865

0866

0868

0～1023





S20 fault detection station number 0～64

1/1

Enabled ●/●

●/●

－/●

●

※

0869 Station mode selection

0～4



～



8090

～

0894

Parameters for options

Depend on options

0, 1

1/1

Disabled ●/●

●/●

－/●

●

※



0899 Reset function

－

Disabled ●/●

●/●

－/●

　[34] Reservation area

Vector control

Speed Torque Position

control control control

Communi

Title

Min. unit (panel/ Default Write during

V/f

Reference

Function

Adjustment range

Constant section

cation No

communication) setting

running











0900

0901

0902

0903

0904

Reservation area #1

Reservation area #2

Reservation area #3

Reservation area #4

Reservation area #5

－

: These titles are displayed but unusable. Only the standard default value is displayed.

※(reference section): Refer to the designated section of the inverter's individual manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

Meter output Speed Torque Position V/f Reference

control constant section

［Contents of monitor indications］

Communication

Communication Monitor output

Function

Trip holding

number

unit

selection

control

(*1)

control

―

Standard monitor

―



FE00

Trip frequency monitor

0.01 [Hz]

when tripped when tripped

－

●/●

－/●

●

Contents of status monitor indications

FE90

FE91

FE92

Pattern run group selection

―

at a pattern run

hold

－

●/●

－

●

Number of times to repeat current pattern

Number of stages for multistage pattern run

－

FE93

FE01

―

Remaining time of current pattern run

Status (rotation direction)

Status monitor #1

Status monitor #2

Status monitor #3

―

at a pattern run

Fixed

●/●

(*1)

－

●/●

－/●









Fixed

―

(*1)

―

Status monitor #4

FE06

FE50

FE51

FE07

FE52

FE53

FE48

FE47

FE54

FE55

FE08

FE43

FE09

FE44

FE10

FE11

FE12

FE13

FE14

Input terminal information

Input terminal information (optional)

Output terminal information

Output terminal information (optional)

Sink/source switching status

Type of connected option

Standard default value set last

Last set automatic control ()

CPU version

Flush memory version

Control EEPROM version

Main circuit EEPROM version

Past trip #1

Past trip #2

Past trip #3

hold

not hold

－

―

－

●/●

－/●

●

8.1

Fixed

―

1 hour

Past trip #4

Cumulative operation time

Status in a trip may not be held depending on selected function. Refer to next page.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

Meter output Speed Torque Position V/f

control control constant

［Monitor FM/AM/pulse output function selection］

Communication

Communication Monitor output

Reference

section

Function

Trip holding

number

unit

selection

control

FD00

FE02

FE03

FE04

FE05

FE15

FE16

FE17

FE18

FE19

FE56

FE20

FE21

FE22

FE23

FE24

FE25

FE28

FE29

FE30

FE31

FE32

FE33

FE34

FE35

FE36

FE37

FE38

FE39

FE40

FE57

FE64

FE60

Running frequency

Frequency command

Current

DC voltage

Output voltage

After-compensation frequency

Speed feedback (real-time value)

Speed feedback (1 second filter)

Torque

Torque reference

Internal torque reference (*1)

Torque current

0.01 [Hz]

0.01 [%]

0.01 [Hz]

0.01 [%]

0.01 [Hz]

0.01 [%]

0.01 [kW]

0.01 [%]

1 count

(*3)

hold

not hold

hold

●/●

－/●

●/●

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

●/●

－/●

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

―

－

●(*2)

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

●(*2)

●

Exciting current

PID feedback value

Motor overload factor (OL2 data)

Inverter overload factor (OL1 data)

PBr overload factor (PBrOL data)

PBr load factor (pulse duty)

Input power

Output power

Peak output current

Peak DC voltage

Motor counter dummy PG

Position pulse

PR input

VI/II input

RX input

RX2 input

FM output

AM output

Fixed output for meter adjustment

Analog output for communication

Acc/dec torque removal

●/●

－

－/●

●

5.4

●

－

1count

0.01 [%]

●/●

－/●

●/●

－/－

●

not hold

－

(*1): When =7,8,9, ●/● under speed control.

(*2): Reference data

(*3): Trip frequency is displayed in another way.

For details, refer to section 5.4; [Terminal FM-related parameters].

For monitor indications, refer to section 8.2; [Set up values of monitor indication parameters].

Communication number 31(Analog output for communication) outputs analog data of FA51.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

［Input terminal function setting (1/2)］

Positive Negative

Speed

control

Torque Position

V/f

Reference

section

Function

= = =～ =

logic

control

●/●

－

control constant

No assignment function

●/●

－/●

－

●

－

―

●

－

―

－

●

－

●

－

―

－

●

－

●

－

●

―

●

－

●

－

F: Forward operation command

R: Reverse operation command ●/●

ST: Standby (Inverse)

RES: Reset

●/●

－

S1: Preset-speed #1

S2: Preset-speed #2

S3: Preset-speed #3

S4: Preset-speed #4

Jog run

－

Emergency stop

●/●

－

－/●

－

DC injection breaking

Acc/dec switching #1

Acc/dec switching #2

V/f switching #1

－

V/f switching #2

－

Torque limit switching #1

Torque limit switching #2

PID control OFF selection

Pattern group #1

Pattern group #2

Pattern group #3

●/●

－

－/●

－

7.2.1

－

Pattern group #4

Pattern run continuation signal

Pattern run trigger signal

Forced Jog forward operation

Forced Jog reverse operation

Reservation area

－

Reservation area

－

: Reservation area. Do not set at these functions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

［Input terminal function setting (2/2)］

Positive Negative

Speed

control

－

Torque Position

V/f

Reference

section

Function

= = =～ =

logic

control

－

control constant

－

Reservation area

－

●

－

●

－

●

－

●

－

●

－

Reservation area

－

Reservation area

－

Binary data write

●/●

－

100

102

104

106

108

110

112

114

116

118

120

122

124

101

103

105

107

109

111

113

115

117

119

121

123

125

Up/down frequency (up) (*1)

Up/down frequency (down) (*1)

Up/down frequency (clear)

PUSH-type run command

PUSH-type stop command

Forward/reverse selection

Run/stop command

Commercial power/INV switching

Frequency reference priority switching

VI/II terminal priority

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

7.2.1

－

Command terminal board priority ●/●

●/●

－

－/●

－

● (*2)

－

Parameter editing enabling

Control switching (torque, position)

Deviation counter clear

Position control forward limit LS

Position control reverse limit LS

Light load high-speed operation enabling

Reservation area

Preliminary excitation

System consistent sequence

(BC: Braking command)

System-supporting sequence

(B: Brake release)

●/●

－

●/●

－

●/●

－/●

●

126

128

130

127

129

131

●/●

－

●

－

●/●

－

●

System-supporting sequence

(BA: Brake answer)

●/●

System-supporting sequence

(BT: Brake test)

Reservation area

132

134

133

135

●/●

－

●

－

●

－

(*1): Acceleration/ Deceleration time depend on  or .

(*2): This function is valid when the bit 15 of communication command 1 is .

: Reservation area. Do not set at these functions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

［Output terminal function setting (1/2)］

Positive Negative

Speed

control

Torque Position

V/f

Reference

section

Function

logic

control

●/●

－

control constant

Lower limit frequency()

Upper limit frequency()

Low speed signal

●/●

－/●

－

●

Acceleration/deceleration completion

Specified speed arrival

●/●

－

－/●

－

Failure FL (all trip)

Failure FL (except for  and )

Over-current pre-alarm

Inverter overload pre-alarm

Motor overload pre-alarm

Overheat pre-alarm

Over-voltage pre-alarm

Main circuit under-voltage () detected

Low current detected

Over-torque detected

Braking resistor overload () pre-alarm

In emergency stop

In course of retry

Pattern run switching output

PID deviation limit

7.2.2

－

Run/stop

●/●

－

－/●

－

Serious failure (, , , phase failure, etc.)

Light failure (, , , , )

Commercial/INV switching output #1(for inverter operation output)

Commercial/INV switching output #2(for commercial operation output)

Cooling fan ON/OFF

－

●/●

－

－/●

－

In Jog run

Panel operation/terminal board operation switching

Cumulative operation time alarm

Abnormal communication alarm #1 (caused by scanning)

Forward/reverse switching

●/●

－/●

Ready for operation #1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sensorless vector/vector with sensor（●: valid,－: invalid）

［Output terminal function setting (2/2)］

Positive Negative

Speed

control

Torque Position

V/f

Reference

section

Function

logic

control

●/●

－

control constant

Ready for operation #2

●/●

－

－/●

－

●

－

●

－

Poor control power supply () pre-alarm

System consistent sequence (BR: Brake release)

In (pre-)alarm status

●/●

－/－

●/●

－/－

－/●

－/－

－/●

Forward speed limit (torque control)

Reverse speed limit (torque control)

Inverter healthy output

－

●/●

－/－

Abnormal communication alarm #2 (caused by RS485 logic or message transmission)

Error code output #1 (6-bit output)

Error code output #2 (6-bit output)

Error code output #3 (6-bit output)

Error code output #4 (6-bit output)

Error code output #5 (6-bit output)

Error code output #6 (6-bit output)

Designated data output #1 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #2 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #3 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #4 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #5 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #6 (7-bit output)

Designated data output #7 (7-bit output)

Light load signal

7.2.2

100

102

104

106

108

110

112

114

116

118

101

103

105

107

109

111

113

115

117

119

Heavy load signal

Positive torque limit

Negative torque limit

Output for external rush suppression relay

Over travel

Completion of positioning

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Default settings]

Voltage

compen-

sation

Acc/dec

time

/

Torque Base freq.

Dynamic

Inverter

side

Auto-

Current

Speed

loop

Speed

loop

Motor

Rated

boost

voltage Dynamic Dynamic braking

PWM

restart restart Auto- control

constant #1 constant #2 constant #3 constant #5 capacity



 braking braking resister carrier switching adjust- adjust- restart integral proportio- integral

(primary

(secondary

(exciting

(leak

of motor

coefficient

for dead

time

nverter model

/   mode resistance capacity frequ-

/   ency

/              

waiting

time

ment

mode

gain

nal gain

 

gain

resistance) resistance) inductance) inductance)

(*2)











VFA7-2004PL

VFA7-2007PL

VFA7-2015PL

VFA7-2022PL

VFA7-2037PL

VFA7-2055PL

VFA7-2075PL

VFA7-2110P

VFA7-2150P

VFA7-2185P

VFA7-2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1

VFA7-2550P1

VFA7-2750P1

VFA7-2900P1













 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 









     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     









   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   



































 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

VFA7-4007PL

VFA7-4015PL

VFA7-4022PL

VFA7-4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL

VFA7-4110PL

VFA7-4150PL

VFA7-4185P

   (*1) 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   







































   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

   

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300P

VFA7-4370P1

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

VFA7-4750P1

VFA7-4110KP1

VFA7-4132KP1

VFA7-4160KP1

VFA7-4220KP1

VFA7-4280KP1

(*1):  and  blink alternately because the setting value is larger than 10Ω(10000mΩ).

(*2): For each inverter model, 's upper limit is rated capacity of one rank larger inverter. (Example: For the model VFA7-2004PL, the upper limit is 0.75)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. Specifications by types

11. 1 Standard specifications by types

1) Standard specifications by types (small/medium capacity types)

Item

Description

Voltage class

200 V class

Applicable motor [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55

Model No.

Type

VFA7–

2004PL 2007PL 2015PL 2022PL 2037PL 2055PL 2075PL 2110P 2150P 2185P 2220P 2300P 2370P1 2450P1 2550P1

Output capacity [kVA] (*1) 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.5 9.5 13 19 25 28 34 46 55 69 84

Output current [A] 3.0 5.0 8.0 10.5 16.6 25 33 49 66 73 88 120 144 180 220

Output voltage

Rated overload current

Dynamic braking circuit

3-phase 200 to 230 V (Maximum output voltage corresponds to input supply voltage.)

150% for 2 minutes, 215% for 0.5 second (*6)

Built-in dynamic braking drive circuit

Optional

Built-in braking resistor

External braking resistor/ braking unit is optionally available.

Rating :

Rating : 120W-70Ω

120W-40

Dynamic braking

resistor

Rating: Refer to 6.13.4.

Maximum braking:

100 %, Allowable

Maximum braking: 150 %,

Allowable working rate: 3 % ED

working rate: 3 % ED

Main

circuit

Control

circuit(*2)

3-phase 200-220 V, 50 Hz

3-phase 200-230 V, 60 Hz

3-phase 200-230 V, 50/60 Hz

Option

Voltage,

frequency

Single phase 200-220 V, 50 Hz

Single phase 200-230 V, 60 Hz

Allowable fluctuation

Protection structure

Cooling system

Coating color

Voltage: +10% / -15% (*5), Frequency: +/-5%

Enclosed type (JEM1030) IP20 (*3)

Forced-air cooling

Munsell 5Y-8/0.5

Option to be installed externally

Open type (JEMA1030) IP00 (*4)

Natural air cooling

EMI filter

Built-in

Item

Voltage class

Description

400 V class

Applicable motor [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75

Model No.

Type

VFA7–

4007PL 4015PL 4022PL 4037PL 4055PL 4075PL 4110PL 4150PL 4185P 4220P 4300P 4370P1 4450P1 4550P1 4750P1

Output capacity [kVA] (*1) 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.5 9.5 13 19 25 28 34 46 55 69 84 110

Output current [A] 2.5 4.0 5.0 8.5 13 17 25 33 37 44 60 72 90 110 144

Output voltage

Rated overload current

Dynamic braking circuit

3-phase 380 to 400 V (Maximum output voltage corresponds to input supply voltage.)

150 % for 2 minutes, 215 % for 0.5 second (*6)

Built-in dynamic braking drive circuit

Optional

Built-in braking resistor

External braking resistor/ braking unit is optionally available.

Dynamic braking

resistor

Rating : 120W-70

Maximum braking:

150 %, Allowable

working rate: 3 % ED

Maximum braking:

100 %, Allowable

working rate: 3 % ED

Rating: Refer to 6.13.4.

Main

circuit

Control

circuit(*2)

3-phase 380-440 V, 50 Hz

3-phase 380-460 V, 50/60 Hz

Option

3-phase 380-460 V, 60 Hz

Single phase 380-440 V, 50 Hz

Single phase 380-460 V, 60 Hz

Voltage,

frequency

Allowable fluctuation

Protection structure

Cooling system

Coating color

Voltage: +10%/-15% (*5), Frequency: +/-5%

Enclosed type (JEM1030) IP20 (*3)

Forced-air cooling

Munsell 5Y-8/0.5

Option to be installed externally

Open type (JEMA1030) IP00 (*4)

EMI filter

Built-in

(*1):

(*2):

(*3):

(*4):

Rated output capacity indicates a value based on the condition that output voltage is 220 V in case of the 200 V class or

440 V in case of the 400 V class.

The models of 22 kW or lower has no control power supply terminals(R0, S0). Optional control power supply is available

for those types.

There are three openings for wiring; namely, wiring holes for main circuit input, for main circuit output and for control

circuit. After wiring is complete, close the openings properly.

The models of 30 kW or higher have neither cover for the wiring hole that has a big aperture nor space for bending

external cables inside the unit. When a protector is installed externally, use an optional cover for the wiring hole.

Allowable voltage variation is +/-10 % in continuously operation (100 % load).

(*5):

(*6):

This regulation is overload value from the stop state at ambient temperature state within regulation value.

K-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2) Standard specifications by types (large capacity types)

Item

Voltage class

Applicable motor [kW]

Model No.

Description

200 V class

VFA7–

Type

2750P1

110

288

2900P1

133

350

Output capacity [kVA] (*1)

Output current [A]

Output voltage

Rated overload current

Dynamic braking

circuit

3-phase 200 to 230 V (Maximum output voltage corresponds to input supply voltage.)

150% for 1 minute, 180% for 0.3 second (*5)

Built-in type dynamic braking drive circuit is optionally available

External braking resistor is available optionally

Dynamic braking

resistor

Main

3-phase 200-230 V, 50/60 Hz

circuit

Control

circuit

Voltage,

frequency

Single phase 200-230 V, 50/60 Hz

Allowable fluctuation

Protection structure

Cooling system

Coating color

Voltage: +10%/-15% (*3), Frequency: +/-5%

Open type (JEM1030) IP00 (*2)

Forced-air cooling

Munsell 5Y-8/0.5

EMI filter

Option to be installed externally

Item

Voltage class

Applicable motor [kW]

Type

Description

400 V class

160

VFA7–

4160KP1

236

90/110

132

220

280

Form

4110KP1

160

4132KP1

194

4220KP1

320

4280KP1

412

Output capacity [kVA] (*1)

Output current [A]

Output voltage

Rated overload current

Dynamic braking

circuit

210

255

310

420

540

3-phase 380-460 V (Maximum output voltage corresponds to input supply voltage.)

150% for 1 minute, 180% for 0.3 second (*5)

Built-in type dynamic braking drive circuit is optionally available

External braking resistor is available optionally

Dynamic braking

resistor

Main

3-phase 380-460 V, 50/60 Hz

circuit

Control

circuit

Voltage,

frequency

Single phase 380-460 V, 50/60 Hz

Allowable fluctuation

Protection structure

Cooling method

Coating color

Voltage: +10%/-15% (*3), Frequency: +/-5%

Open type (JEM1030) IP00 (*2)

Forced-air cooling

Munsell 5Y-8/0.5

EMI filter

Option to be installed externally

(*1):

Rated output capacity indicates a value based on the condition that output voltage is 220 V in case of the 200 V class or

440 V in case of the 400 V class.

(*2):

The models of 30 kW or higher have neither cover for the wiring hole that has a big aperture nor space for bending

external cables inside the unit. When a protector is installed externally, use an optional cover for the wiring hole.

(*3): Allowable voltage variation is +/-10 % in continuously operation (100 % load)

(*4): Be sure to attach DC reactor (option) for the models: 200V class 75kW or more and 400V class 110kW or more.

(Not necessary for DC input.)

(*5):

This regulation is overload value from the stop state at ambient temperature state within regulation value.

3) Comparison between small/medium capacity types and large capacity types in specifications (different points only)

Small/medium capacity type

Large capacity type

VFA7-2750P1,2900P1

VFA7-4110KP1～4280KP1

VFA7-2004PL～2150P

VFA7-2185P～2550P1

Item

VFA7-4007PL～4150PL

VFA7-4185P～4750P1

1. Rated overload

current

150 % for 2 minutes

215 % for 0.5 second

Default setting: 12 kHz

150 % for 2 minutes

215 % for 0.5 second

Default setting: 12 kHz

150 % for 1 minutes

180 % for 0.3 second

Default setting: 2.2 kHz

200 V class 37,45 kW type: 8 kHz

200 V class 55 kW type: 2.2 kHz

400 V class 37-55 kW type: 8 kHz

400 V class 75 kW type: 2.2 kHz

Adjustable between 0.5 and 15 kHz

Adjustable between 0.5 and 5 kHz

2. PWM carrier

frequency

Adjustable between 0.5 and 15 kHz

2550P1,4750P1:

Adjustable between 0.5 and 8 kHz

3.Acceleration/deceleration

time (default setting)

30 seconds

4750P1:60 seconds

10 seconds

K-2

60 seconds

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4) Common specifications

Item

Description

Control method

Output voltage

adjustment

Sinusoidal PWM control

Main circuit voltage feedback control (Automatic regulation, "fixed" and "control off"

selections possible)

Output frequency range 0.01 to 400Hz, set to 0.01 to 80Hz by default, max. frequency adjustable from 30 to 400Hz

Frequency setting 0.01Hz: operation panel input (60Hz base), 0.015Hz: analog input (60Hz base, 12/16

resolution

bit/0-10Vdc)

Frequency

precision

+/-0.2% of the max. output frequency (25+/-10°C): analog input, +/-0.01% (25+/-

10°C): digital input

Constant V/f, variable torque, automatic torque boost, vector control and automatic energy-saving

Voltage/

control, base frequency 1

･2･3･4 adjustment (25 to 400Hz) arbitrary V/f 5-point settings, torque boost

frequency

characteristic

adjustment (0 to 30%), start-up frequency adjustment (0 to 10Hz), end frequency adjustment (0 to 30Hz)

Frequency setting 3kΩ potentiometer (1 to 10kΩ-potentiometer connection also possible), 0 to 10Vdc

signal

Terminal board reference

frequency input

(input impedance Zin: 33kΩ), 0 to +/-10Vdc (Zin: 67kΩ), 4 to 20mAdc (Zin: 500Ω)

2 sources can be set from a total of seven types, including analog input (RR, VI, II,

RX, RX2), pulse and binary/BCD (*RX2 and binary/BCD: optional)

Can be set in three places, jump frequency and band setting

Upper limit frequency: 0 to maximum frequency, lower limit frequency: 0 to upper

limit frequency

Frequency jump

Upper/lower limit

frequencies

Adjustable within a range of 0.5 to 15kHz

PWM carrier

frequency selections

(0.5 to 8kHz for 200V 55kW model and 400V 75kW model,

0.5 to 5kHz for 200V 75-90kW models and 400V 110-280kW models)

Proportional gain, integral time, anti-hunting gain, filter delay adjustments

PID control

Torque control

Voltage control reference: DC0 to +/-10V

0.01 to 6000 sec., acceleration/deceleration time selectable from among 1, 2, 3 and 4, automatic

acceleration/deceleration function, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration patterns 1 and 2 adjustment

Acceleration/

deceleration time

DC injection

braking

Braking start frequency: adjustment (0 to 120Hz), braking current adjustment: ( 0 to 100%), braking time

adjustment: (0 to 10 sec.), emergency stop braking function, motor shaft stationary control function

Forward run F-CC "closed", reverse when R-CC "closed", reverse when both "closed"

coast stop when ST-CC "opened", Emergency stop from panel or terminal block

Forward/reverse

run (*1)

Jog run from panel with JOG mode selection. Terminal block operation possible with

parameter settings.

Jog run (*1)

Set frequency +15-speed preset speeds possible with open/close combinations. S1,

S2,S3, S4 and CC Acceleration/deceleration time, torque limit and V/f selectable on

a frequency.

Preset-speed

operation (*1)

When a protective function activities, after main circuit devices are checked, running

restarts. Settable to a max. of 10times. wait time adjustment (0 to 10sec)

Automatic load reduction control during overload (Default setting: OFF)

Fan is automatically stopped, When not necessary to ensure to extended life time.

Prohibit functions such as reset only or monitor only etc., can be selected. All key

operations can be also prohibited. A protection reset function which requires special

operation to enable it is available.

Retry

Soft-stall

Cooling fan ON/OFF

Panel key

operation ON/OFF

switching

Operation is continued even during momentary power failure using regenerative

energy from the motor. (Default setting: OFF)

Regenerative power

ride-through control

The motor can be restarted at the same speed in the same direction it run under no-

load conditions before stop. (Default setting: OFF)

Auto-restart in

32 patterns in 4 groups (8 pattern in each group) can be set according to 15-speed

operation frequency. Up to 32 patterns of operation, control from terminal

board/repeated operation possible.

Simple pattern

run

Power supply to motor, switchable between commercial power and inverter

Commercial power/

inverter switching

High-speed run at

low-load

With this function, the load applied to the motor can be monitored. Its rotating speed

is increased to improve the operation efficiency when the load applied to it is low.

This function prevent a load from being imposed to a single inverter because of

imbalance, when more than one inverter is used in combination to drive the load.

Preset frequency control value adjustable by signals from an external control unit

Drooping function

Override function

Stall prevention, current limit, over-current, over-voltage, load-side short-circuit, load-side ground

fault(*7), undervoltage, momentary power failure (15ms or longer), regeneration power ride-through

control, electronic thermal overload protection, armature over-current during start-up, load-side

over-current during start-up, dynamic braking resistor overload, heat sink overheat, emergency stop

Protective

function

Electronic thermal Standard motor/constant-torque VF motor switching, electronic thermal stall

characteristic

prevention operational level adjustment

Reset triggered by closing 1a-contact (or opening 1b-contact), by control panel operation, or

by turning on the power after turning off temporarily. Tripped state retention and clear settings

Reset

(Continued on the following page)

K-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Continued from the preceding page)

Item

Description

Stall prevention during operation, over-current suppression, overload, power

source-side undervoltage (optional), DC circuit undervoltage, setting error, retry in

process, upper/lower limits.

Warning

message

Overcurrent, over-voltage, heat sink overheat, load-side short-circuit, load-side ground

fault, inverter overload, armature over-current during start-up, load-side over-current

during start-up, EEPROM error, RAM error, ROM error, transfer error (dynamic braking

resistor overload), (emergency stop), (undervoltage), (weak current), (over-torque),

(motor overload), (output open-phase). Items in parentheses are selectable.

Fault

causes

trouble

Operation frequency, operation frequency command, operating direction

(forward/reverse), output current, DC voltage, output voltage, compensated frequency,

terminal board input /output information, CPU version, control EEPROM version, tripping

history, cumulative operation time, speed feedback, torque, torque command, torque

4-digit

7-segment

LED

Monitoring current, exciting current, PID feedback value, motor overload rate, inverter overload rate,

function

PBR overload rate, PBR load rate, power supply, output current, peak output current,

peak DC voltage, motor counter pseudo PG, position pulse, RR input, VI/II input, RX

input, RX2 input, FM output, AM output, fixed output for meter adjustment, flash memory

version, main circuit EEPROM version, connection option types, previous default setting,

previous automatic control setting (AU2), sink/source switching status.

Selectable Can select frequency display to match motor speed, line speed, etc. Selection of

unit display

display of current in amperes/%, voltage in voltage/%.

Edit

function

Parameters different from those set by default are retrieved automatically, so that

parameters changed can be detected easily.

User

settings

Original parameters set by user can be stored. Parameters stored can be reset to

original user-defined parameters.

initialization

Charge

indicator

Indicates that main circuit capacitors are charged.

LED

Input/output terminal A-contact/B-contact switchable by making a selection from the programmable I/O

logic switching

terminal function menu. (*1), (*2) (Default setting: A-contact)

Sink/source

switching

Negative common (CC) and positive common (P24) of control terminal are switchable to

each other. (On shipment, negative common [CC] is selected as default setting.)

Fault detection signal 1c contact output (250Vac-2A-cosΩ = 1,250Vac-1A-cosΩ = 0.4, 30Vdc-1A)

Low-speed/speed

reach signal

output (*2)

Open-collector output (24Vdc, Max. 50mA, output impedance: 33Ω)

Upper/lower limit

frequency output Open-collector output (24Vdc, Max. 50mA, output impedance: 33Ω)

(*2)

Frequency meter

output/ammeter

output (*3)

Pulse train

Analog output, 1mAdc full-scale ammeter or 7.5Vdc-1mA voltmeter.

Open-collector output (24Vdc, Max. 50mA)

frequency output

RS485 equipped as standard (connector: modular 8P, optional device required for

communication with more than one unit)

RS232C, TOSLINE-F10M and TOSLINE-S20 are optional.

Communication

functions

Indoor, altitude 1000m or less, not subject to direct sunlight or corrosive/explosive

gas or steam.

Service

environment

-10 to +50°C (For models 15 kW or less, Max. 50°C, provided that the upper cover

is removed when the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.)(*6)

-25 to +65°C

20 to 93% (no condensation allowed)

5.9m/s2 {0.6G} or less (10 to 55Hz) (according to JIS C0911)

Ambient

temperature

Storage temperature

Relative humidity

Vibration

(*1): The 16 contact-input terminals (8 of which are optional) are programmable. For each of them, a signal

can be selected from among 136 signals.

(*2): For each programmable ON/OFF output terminal, a signal can be selected from among 120 signals.

(*3): For each programmable analog output terminal, a signal can be selected from among 32 signals.

(*4): When the cover is removed, the unit must be placed in the panel to prevent the charger from being

exposed. For the 30kW and larger models, the unit can be used in a temperature range of -10 to

+50°C with the cover left attached.

(*5): The models with a capacity of 30kW or more have uncovered wide-opened wiring holes and the unit

has no space in it which is large enough to bend external cables. So, use a optional wiring hole covers

when installing the unit outside.

(*6): To use VFA7-2150P in 40 to 50°C, reduce the maximum output current to 80% of rated output current.

Using VFA7-4150PL in 40 to 50°C, reduce the maximum output current to 85% of rated output current.

(*7): Protect the inverter from over-current caused by output-side ground fault.

K-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11.2　External dimensions and mass

■External dimensions and mass

Applicable

Dimensions [mm]

Approx.

mass

[kg]

Voltage

class

Outline

drawing

motor Inverter type

[kW]

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

VFA7-2004PL

VFA7-2007PL

VFA7-2015PL

VFA7-2022PL

VFA7-2037PL

VFA7-2055PL

VFA7-2075PL

VFA7-2110P

VFA7-2150P

VFA7-2185P

VFA7-2220P

VFA7-2300P

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1

VFA7-2550P1

VFA7-2750P1

VFA7-2900P1

VFA7-4007PL

VFA7-4015PL

VFA7-4022PL

VFA7-4037PL

VFA7-4055PL

VFA7-4075PL

VFA7-4110PL

VFA7-4150PL

VFA7-4185P

VFA7-4220P

VFA7-4300P

VFA7-4370P1

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

VFA7-4750P1

3.5

3.6

4.0

4.1

6.6

7.0

185

215

155

171

202

210

245

300

390

173

190

225

280

370

200V 15

18.5

15.4

22.5

207

197

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

18.5

300

370

555

630

200

537

609

290

317.5

480

660

680

950

330

370

426

598

652

920

148

3.5

3.6

3.9

4.1

7.0

7.1

185

210

215

300

155

171

190

202

280

173

190

245

300

370

390

555

630

225

200

370

537

609

15.4

207

197

400V

290

317.5

90/110 VFA7-4110KP1

159

166

168

480

660

680

950

330

370

426

598

652

920

132

160

220

280

VFA7-4132KP1

VFA7-4160KP1

VFA7-4220KP1

VFA7-4280KP1

K-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Outline drawings

2-φ7

2-φ6

2-R3

2-R3.5

W1(Mounting dimension)

Note)VFA7-2004PL and -2007PL have no cooling fan.

　　　　　　　Drawing A　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Drawing B

2-φ10

2-R5

W1(Mounting dimension)

2-φ7

W1(Mounting dimension)

R3.5

Note)VFA7-2185P, -2220P, -4185P, -4220P have cooling

fan in the upper part.

R6.5

　　　　　　　Drawing C　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Drawing D

2-φ12

6-φ25

2-φ12

4-φ16

W1(Mounting dimension)

　　　　　　　Drawing E　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　

Drawing F

K-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2-φ15

6-φ25

W1(Mounting dimension)

　　　　　　　Drawing G

■Dimensions for heat-sink going out attachment(simple type)

Dimensions when heat-sink going out attachment (simple type, refer to page A-19) is carried out

becomes as follows. For dimensions not in the table below, refer to the dimensions for normal attachment

(Drawing E, F, G). Mass is as same as the time of the normal attachment.

Applicable

motor

[kW]

Dimensions [mm]

Panel-cut dimensions [mm]

H4 H5 Screw hole

Voltage

class

Inverter

type

W2 H2 D2 D3 W3 H3 W4

200V 55

VFA7-2370P1

VFA7-2450P1

VFA7-2550P1

VFA7-2750P1

VFA7-2900P1

VFA7-4370P1

VFA7-4450P1

VFA7-4550P1

VFA7-4750P1

VFA7-4110KP1

VFA7-4132KP1

VFA7-4160KP1

445 630 161 287 375 590 417 609 9.5 4-M10 screw

573 680 186 330 500 630 527 652 12.5 4-M10 screw

762 950 173 370 680 890 712 920

15 4-M12 screw

445 630 161 287 375 590 417 609 9.5 4-M10 screw

573 680 186 330 500 630 527 652 12.5 4-M10 screw

400V 90/110

132

160

220

280

VFA7-4220KP1 762 950 173 370 680 890 712 920

VFA7-4280KP1

15 4-M12 screw

Screw hole

Pane-cut dimensions

K-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. Prior to service call－Trip information and countermeasures

12. 1 Cause of trip, warning indication (in detail and countermeasures)

If there is something abnormal in the inverter or system, troubleshoot referring to the following table before

calling service. If the inverter needs to replace some part or the cause of the trouble cannot be removed by

the measures mentioned in the table, consult the dealer of the inverter about the trouble.

[Trip information]

Indication

Contents

Expected causes

Countermeasures

･

Acceleration time #1  is too short.

V/f parameter is improperly set.

Running motor is started during

momentary power failure.

･

Extend acceleration time #1 .

Check V/f parameter.

Use  (Auto-restart) or 

Overcurrent

(Regenerative power ride-through control).

 during

 acceleration

(DC current)

･

Special motor (low impedance) is

･

Raise carrier frequency 

used, isn't it?

･

Manual torque boost value() is large.

･

Decrease setting value.

･ Output cable or motor falls into

ground-fault.

･ Check units and connections if there is

ground-fault or not.

･ Deceleration time #1  is too

short (in deceleration).

･

Extend deceleration time #1 .

Overcurrent

 during

･

Running motor is started during

Use  (Auto-restart) or  　(Regen

 deceleration

(DC current)

momentary power failure.

･ Output cable or motor falls into

ground-fault.

erative power ride-through control).

･ Check units and connections if there is

ground-fault or not.

Overcurrent

 during

 fixed speed

(DC current)

･ Load rapidly varied.

･ Load is abnormal.

･ Output cable or motor falls into

ground-fault.

･ Reduce load variation.

･ Check loading unit.

･ Check units and connections if there is

ground-fault or not.

Note: ,,

 originate

from causes other

than those

･

A device of main circuit is faulty.

Overheat protection is activated.

(5.5 to 15 kW, 30 kW or more)

Control voltage drop prevention function is

activated. (5.5 to 15 kW, 30 kW or more)

･ Make a service call.

･ Check operation of cooling fan.

･ Check cooling fan control mode parameter

.

･

mentioned above.

Overcurrent

･ Failure in wiring of main output

･ Check the wiring and motor insulation.

(loaded side

over-current at ･ Motor impedance is too low.

circuit or motor insulation.

･

Properly set output short-circuit detection



parameter  and 

start time)

U-phase arm

short-circuit

V-phase arm

short-circuit

W-phase arm

short-circuit

Phase failure

(input side)

･ Something abnormal in some

device of main circuit (U-phase).

･ Something abnormal in some

device of main circuit (V-phase).

･ Something abnormal in some

device of main circuit (W-phase).

･ Phase lacking in input side of

main circuit.









･ Make a service call.

･ Check connection of main input circuit for

phase lacking in input side.

･ Phase lacking in output side of

main circuit.

･

Check connection of main output circuit and

motor for phase lacking in output side.

Select output phase failure detection parameter

 for checking.

(*1)

Phase failure

 (output side)

･ Input voltage abnormally varied. ･ Try to insert input reactor.

1: Power-factor improving capacitor was

turned on/off.

Overvoltage

during



2: Some unit using thyrister is connected

acceleration

with the same power supply line.

･ Running motor is started during

momentary power failure status.

･ Use  (Auto-restart) and 

(Regenerative power ride-through control).

Extend deceleration time #1 

･

Deceleration time #1  is too short

(too much regenerated energy).

PBR resistance is too high.

Dynamic braking mode  is disabled.

Over-voltage stall protection  is

disabled.

･

Install dynamic braking resistor.

Decrease dynamic braking resistance.

(Also reset the .)

･

Overvoltage

during

･

Set dynamic braking mode parameter 



properly.

deceleration

･

Input voltage abnormally varied.

Set over-voltage stall protection 

properly.

Power-factor improving capacitor was

turned on/off.

Try to insert input reactor.

Some unit using thyrister is connected

with the same power supply line.

(*1): Presence or absence of parameter trip can be selected.

(Continued on the following page)

L-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

　　　　　　　(Continued from the preceding page)

Indication

Contents

Expected causes

Countermeasures

･ Input voltage abnormally varied. ･ Try to insert input reactor.

1 Power capacity is 500 kVA or

more.

2 Power-factor improving

capacitor was turned on/off.

3 Some unit using thyrister is

Over-voltage

 during fixed

connected with the same

power supply line.

･ Install dynamic braking resistor.

speed

･ Motor falls into regeneration status

because it is rotated fast

exceeding inverter's output

frequency by power of loaded

side.

･ Rapid acceleration is operated.

･ DC breaking rate is too high.

･ V/f parameter is improperly set.

･ Running motor is started during

momentary power failure status

or so.

･ Extend acceleration time #1 .

･ Decrease values of DC injection

braking current  and DC

injection braking time .

･ Check V/f parameter.

･ Use  (Auto-restart) and 

(Regenerative power ride-through control).

Inverter



overloaded

･ Load is too heavy.

･ Raise rating of the inverter.

･ V/f parameter is improperly set.

･ Motor is locked.

･ Continuous operation in low

speed range.

･ Motor is operated with overload.

･ Rapid deceleration is operated.

･ Check V/f parameter.

･ Check loading unit.

･ Reset  properly to motor's

overload reduction start-up

frequency.

Motor



overloaded

･ Extend deceleration time #1 .

･ Dynamic braking rate is too high. ･ Increase capacity (wattage) of

Dynamic braking



dynamic braking resistor and reset

resistor overload

･ Set over-voltage limit operation

the PBR capacity parameter .

revel parameter  too small. ･ Increase the setting value of .

･ Cooling fan is not actuated.

･ After cooling down inverter, reset it

from failure and try to restart it.

･ Ambient temperature is too high. ･ If cooling fan does not work in

operation, it needs replacement.

･ Secure spaces in the periphery of the

inverter.

･ Don't locate any heat generating thing

near the inverter.

･ Make a service call.





Overheat

･ Vent of cooling fan is shut.

･ Some heat generating matter is

located nearby.

･ Internal thermistor of unit is

disconnected.

Emergency

stop

･

Inverter is stopped by panel operation ･ Reset the inverter.

during automatic or remote operation.

･ Error occurs during writing data. ･Again turn on the inverter. If it is not

 EEPROM error

reset, make a service call.

 Initial read-error ･ Something abnormal in internal data. ･ Make a service call.

 Initial read-error ･ Something abnormal in internal data. ･ Make a service call.

 Main RAM fault

 Main ROM fault

 CPU fault

Interruption

 communication

fault

･

Something abnormal in control RAM. ･ Make a service call.

Something abnormal in control ROM. ･ Make a service call.

Something abnormal in control CPU. ･ Make a service call.

･ Something abnormal occurred

･ Check communication units and their

during communication operation.

connections.

Gate array

fault

･ Main gate array is abnormal.

･ Make a service call.



Output current ･ Main output current detector is

･ Make a service call.







detector error

abnormal.

･ Something abnormal occurred in

some optional unit (including

abnormal communication [optional ･ Refer to instructions of options

･ Check connection of optional

board(s).

Optional unit

fault

add-on cassettes]).

Flush memory ･ Something abnormal in flush

concerned.

･ Make a service call.

fault

memory.

･ Output current declined to the

low-current detection level during

operation.

･ Check to see if low-current detection

level is set properly to the system or

not ().

･ If low-current detection level is

properly set, make a service call.

low-current

operation

(*1)

(Continued on the following page)

L-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(Continued from the preceding page)

Indication

Contents

Expected causes

Countermeasures

･ Input voltage (main circuit)

･ Check input voltage.

becomes insufficient in operation. ･ If undervoltage is detected, set

･ Momentary power failure occurs

because undervoltage continues

longer than under-voltage

 (regenerative power ride-

through control),  (auto-restart)

and  (under-voltage detection

time) as countermeasures against

future momentary power failure.

･ Check input voltage.

(*1)

Under-voltage

 (main circuit)

detection time .

･ Input voltage (control circuit)

becomes insufficient in operation. ･ If undervoltage is detected, set

･ Momentary power failure occurs

because undervoltage continues

longer than under-voltage

 (regenerative power ride-

through control),  (auto-restart)

and  (under-voltage detection

time) as countermeasures against

future momentary power failure.

(*1)

Under-voltage

 (control circuit)

detection time .

(*1)

･ Load torque reaches over-torque ･ Check the system if there is

Over-torque

Ground-fault







detection level in operation.

･ Output cable or motor falls into

ground-fault.

something abnormal in it or not.

･ Check units and connections if there

is ground-fault or not.

･ Check settings of  to  parameters for motor.

･ Motor whose capacity is smaller by two or more ranks than that of inverter

is used, isn't it?

Auto-tuning

error

･ Extremely think cable is used as inverter output cable, isn't it?

･ Motor is running, isn't it?

･ Motor other than three-phase inductive type is used, isn't it?

･ If  error occurs as power is turned on, set motor type parameter as

 =  (others).



Inverter type

error

･ Is control board (or drive board of ･ When board has been replaced, input



main circuit) replaced?

 for .

･ Sink/source switch of

input/output terminal is set wrong

(reversely switched on/off).

･ Check connections and set proper

logic.

･ After making sure that sequence is

normal, proceed in operation.

･ If the same error does not occur when

the power is turned on again, the

system has recovered normal status.

(Check control terminals and

sink/source switches including those

of add-on options.)

Sink/source

switching error



･ The signal from a system is not

inputted into input terminals.

･ Please check if the sequence is

normal or not.

･ The input terminal function ( ･ Please set  or  as the input

or ) is not set up.

･ For not using the system-

supporting sequence 

function, it is set up except 0.0 at

.

terminal to use.

･ Please set up 0.0, when you do not

use system-supporting sequence.

 Sequence error

･ Disconnection of encoder circuit. ･ Check connection of encoder.

Connect encoder correctly.

 Encoder error

Speed error



･ Something abnormal in encoder ･ Check connection of encoder.

(Over speed)

(inverter)

Connect encoder correctly.

･ Potential deviation exceeded the ･ Check connection of encoder.

 set value during position ･ Increase the setting value of .

To much

 potential

deviation

control.

･ Adjust the parameters on position

control

･ RUN or STOP key is depressed ･ Check operation panel.

for 5 seconds or more.

 Key error

･ Key is faulty.

･ Breaking down of a wire for VI/II ･ Check VI/II input signal

input signal.

 VI/II input error

･ Connection between the inverter ･ Check connection between the inverter



and optional add-on cassettes is

abnormal.

･ Something abnormal in control

and optional add-on cassettes. If it is

not reset, make a service call.

･ Make a service call.



～



Read-error

signal.

Presence or absence of parameter trip can be selected.

(Note) Please contact us if you find any trips other than the above.

L-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[Message] The following are messages only. No trip is developed.

Indication



Contents

ST-CC opened ･ ST terminal is in open-circuit.

･ Undervoltage between RO and ･ Measure supply voltage of control

Expected causes

Countermeasures

･ Close ST-CC circuit.

Control circuit

undervoltage

SO of control power supply

(when option is used for 22 kW

or lower type).

power. If voltage is normal, it needs

repair service.





･ Undervoltage between R, S and ･ Measure supply voltage of main

Main circuit

undervoltage

T of main circuit power supply.

･ Trouble of pre-charge circuit

or DC circuit fuse.

circuit power. If voltage is normal, it

needs repair service.

･ Make a service call.

･ In retry operation.

･ Momentary power failure is

occurred.

･ If inverter automatically restarts

dozens of seconds later, it is

normal. Be careful of inverter in

retry status, because there is a fear

that it may suddenly restart.

･ Set points 1 and 2 of frequency

setting signal apart from each

other.



Retry indication

Frequency point ･ Points 1 and 2 of frequency





setting error

alarm

setting signal are set too close to

each other.

･ If STOP key is pressed after trip ･ Press STOP key once more for

Clear enabling

indication

indication, this indication

appears.

resetting.

･ Stop operation is performed by

panel during automatic or

remote operation.

･ If STOP key is pressed, emergency

stop is executed. To cancel

emergency stop, press any other

key.

Emergency stop

enabling

indication



Alarm for setup ･ Setup value error is detected in ･ Check setup value for input error.

value error

reading out or writing data.

(Error indication

/ and data are

alternately

displayed twice

each.)

･ Under DC braking

･ If message disappears dozens of

seconds later, it is normal. (Note)





DC braking

indication

･ Under motor shaft fixing control ･ If message disappears by stop

command (ST-CC open), it is

normal.

･ Number to be shown on panel

such as frequency and so on

overflows figures of display.

(Number of overflowing digits is

indicated.)

･ For indication of frequency, set

multiplying rate () lower.

(Parameter setting that results in

overflow is of course valid.)





Panel indication

overflow

･ Various transmission errors

occur when computer is linked

up with inverter system.

･ Various transmission errors

occur in inverter to inverter

communication (slave side).

Time-out or trip in master side.

･ For countermeasures against

various transmission errors, refer to

the "Manual for communication".

･ Check the master inverter.

Communication

error



Parameter is

under

initialization.

･ Parameters are initialized to be ･ If message disappears dozens of





standard default values.

seconds later, it is normal.

･ Under auto-tuning.

･ If message disappears several

seconds later, it is normal.

In auto-tuning

Note: In the case DC injection braking ON/OFF function is selected for an input terminal; if ""

disappears as a result of open-circuit between the terminal and CC, it is normal.

[Pre-alarm display]

Indication

Contents

Overcurrent alarm

Overvoltage alarm

Achieving PBR operation level

Overload alarm

Expected causes and countermeasures

Same as  (over-current)

Same as  (over-voltage)

P blink while PBR is operating is not an error.

Same as  /  (overload)

Same as  (overheat)









Overheat alarm

When two or more alarms occur at the same time, such the message as shown in the following blinks.

, , , ,・・・・・, 

Blinking indications appear in order of , , , from the leftmost place to right.

L-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. 2 Method of resetting causes of trip

If the inverter trips because of trouble or malfunction, remove the cause of trip before resetting it.

If the inverter is reset as the cause of trip remaining with it, it again trips in spite of resetting.

For recovering inverter from trip status,

(1) Cut off power supply (until nothing appears on the LED display).

Note: Refer to the section 6.25.3, Inverter trip holding parameter .

(2) Use external signal (make short-circuit between RES and CC of the control

terminal board).

(3) Operate on the panel.

(4) Clear the trip by communication (refer to "manual for communication" for details).

reset it in one of the following ways.

Resetting procedure by panel operation is as follows.

1. Check whether the LED on the control panel indicates that tripping has occurred. If the

occurrence of tripping is not indicated, press the MONITOR key to display it.

2. Press the STOP key and make sure that  message appears on the display.

3. Press the STOP key once more. If the cause of the trip is removed, the inverter is reset by the

second pressing of the STOP key.

☆If the inverter trips as a result of overload protection (: inverter overload, : motor

overload, : Dynamic braking resistor overload) function, it cannot be reset for a period of

virtual cooling time.

Standard virtual cooling time;

In case of : for about 30 seconds after trip

In case of : for about 120 seconds after trip

In case of : for about 20 seconds after trip

☆If the inverter trips because of overheat (), reset it after a considerably long time enough for

cooling it down completely, because overheat is detected based on its internal temperature.

　～ Caution! ～

For quickly recovering inverter from trip status, turn it off once and reset it. However, this

measure is taken frequently, it may cause damage to the motor and other component units.

L-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. 3 In the case motor does not run in spite of no trip message appearing ...

When the motor does not run in spite of no trip message appearing on the display, proceed to

troubleshooting according to the following flowchart.

　　　　　　　　　　　YES :

Motor does not run.

Input power

supply correctly.

Check input power and

MCCB.

Is input power

correct?

Is 7-segment LED display

turned on?

Make a service call.

Main circuit power is undervoltage. If input voltage or DC

reactor (DCL) voltage is low, check the connection.

For monitoring input voltage, refer to the section 8.1.

Is  blinking?

Control power is undervoltage. Check input voltage and

connection of control power supply. (This is an option for the

22 kW or lower type.)

Is  blinking?

･Circuit between ST and CC is open. Close the circuit between the

terminal assigned as ST (standby) and CC of the control terminal

board, (Refer to 7.2.1)

Is  blinking?

･Change setting value of ST (standby) signal selection parameter

. (Refer to 6.2.1)

Is trip indication appearing?

(Refer to 12.1.)

Investigate the cause of failure and remove the cause before

resetting the inverter. For resetting, refer to the section 12.2.

 and trip indication

are appearing alternately?

The inverter is in retry operation. Retry operation discontinues if stop

or emergency stop operation is done or power supply is cut off.

･In case of control panel operation: Turn on the RUN key to continue operation.

･Check to see if control panel operation frequency is set or not. (Refer to 3.2.2)

･In other operation mode: Change setting of control device selection parameter

.(Refer to 3.2.1)

Is LED on

RUN/STOP key

turned on?

･In case of control panel operation: Change setting of control device

selection parameter  to "1". (Refer to 5.3.)

･Setup status of input terminals can be checked by the monitor. (Refer to

8.1.)

･In other operation mode: Check to see if external operation command is

input.

･Check setup contents of  parameter (selection of operation to

which priority is given when forward and reverse run commands are input

simultaneously). (Refer to 6.2.2.)

･Check to see if frequency setting signal is set at "0".

･Check setup contents of frequency setting signal parameters

, ,  and . (Refer to 5.3.)

･Check setting of points 1 and 2 of frequency setting signal.

(Refer to 7.3.)

Is： appearing on

display?

･Check to see if operation start frequency is set higher than operation

frequency. (Refer to 6.7.)

･Check to see if frequency (preset-speed operation frequency, etc.) is

set at "0".

･Check to see if the motor is loaded too heavily or locked. - Reduce

load to the motor.

Check contents of parameters and indications appearing on the monitor.

For table of parameters and monitor indications, refer to the articles 10 and 8 respectively.

L-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12. 4 How to check other troubles

Expected causes of other troubles (abnormal operations and conditions) and measures to settle

those troubles are shown below.

Abnormal

Causes and measures

operation/condition

･Change phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W.

Motor runs reversely.

･Change forward and reverse signal inputs of external operation signals for

each other. (Refer to 7.2, Control terminal function allotment.)

･Load to motor is too heavy.

Reduce the load.

･Soft stall function is activated.

Switch off soft stall function. (Refer to 5.13.)

･Setting values of maximum frequency  and upper limit frequency 

are low.

Raise maximum frequency  and upper limit frequency  to higher

level.

･Frequency setting signal is low (weak).

Motor runs but speed

cannot be varied.

Check input level of signal, circuit and connection, etc.

･Check setup specifications of frequency setting signal (setting of point 1,

point 2). (Refer to 7.3.)

･Check to see if stall prevention function is activated at low-speed operation

because of too high torque boost rate.

Adjust manual torque boost () and acceleration time #1 (). (Refer

to 5.12 and 5.1.)

･Acceleration time #1 () and deceleration time #1 () are set short.

Increase setting values of acceleration time #1 () and deceleration

time #1 ().

Acceleration/deceleration

of motor is rough.

･Load to motor is too heavy.

Reduce load to motor.

･Check to see if torque boost rate is too high at low-speed operation. (Refer

to 5.12.)

Large motor current

･Improper voltage setting for the motor.

Set voltage properly to the motor.

･Terminal voltage of the motor is low.

Check setting value of base frequency voltage #1 (). (Refer to

6.13.6.) Change the cable for thicker one.

･Improper gear ratio for acceleration and deceleration.

Change gear ratio properly for smooth acceleration and deceleration.

･Output frequency is set improperly.

Motor speed is high or

low.

Check setup of output frequency range.

･Tune basic frequency. (Refer to 5.9.)

･Load to the motor is too heavy or light.

Reduce load fluctuation.

･Rating of inverter or motor is improper to load.

Change the motor or inverter for another of higher rating.

･Check to see if frequency setting signal input fluctuates.

･If V/f control parameter is set at 3 or larger, check setting value and setup

conditions of vector control. (Refer to 5.10.)

･Change panel operation prohibition parameter . (Refer to 6.30.14.)

Motor speed varies in

operation.

Some or all of six keys

on operation panel don't

work.

Access to parameter

results in failure.

Parameter cannot be

changed.

*Parameter is occasionally set for key operation prohibition mode. Cancel

key operation prohibition mode according to the following procedure.

Press the [△] key twice while pressing the [ENT] key.

1: If parameter setting prohibition parameter  is set at ""(prohibited),

change the setting to "" (allowed).

2: If there is an input terminal that is set for "" (or "") (parameter

editing enabling) by input terminal function parameter, turn on the terminal.

Monitor (display) is

uncontrollable.

Measures against trouble with parameter setting

How to check the

･ Changed parameters can be searched and reset.

For details, refer to 4.1.3.

parameters that have

been changed.

How to reset changed

parameters to default

values

･ Parameters whose values have been changed can be reset to their

respective default values in bulk.

For details, refer to 4.1.5.

L-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. Regular inspection and maintenance

　　Danger

･Be sure to inspect the inverter regularly.

If the inverter is used without regular inspection, it may cause trouble or accident because

sign of disorder or failure is missed.

･Complete the following steps before proceeding to inspection.

1 Cut off power supply (turn off the inverter).

2 10 minutes or more after power cutoff, check to see if the charge indicator lamp is turned

off.

Mandatory

3 Make sure that voltage in the DC main circuit (between PA and PC) is 45 V or lower by

use of a tester capable of measuring high DC tension (800 V DC or more).

If the above-mentioned steps are skipped before inspection, it may cause an electricshock.

To prevent the inverter from failure caused by operating environment such as influence of

temperature, humidity, dust and so on, vibration, and aging of component parts, and end of

estimated service life, execute daily or regular inspection without fail.

13.1 Regular inspection

Since electronic parts are easily affected by heat, install the inverter in a cool, well-ventilated,

dust-free place for making it demonstrate its original performance for a long time.

Purpose of regular inspection is to find sign of failure or malfunction by comparing current data

on operation with recorded data on past operation.

Gist of inspection

Inspection cycle Inspection method

1) Eye-check,

Subject of

inspection

Criteria of judgment

Inspection item

1) Dust,

humidity, gas

2) Dropping of

water and

1) Improve bad points.

2) Pay heed to trace left of

water drop.

3) Maximum 40°C (50°C inside

cabinet)

thermometer,

sense of smell

2) Eye-check

3) Thermometer

1. Indoor

environment

other liquid

3) Room

temperature

If something feels abnormal, open the

door and check transformer, reactor,

contactor, relay, cooling fan, etc.

Stop the inverter as occasion

demands.

As occasion

By feel (touch) of

demands

2. Component

parts and

units

1) Vibration,

noise

outside of the

board

1) Load current

2) Voltage*

3) Temperature

Moving-iron type

AC ammeter

Rectifier type AC

voltmeter

Within the rating

Little difference from data on

normal status

3. Operation

data (output

side)

Thermometer

＊）Voltage is differently read depending on the measuring instrument used. Use the same tester

or voltmeter for every inspection and record measurement result each time.

■Check points

1. Something unusual in the installation environment

2. Something unusual in the cooling system

3. Unusual vibration and noise

4. Overheat, discoloration

5. Unusual smell

6. Unusual motor vibration, noise and overheat

M-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. 2 Periodical inspection

Make periodical inspection at intervals of three or six months depending on operating conditions.

　　Danger

･Complete the following steps before proceeding to periodical inspection.

1 Cut off power supply (turn off the inverter).

2 10 minutes or more after power cut off, check to see if the charge indicator lamp is turned

off.

3 Make sure that voltage in the DC main circuit (between PA and PC) is 45 V or lower by

use of a tester capable of measuring high DC tension (800 V DC or more).

Mandatory

If the above-mentioned steps are skipped before inspection, it may cause an electric shock.

･Don't replace any component part.

Replacement of a component part by user may cause electric shock, fire or injury. Ask the

dealer for replacement of part.

Prohibited

■Points of inspection

1. Check to see if there is some wire terminal screw getting loose. If any, tighten it with a

screwdriver.

2. Make sure by eye-check that there is neither poorly clinched part nor overheated clinch in

wire terminals.

3. Check to see by eyes if there is any damage on wire or cable.

4. Clean up dust and soil. Absorb dust by a vacuum cleaner. Carefully clean the vents, printed

circuit boards and so on. If those parts get dusty, it may cause an unexpected accident.

Keep them clean always.

5. If the inverter won't be used for a long time, turn it on once every another year to check

operation. Furthermore, disconnect the motor and supply power to the inverter for five hours

or more. For turning on the inverter very seldom, it is recommended not to supply

commercial mains power directly to the inverter but to use a step-up transformer to supply

power at a low voltage first and to raise the voltage gradually.

6. If insulation test is needed, conduct it for the main circuit terminal board and control power

terminal board using a 500 V insulation resistance tester only. Don't conduct insulation test

for control terminals and circuit terminals on printed circuit boards except of the main circuit.

For insulation test of motor, disconnect output terminals of U, V and W and conduct test for

the motor only. If insulation resistance is below 10 MΩ, make a service call.

　　Note: Disconnect all cables from terminals of the main circuit terminal board, and conduct

insulation test with the inverter only.

Ｅ

Ｒ

/Ｌ１　Ｓ/Ｌ２　Ｔ/Ｌ３　Ｕ/Ｔ１　Ｖ/Ｔ２　Ｗ/Ｔ３　ＰＡ　　Ｐ０　　ＰＢ　　ＰＣ　　Ｒ０　　Ｓ０

500 V insulation

resistance

tester

7. Make no pressure test, because it may cause damage to internal parts.

8. Voltage and temperature check

Recommended voltmeter:

For input side: Moving-iron type voltmeter（

）

For output side: Rectifier type voltmeter（

）

If ambient temperature is measured at start time, during operation, and at stop time usually,

recorded data will be helpful to find sign of failure or malfunction.

M-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■Replacement of expendable parts

The inverter incorporates a great deal of electronic parts such as semiconductors, etc. The

following parts deteriorate because of their constructions, physical characteristics and aging.

If those parts are used as they have aged, it may cause the inverter to deteriorate in

performance and to become faulty. Such being the case, the inverter needs periodical

inspection for preventing itself from failure and deterioration.

Note: Service life of part is affected by ambient temperature and operating conditions. Service life of

main parts shown below is just standard when the inverter is used in the usual environmental

conditions.

1) Cooling fan

Service life of the cooling fan to cool down heat generation parts is 30000 hours (2 to 3

years under continuous operation) approximately. If it generates unusual noise or

vibration, it is a sign of replacement.

2) Aluminum electrolytic capacitor

The aluminum electrolytic capacitor of the DC main circuit deteriorates in characteristic

because of influence of ripple current, etc. If the inverter is used in the usual operating

condition, the capacitor needs to replace every five years. For the inverter that applicable

motor output is 3.7 kW or less, replace the capacitor together with the printed circuit

board.

･ No liquid leak

･ Proper setting of safety valve

･ Measurement of electrostatic capacity and insulation resistance

Aim of replacement time of each component part can be fixed by checking operation hours

of the inverter. For the replacement of parts, contact Toshiba branch office printed on the

back cover of this manual. (Operation hours can be known by alarm output, if it is set.)

■Standard period of years to replace main component parts

If the inverter is used under the standard operating conditions (ambient temperature: 30℃ on

average, load factor: 80 % or less, 12-hours operation a day), standard period of years to

replace main component parts is as shown below. The following period does not indicate the

estimated end of service life of the part but indicates the period that failure rate of the part

becomes sharply high thenceforth.

Standard period

for replacement

2 to 3 years

Part name

Cooling fan

Replacement method, others

Replace with new one.

Replace with new one (depending on

inspection result).

Main circuit capacitor

5 years

Contactor, Relay, etc.

Timer

Fuse

Depending on inspection result

Depending on operation hours

Replace with new one.

－

10 years

Change together with printed circuit

board for new board (depending on

inspection result).

Aluminum electrolytic capacitor

on printed circuit board

5 years

Note: Service life of part differs depending on operating environment.

M-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13. 3 When making a service call

For the Toshiba service network, refer to the back cover of this instruction manual. If defective

conditions are encountered, please contact the Toshiba service section in charge via your

Toshiba dealer.

When making a call for servicing, let us know the contents of the rating plate on the right side of

the inverter and connection of options besides details of the trouble.

13. 4 When retaining the inverter out of operation

When retaining the inverter out of operation temporarily or for a long time, pay heed to the

following points.

1. Keep the inverter in a well-ventilated place that is free from high temperature, high humidity,

dust and metallic particles.

2. For the inverter whose printed circuit boards are covered with the charge-proof cover (black),

don't remove the cover throughout retention. However, be sure to remove the cover before

the inverter is turned on.

3. If the large-capacity electrolytic condenser mounted in the inverter is left without power supply

for a long time, it deteriorates in the characteristic.

If the inverter won't be used for a long time, turn it on for 5 hours or more once every another

years in order to recover the characteristic of the electrolytic condenser. At the same time,

check operation status of the inverter. For turning on the inverter very seldom, it is

recommended to use a step-up transformer to supply power at a low voltage first and to raise

the voltage gradually.

M-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

14. Warranty

The inverter is warranted by Toshiba for repair and adjustment free of charge based on the

following conditions.

1. Warranty is limited to the inverter's main body only.

2. If the inverter becomes out of order or damaged under the usual operating condition within 12

months after delivery, it will be repaired free of charge by Toshiba.

3. Even in the term of the warranty, repair/adjustment service will be charged for the following

cases.

･ Fault or damage resulting from misuse, unauthorized modification or repair.

･ Fault or damage resulting from falling down of the product or traffic accident during

transportation.

･ Fault or damage originating from fire, salt water/salty breezes, some kind of gas, arthquake,

storm and flood, lightning, abnormal supply voltage, other natural disasters.

･ Fault or damage caused by improper use of the inverter as it is used for a purpose out of its

original application.

4. If field inspection of the inverter is carried out at the spot of installation, all travelling expenses

incurred will be charged. If there is another special warranty contracted for the inverter, the

special warranty has priority over this warranty.

N-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

15. When disposing the inverter

　　　　　　　Warning

・ When disposing an inverter, do it as an industrial waste following regulations

and local rules concerned.

If it is disposed otherwise, it may cause injury to persons.

Mandatory

When disposing a used inverter, pay heed to the following points.

Blasting during incineration: There is a danger that electrolytic condensers used in the

inverter may burst if it is burnt in an incinerator, because

electrolyte inside the condenser expands with heat. Be careful

of blasting of electrolytic condensers.

Plastics:

Plastics used as covers of the inverter and so on generate

poisonous gas when the inverter is burnt. When burning the

inverter, be careful of such poisonous gas.

Disposing manner:

Be sure to dispose the inverter properly as an industrial waste.

O-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Teledyne Baby Swing T201 User Manual
Thermador Oven POD301J User Manual
Thule Automobile Accessories 010 User Manual
Toshiba Security Camera IK DF03A User Manual
Tricity Bendix Oven TBS 749 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone UH041 User Manual
Universal Security Instruments Carbon Monoxide Alarm CD 9590 User Manual
Vivotek Automobile Electronics vc8201 User Manual
Vizio Projection Television VA320M User Manual
VuPoint Solutions Camcorder DV DA1 VP User Manual